Skip to main content

Full text of "Outdoor, street-car, and radio advertising"

See other formats


From  the  collection  of  the 


m 

»T> 

V, 


o  Prelinger 
v    Jjibrary 

t      w  P 


San  Francisco,  California 
2006 


1    % 


Outdoor,  Street-Car,  and 
Radio  Advertising 


By 

JOHN  T.  HOYLE 

ADVERTISING    COUNSEL 


OUTDOOR  AND  STREET-CAR  ADVERTISING 

By  JOHN  T.  HOYLE 

RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING 


536B 

Published  by 
INTERNATIONAL  TEXTBOOK  COMPANY 

SCR ANTON,    PA. 


Outdoor    and    Street-Car    Advertising:      Copyright,    1936,    by    INTERNATIONAL 
TEXTBOOK    COMPANY. 

Radio   Broadcast   Advertising,   Parts   1   and   2:      Copyright,    1936,   by    INTER 
NATIONAL   TEXTBOOK   COMPANY. 


Copyright    in    Great    Britain 


All    rights    reserved 


Printed    in    U.    S.    A. 


INTERNATIONAL    TEXTBOOK    PRESS 
Scranton,    Pa. 


82836 


CONTENTS 

NOTE. — This  book  is  made  up  of  separate  parts,  or  sections,  as  indicated 
by  their  titles,  and  the  page  numbers  of  each  usually  begins  with  1.  In 
this  list  of  contents  the  titles  of  the  parts  are  given  in  the  order  in  which 
they  appear  in  the  book,  and  under  each  title  is  a  full  synopsis  of  the 
subjects  treated. 

OUTDOOR  AND  STREET-CAR  ADVERTISING 

Pages 
Outdoor  Advertising   1-70 

Organizations  of  the  Outdoor  Industry 4-10 

National  Outdoor  Advertising  Bureau;  Commission 
arrangement;  Canadian  solicitorship. 

Publicity  Considerations 11-13 

Poster  Advertising  14-17 

Varieties  of  outdoor  advertising;  Advantages  of 
poster  advertising. 

Painted-Display  Advertising  18 

Details  of  Outdoor  Advertising 19-28 

How  business  is  conducted;  Basis  of  poster  dis 
play;  Cost  of  poster  advertising;  Methods  of 
printing  posters. 

Kinds  of  Posters   29-30 

The  Right  Form  of  Outdoor  Advertising 31-40 

Factors  governing  form;  Attention  value. 

Painted  Bulletins  and  Walls 41-62 

City  and  suburban  bulletins;  Ground,  and  roof 
bulletins;  Preferred  positions;  Railroad  bulletins. 

Illuminated  Displays 63 

Electric  Spectaculars 64r-70 

Nature  of  display;  How  displays  are  sold. 

Street-Car  Advertising   71-90 

Sizes  and  Positions  of  Car  Cards 73—77 

Cost  of  Car  Advertising 77-79 

Planning  the  Street-Car  Campaign 80-81 

Preparation  of  Cards 82-88 

Details  of  Campaign 81-90 


iv  CONTENTS 

RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING 

(PART  1)  Pages 

Development  of  the  Radio 1-41 

Foreword    1-2 

Physical  Structure  of  Radio 3-4 

Allocation  of  Stations,  Frequencies,  Power 5-9 

Federal  Communications  Committee;  Purpose  of 
commission. 

The  Development  of  Networks 10-16 

Evolution  of  radio;  Beginning  of  radio  advertising. 

The  Radio  Audience   17-23 

Radio — An  Advertising  Medium 24-34 

Relation  of  radio  to  other  advertising  mediums; 
Study  of  radio  as  a  medium ;  Determining  sales 
results;  Radio  as  a  sole  medium. 

Coverage    35-41 

Meaning  of  coverage;  Signal  strength  measure 
ments;  Primary  and  secondary  coverage;  Station 
popularity;  Telephone  survey. 

RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING 

(PART  2)  Pages 

Putting  Radio  to  Work 1-49 

Spot  Broadcasting   1-24 

Spot   broadcasting   by   merchants;    Details    of   spot 

•broadcasting;  Methods  of  advertising  a  program; 

Use  of  premium  offer;  Preparation  of  broadcast. 

Chain  or  Network  Broadcasting 25-31 

The  network  broadcast;  The  split  network;  Sus 
taining  programs;  Choice  of  radio  talent. 

Program  Types 32-36 

Audiences  and  programs;  Showmanship  necessary; 
Program  type  classification;  Musical  development 
furthered. 

Scheduling    37-43 

Continuity  of  efforts  needed;  Determining  desirable 
time  unit;  Amateur  hours. 

Mail  Response    44-46 

Merchandising  the  Program 47^8 

Conclusion    .  48-49 


OUTDOOR  AND  STREET-CAR 
ADVERTISING 

Serial  3358  Edition  1 

OUTDOOR  ADVERTISING 

1.  Scope  of  the  Subject. — Advertising  in  the  open 
air  is  the  oldest  form  of  written  publicity.  As  it  exists 
today,  it  is  one  of  the  most  effective.  It  has  made  tre 
mendous  strides  within  the  last  few  years;  not  only  in 
quantity,  but  noticeably  in  the  quality  of  the  whole 
medium — in  its  structural  betterment  and  its  copy 
beauty.  Structures  are  finer;  locations  are  more  judi 
ciously  selected ;  standardization  has  brought  progress,  and 
the  general  tone  has  been  raised  to  the  point  where  many 
of  the  best  advertisers  consider  outdoor  advertising  an 
indispensable  part  of  their  campaigns. 

In  Europe,  posters  occupy  a  very  high  place  in  the 
esteem  of  the  public  and  have  always  been  used  by  govern 
mental  departments.  The  Frenchman  or  German  has  a 
good  time  with  his  posters.  They  are  clever — or  bold — 
and  often  naive.  He  makes  them  simple  and  clean,  and 
one  feels  that  the  artist  himself  has  dominated  the  plan 
ning  of  the  outdoor  message  at  all  times  during  its  pre 
liminary  and  finished  stages.  This  characteristic  gives  to 
French  and  German  posters  a  very  definite  personality. 

English  outdoor  advertising  is  often  beautiful, 
especially  the  posters  produced  by  some  of  the  railways, 
showing  famous  localities  along  their  routes. 

Nowhere,  however,  is  the  poster  medium  so  well 
organized  as  in  the  United  States  and  Canada;  both 
countries  have  adopted  the  same  standards  of  business 
practice  and  the  same  construction,  and  they  use  the  same 

COPYRIGHTED    BY    INTERNATIONAL    TEXTBOOK    COMPANY.       ALL    RIGHTS    RESERVED 


2       OUTDOOR   AND   STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING 

units  of  size  and  showing  periods.  On  the  other  hand,  in 
Europe  painted  displays  and  spectacular  night  displays 
are  less  often  seen. 

2.  Outdoor     advertising     is     probably     the     most 
thoroughly    standardized    of    advertising    mediums.     It 
reaches  over   17,000  cities,  towns,  and  villages  in  the 
United  States  and  is  so  organized  that  it  is  possible  for  the 
advertiser  to  reach  any  one  or  all  of  these  communities 
almost  overnight,  and  be  assured  that  his  poster  showing 
will  be  scientifically  selected,  expertly  handled,  and  care 
fully  checked — also  that  the  price  will  be  uniform. 

3.  A  Huge  Industry. — Organized  outdoor  advertising 
represents  an  invested  capital  of  $125,000,000.     It  is  a 
substantial  customer  of  a  great  many  lines  of  business.     It 
is  the  largest  retail  electric-current  consumer.     It  is  the 
second  largest  sheet-steel  consumer.     It  is  first  in  point 
of  use  of  electric  lamps,  sockets,  and  reflectors.     It  uses 
substantial  quantities  of  heavy  lumber  as  well  as  the 
regular  sizes  and  ornamental  trim  types.     It  consumes  a 
large  quantity  of  structural  steel;  paint,  both  the  type 
used  for  house  painting  and  for  the  reproduction  of  copy; 
adhesives;  paper  and  electrical  supplies.     The  shops  and 
studios    contain   many   tools    and    a    large    amount    of 
machinery  necessary  in  wood,  steel,  metal,  and  electrical 
work. 

The  industry  is  a  large  user  of  both  passenger  auto 
mobiles  and  trucks,  and  consequently  uses  a  large  quantity 
of  gas,  oil,  and  supplies  necessary  for  their  upkeep.  Be 
cause  the  work  in  outdoor  advertising  is  all  done  on 
schedule,  it  requires  the  services  of  an  efficient  garage. 

The  annual  normal  purchases  of  outdoor  advertising 
as  an  industry  represent  $11,500,000. 

4.    Billboards. — The  word  billboard,  still  in  use  by  the 
general  public,   is  no   longer  used  within  the  outdoor 


OUTDOOR   AND   STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING      3 

advertising  industry.  Instead  of  billboards  we  now  have 
poster  panels  and  painted  bulletins.  These  terms  are  more 
descriptive  of  the  two  principal  kinds  of  outdoor  advertis 
ing  structures  now  in  use. 

5.  A  Changed  Viewpoint. — There  has  probably  been 
a  more  noticeable  change  in  the  country  in  the  last  32 
years  than  in  the  previous  centuries.  Now  we  have  over 
21,400,000  passenger  automobiles  on  the  road  in  the 
United  States,  an  attendance  totaling  49,000,000  people  a 
week  at  the  movies,  and  all  manner  of  wonderful  inven 
tions  which  have  been  given  to  the  American  people  with 
which  to  enjoy  life  and  crowd  more  variety  and  activity 
into  the  24-hour  period.  Most  of  the  wonderful  inventions 
that  have  been  given  us  have  divided  our  time  into  smaller 
units,  and  have  made  it  more  difficult  for  the  advertiser 
to  break  through  the  rush  of  the  day  and  register  his  sales 
impressions. 

These  changed  conditions  impel  a  sincere  consideration 
of  the  advertising  medium  which  operates  without  asking 
the  public  to  devote  much  of  its  own  time  to  the  reception 
of  the  message.  Hence,  outdoor  advertising  is  today  one 
of  the  major  advertising  mediums  in  this  country.  It 
offers  the  local  or  national  advertiser  a  powerful,  flexible, 
and  convenient  method  of  selling  his  goods  or  service  to 
the  public  at  a  profit,  and  it  forms  a  fundamental  part  of 
the  annual  selling  plans  of  thousands  of  advertisers,  large 
and  small,  in  all  sections  of  the  country. 

In  addition,  outdoor  advertising  has  special  significance 
in  relation  to  the  development  of  a  distinctively  American 
poster  art,  and  the  medium  offers  many  opportunities 
to  the  ambitious  artist  or  art  student.  It  exerts  and  will 
exert  a  widespread  social  and  educational  influence  on 
community  life. 


4       OUTDOOR   AND   STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING 

ORGANIZATIONS  OF  THE  OUTDOOR  INDUSTRY 

6.  Major    Organizations  .—There    are    four    major 
organizations  in  the  outdoor  industry ;  namely,  the  General 
Outdoor    Advertising    Company,    Outdoor    Advertising 
Incorporated,    National    Outdoor    Advertising    Bureau 
and  Traffic  Audit  Bureau,  Inc. 

7.  General    Outdoor    Advertising    Company. — The 

General  Outdoor  Advertising  Company  is  the  organization 
of  so-called  plant  owners.  All  of  the  sites  upon  which  the 
structures  of  organized  outdoor  advertising  are  placed 
are  either  owned  or  leased  by  a  member  of  the  company. 
Ownership,  however,  is  comparatively  rare,  so  that  the 
greater  number  of  the  locations  are  leased  from  property 
owners.  It  is  estimated  that  200,000  landlords  receive 
rentals  from  company  members.  In  most  instances  the 
property  is  idle  and,  except  for  these  rentals,  would  bring 
in  no  revenue  whatever. 

8.  Outdoor      Advertising      Incorporated. — Outdoor 
Advertising  Incorporated  is  the  selling  organization  con 
tacting  agencies  and  advertisers. 

Outdoor  Advertising  Incorporated  is  interested  in 
only  one  thing — the  development  of  a  wider,  more  intelli 
gent,  and  more  profitable  use  of  outdoor  advertising  by 
national  advertisers.  It  offers  the  counsel  and  sales 
assistance  of  a  thoroughly  trained  and  experienced 
organization  of  representatives  who  have  not  only  a 
specialized  knowledge  of  outdoor  advertising  but  a 
thorough  understanding  of  general  merchandising  and 
advertising.  These  representatives  know  the  applica 
tion  of  the  medium  to  markets,  and  approach  advertising 
problems  from  the  marketing  point  of  view.  They  have, 
of  course,  a  complete  understanding  of  the  various  classi 
fications  of  outdoor  advertising  and  the  possible  combina 
tions  that  may  be  used  to  accomplish  the  greatest  results 
in  conjunction  with  other  media. 


OUTDOOR   AND   STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING      5 

If  necessary,  an  art  director  or  a  copy  adviser  will  sit 
in  conference  with  client,  agency  or  solicitor,  for  the  pur 
pose  of  discussing  outdoor  art  and  copy. 

Advertising  ideas,  written  copy,  and  colored  visual 
sketches  form  a  regular  part  of  the  service,  rendered  with 
out  charge  to  advertising  agencies  and  solicitors. 

9.  The  approach  to  the  advertiser  is  made  in  coopera 
tion  with  the  agency  or  solicitor  through  which  the  busi 
ness  is  being  placed. 

Outdoor  Advertising  Incorporated  will  not  help  an 
agency  or  a  solicitor  to  secure  an  account  already  active 
with  another  agency  or  solicitor.  The  company  does  not 
maintain  facilities  for  the  placing  of  business,  will  not  enter 
into  contracts  with  advertisers,  but  will  always  have  such 
contracts  executed  through  the  agency  or  solicitor  selected 
by  the  advertiser. 

Since  Outdoor  Advertising  Incorporated  represents 
the  industry  at  large  and  not  the  interests  of  any  particular 
plant  owner  or  group  of  plant  owners,  it  does  not  designate 
or  recommend  facilities  to  be  employed  in  towns  where 
more  than  one  outdoor  advertising  plant  is  available. 

In  1935,  Outdoor  Advertising  Incorporated  reaffirmed 
its  policy  of  not  accepting  hard-liquor  advertising  on 
posters.  Paint  or  spectaculars  (see  Arts.  66  and  83)  may 
be  used  where  there  are  no  legal  or  other  restrictions.  No 
restriction  is  imposed,  however,  upon  beer  or  wines  in 
respect  to  either  paint  or  posting. 

10.  National    Outdoor    Advertising    Bureau. — The 

National  Outdoor  Advertising  Bureau  is  the  agency  or 
ganization  formed  and  operated  by  200  of  the  larger 
advertising  agencies  in  the  country  and  maintained  as  a 
placing  bureau.  Through  this  organization,  with  its  wide 
spread  contacts  and  facilities,  the  agency  may  obtain 
accurate  information  as  to  outdoor  conditions  in  any  part 


6       OUTDOOR   AND   STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING 

of  the  country  and  place  its  contracts  in  any  section  or  in  all 
sections  accurately  and  economically.  By  this  coopera 
tive  method  it  is  possible  to  secure  for  the  advertiser  a 
more  complete  service  at  a  lower  cost  than  would  be 
possible  in  any  other  way.  The  Bureau  has  been  declared, 
by  many  leaders  of  the  advertising  profession,  to  be  the 
finest  cooperative  organization  for  service  now  existing 
in  the  entire  field  of  advertising. 

11.  The  purpose  of  the  Bureau  as  originally  conceived 
by  its  organizers  and,  as  constantly  maintained,  is  to 
enable  any  and  all  agencies  doing  a  general  advertising 
business  to  function  systematically  in  the  outdoor  medium 
at  a  regularly  established  commission  to  the  agency  on 
any  and  all  outdoor  plants,  without  the  need  for  special  and 
individual   bargaining   with   the   plant   operators   where 
space  is  desired.     The  Bureau  is  operated  primarily  to 
serve  its  agency  members  in  their  work  of  buying  space 
for  clients,  and  is  not  operated  for  profit.     The  Bureau  is 
run  for  the  equal  benefit  of  all  agency  members,  without 
regard  to  the  size  of  the  agency  or  the  volume  of  outdoor 
advertising  placed.     Particular  attention  is  devoted  to 
illumination  service  on  night  displays,  and  close  watch  is 
kept  on  this  phase  of  service  to  see  that  illumination  is 
rendered  from  dusk  till  midnight  on  all  displays  bearing 
illumination. 

The  field-service  work  of  the  Bureau  has  well  been 
called  the  Audit  Bureau  of  Circulation  of  Outdoor  Adver 
tising. 

12.  Commission  Arrangement. — The  gross  commis 
sion  applying  to  outdoor  advertising  is  16f  per  cent.     Of 
this  gross  commission  13  per  cent  is  apportioned  by  the 
Bureau  to  the  agency  member  for  whom  the  business  is 
placed.     This  13  per  cent  commission  is  deductible  from 
remittances  for  service.     The  entire  Bureau  organization 
and  its  complete  operations  are  maintained  on  the  remain- 


OUTDOOR   AND   STREET-CAB   ADVERTISING      7 

der  of  3f  per  cent.     Under  this  arrangement,  the  Bureau 
makes  payment  to  all  plant  owners. 

13.  Canadian  Solicitorship. — The  Bureau  holds  the 
only  franchise  for  solicitorship  in  the  United  States  through 
which  an  American  agency  can  place  outdoor  advertising 
contracts  with  Canadian  plant  operators. 

This  franchise  has  been  gained  only  through  cultivation 
of  the  Canadian  plant  owners  over  a  period  of  many  years. 
Bureau  representatives  are  always  in  attendance  at 
Canadian  conventions  and  at  other  meetings  in  Canada, 
and  the  Bureau  holds  the  good-will  of  the  industry  in 
Canada  to  just  as  great  a  degree  as  it  is  enjoyed  in  the 
United  States. 

14.  Traffic  Audit  Bureau,  Inc. — The  Traffic  Audit 
Bureau,  Inc.,  is  a  non-profit  service  organization  repre 
senting  the  Association  of  National  Advertisers,  Inc.,  the 
American  Association  of  Advertising  Agencies,  Inc.,  and 
Outdoor  Advertising  Incorporated.     It  is  the  established, 
national  authority  for  the  authentication  of  the  circulation 
values  of  outdoor  advertising,  just  as  the  Audit  Bureau 
of  Circulation  is  the  official  authority  for  authenticated 
circulation  values  in  newspapers  and  magazines. 

15.  Classes    of    Membership. — The    Traffic    Audit 
Bureau,  Inc.,  has  three  classes  of  members: 

Corporate  Members. — Eight  Corporate  Members,  representing 
the  three  organizations,  form  the  board  of  directors  and  exer 
cise  the  entire  control  of  the  corporation. 

Service  Members. — The  thirteen  hundred  service  members  repre 
sent  every  important  advertiser,  agency,  direct  solicitor,  and 
source  of  business  in  the  United  States. 

Plant  Members. — The  more  than  one  thousand  plant  members 
of  the  Traffic  Audit  Bureau  represent  the  actual  operators 
of  poster  and  painted-display  plants  throughout  the  United 
States. 

The  work  of  the  Traffic  Audit  Bureau,  Inc.,  was  con 
ducted  during  the  year  1935  at  a  cost  of  35  cents  per  poster 


8       OUTDOOR   AND   STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING 

panel  per  year,  or  at  a  charge  to  the  plant  operator  of  less 
than  3  cents  per  month  per  panel.  The  fee  for  the  audit 
of  painted  display  is  70  cents  per  unit  per  year. 

16.  Value    of   Audit    Service. — The    advantages    of 
audited   circulation   may   be   summarized   briefly.     The 
Traffic  Audit  Bureau,  Inc.,  resulted  from  a  demand  on  the 
part  of  advertisers  and  agencies  for  a  more  accurate  and 
detailed  knowledge  of  the  advertising  values  of  the  out 
door  medium.     The  experience  of  plant  members  whose 
properties  have  been  audited  justifies  the  following  con 
clusions  : 

(a)  Plant  audit  results  in  a  greater  confidence  on  the  part  of 
advertisers  and  agencies  in  space  buying. 

(6)  Plant  audit  gives  the  operator  a  vital  basis  for  selling  and 
provides  sales  representatives,  both  national  and  local,  with 
real  selling  arguments. 

(c)  Plant  audit  insures  plant  investment  by   providing  the 
operator  with  guidance  for  economical  and  efficient  plant 
location  and  construction. 

(d)  The  work  of  the  Traffic  Audit  Bureau  has  brought  added 
power  and  dignity  to  the  entire  outdoor  industry  through 
the  spirit   of    cooperation   generated   between   buyer   and 
seller. 

STATUS   OF   OUTDOOR  ADVERTISING 

17.  Growth  of  the  Industry. — Outdoor  advertising  is 
a  national  institution.     Together  with  the  newspaper, 
magazine,  and  radio,  it  must  be  considered  as  one  of  the 
major  media  in  the  planning  of  an  advertising  program. 
It  is  not  a  competitor  of  the  others.     A  friendly  rival  would 
be  a  better  term.     Each  major  medium  has  its  job  to  do 
— its  well-defined  place  in  a  properly  balanced  schedule. 

Outdoor  advertising  is  one  of  the  newer  media.  Thirty 
years  ago  it  existed  only  in  spots  and  was  confined  largely 
to  painted  barns  and  fences.  Today  it  covers  the  United 
States  and  Canada  like  a  blanket  and  probably  is  more 
nearly  standardized  than  any  other 


OUTDOOR   AND   STREET-CAR    ADVERTISING      9 

18.  It  is  significant  that  during  the  last  two  years 
when  more  has  been  demanded  of  advertising  dollars  than 
ever  before,  many  new  advertisers  have  been  attracted  to 
the  outdoor  medium. 

There  are  several  logical  reasons  for  this  trend: 

1.  Outdoor  advertising  has  a  distinct  appeal  to  the  advertiser 
because  of  its  size  and  visibility. 

2.  It  works  24  hours  a  day,  and  the  constant  repetition  of  the 
message  insures  lasting  impression. 

3.  Its  extreme  flexibility  enables  the  advertiser  to  reach  any 
section  or  city,  or  even  any  part  of  a  city,  without  waste 
coverage. 

4.  The  low  cost  of  circulation  on  a  per  thousand  basis,  and  the 
positiveness  of  the  coverage,  make  it  attractive  from  a  purely 
price  viewpoint. 

Advertisers  have  been  quick  to  sense  these  things  and 
are  more  and  more  inclined  to  find  a  place  on  their  program 
for  the  outdoor  medium. 

19.  Classification    of   the    Outdoor    Industry. — The 

business  of  outdoor  advertising  is  classified  according  as 
it  is  used  nationally,  locally  or  cooperatively. 

The  term  national  business  refers  to  the  outdoor 
advertising  of  any  product  or  service  which  is  the  subject 
of  national  or  sectional  distribution. 

The  term  local  business  refers  to  the  outdoor  advertis 
ing  of  any  retail  merchandising  or  manufacturing  busi 
ness,  product  or  service,  the  distribution  of  which  is 
confined  within  the  metropolitan  zone  or  recognized  retail 
trading  area  in  which  the  related  contract  is  to  be  per 
formed. 

The  term  cooperative  business  refers  to  the  outdoor 
advertising  of  any  product  or  service  which  is  the  subject 
of  national  or  sectional  distribution  for  which  outdoor 
advertising  payment  is  made  in  part  by  the  manufacturer, 
his  distributor,  and  his  retail  outlets. 


10     OUTDOOR   AND   STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING 

20.  Code  of  Ethics. — The  code  of  ethics  observed  by 
all  members  of  the  various  organizations  is  briefly  as 
follows : 

1.  To  provide  an  efficient  advertising  service  outdoors. 

2.  To  give  to  the  advertiser's  message  coverage  of  the  popula 
tion  as  it  moves  within  and  through  the  retail-trading  and 
wholesale-distribution  areas. 

3.  To  conduct  the  business  of  outdoor  advertising  so  that  there 
will  exist  at  all  times  an  equal  opportunity  for  all  advertisers 
and  their  accredited  advertising  representatives. 

4.  To  recognize  the  economic  and  social  value  of  other  media 
of  advertising  and  to  cooperate  with  them  in  the  general 
interest  of  the  advertiser  and  the  public. 

5.  To  serve  the  public  through  giving  publicity  to  meritorious 
products  and  services  conducive  to  the  general   welfare   of 
the  consumer. 

6.  To  give  encouragement  and  support  to  projects,  either  com 
munity,  state  or  national  in  scope,  which  are  of  benefit  to  the 
public. 

7.  To  place  and  maintain  outdoor-advertising  facilities  in  such  a 
way  that  they  will  be  acceptable  to  reasonable-minded  per 
sons  and  to  the  end  that  the  natural  beauties  of  the  rural 
landscape  and  the  amenities  of  historical  and  public  shrines 
will  be  protected  and  preserved. 

21.  Standards  of  Practice. — Members  are  prohibited 
from  posting,  painting,  placing,  or  affixing  advertising 
copy  of  any  description  on  rocks,  posts,  trees,  fences  or 
barricades.     Moreover,  members  shall  not  place  or  main 
tain,  for  advertising  purposes,  structures  which  are  within 
the  right-of-way  of  a  highway;  or  without  a  lease  or  con 
sent  from  the  property  owner  or  his  agent ;  or  which  create 
an  obstruction  of  view  constituting  a  hazard  to  traffic;  or 
which  are  not  in  proper  physical  condition. 

22.  Standards   of    Copy. — Members    are   prohibited 
from  displaying  copy,  either  pictorial  or  otherwise,  which 
is  critical  of  the  laws  of  the  United  States  or  any  state,  or 
which  induces  a  violation  of  those  laws,   or  which  is 
offensive  to  the  moral  standards  of  the  community  at  the 
time  the  copy  is  offered  for  display,  or  which  is  false,  mis 
leading  or  deceptive. 


OUTDOOR   AND   STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING     11 

PUBLICITY   CONSIDERATIONS 

23.  Repetition  Value. — Repetition  is  a  highly  impor 
tant  attribute  of  advertising.     An  outdoor  advertisement 
is  always  open  to  view;  it  is  always  working;  always  being 
seen;  morning,  noon,  and  night,  day  after  day,  and  week 
after  week.     The  outdoor  advertisement  is  always  impress 
ing  its  message  upon  the  minds  of  the  people  who  make 
up  the  market.     Full   coverage  showings  of  poster  or 
painted  displays  give  time  repetition  as  well  as  place 
repetition,  constantly  repeating  and  reinforcing  the  im 
pressions  previously  made.     These  constant  and  frequent 
repetitions  of  the  advertiser's  message  constitute  one  of 
the  chief  attributes  of  outdoor  advertising. 

24.  Circulation  Values. — The  verification  of  outdoor 
circulation  is  based  on  physical  problems  of  ten  different  from 
those  of  publications.  The  location  of  the  outdoor  structure, 
its  position,  the  speed  of  the  reader,  the  length  and  angle 
of  approach  are  all  factors  in  evaluating  circulation. 

The  operator  of  an  outdoor-advertising  plant  who  has 
become  a  plant  member  is  responsible  for  the  preparation 
of  a  so-called  plant-operator  statement.  In  character,  this 
is  similar  to  the  publisher's  statement  required  by  the 
Audit  Bureau  of  Circulation.  Having  determined  the 
effective  circulation  for  each  poster-display  location  in  the 
plant,  the  operator  proceeds  to  determine  the  space-posi 
tion  value  of  each  individual  poster  panel  in  relation  to  the 
effective  circulation  to  which  it  is  exposed. 

25.  Types  of  Traffic. — There  are  three  types  of  traffic 
considered. 

Class  A  traffic  is  a  traffic  stream  composed  of  practically  all 
passenger  automobiles  and  a  negligible  proportion  of 
truck  and  street-car  or  bus  traffic. 

Class  B  Traffic  is  a  traffic  stream  with  a  general  mixture   of 
passenger  automobiles,  truck,  and  street-car  or  bus  traffic. 

Class  C  Traffic  is  a  traffic  stream  with  a  relatively  high  propor 
tion  of  truck  and  street-car  or  bus  traffic. 


12     OUTDOOR   AND   STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING 

26.  Character  of  Location. — The  character  of  the 
location  is  classified  according  as  it  is  residential,  retail, 
or  manufacturing. 

A  residential  area  is  one  in  which  more  than  50  per 
cent  of  the  frontage  on  the  street  is  occupied  by  buildings 
used  as  dwellings.  A  first-class  residential  .area  is  one 
within  which  the  average  dwelling  (not  including  the  lot) 
has  a  current  replacement  value  of  over  $10,000,  or  an 
area  dominated  by  modern  Class  A  apartments  or  flats. 
A  second-class  residential  area  is  one  within  which  the 
average  dwelling  has  a  current  replacement  value  of 
between  $2,500  and  $10,000,  or  an  area  dominated  by 
apartments  or  flats  of  second-class  construction,  or  old, 
out-of-date  apartments  of  first-class  construction.  A 
third-class  residential  area  is  one  within  which  the  aver 
age  dwelling  has  a  current  replacement  value  of  less  than 
$2,500  or  an  area  dominated  by  tenant  buildings  or  rooming 
and  boarding  houses. 

A  retail  shopping  area  is  one  in  which  more  than  50 
per  cent  of  the  frontage  on  the  street  is  occupied  by 
buildings  used  for  retail  selling.  A  first-class  retail  shop 
ping  area  is  one  characterized  by  high-class  department 
stores,  specialty  shops,  hotels,  theaters,  and  office  build 
ings.  A  second-class  retail  shopping  area  is  one  charac 
terized  by  a  mixture  of  medium-sized  department  stores, 
small  business  establishments,  and  middle-class  restau 
rants,  theaters,  and  hotels.  A  third-class  retail  shopping 
area  is  one  characterized  by  retail  stores  catering  princi 
pally  to  the  laboring  class,  and  by  low-priced  restaurants 
and  theaters. 

A  manufacturing  area  is  one  in  which  more  than  50 
per  cent  of  the  frontage  on  the  street  is  occupied  by 
structures  or  plants  used  for  manufacturing,  wholesaling 
or  industrial  purposes.  A  first-class  manufacturing  area 
is  one  characterized  by  light  manufacturing  or  wholesale 
business.  A  second-class  manufacturing  area  is  one 


OUTDOOR   AND   STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING     13 

characterized  by  heavy  manufacturing,  wharves,  docks, 
freight  terminals  or  warehouses. 

27.  The  circulation  of  outdoor  advertising  is  limited 
only  by  the  number  of  those  who  walk  or  ride  on  our 
streets  and  highways.     There  are  over  23,000,000  auto 
motive  vehicles  in  use  in  this  country.     Golf,  tennis,  and 
other  outdoor  sports  are  more  popular  than  ever  before. 
Tremendous  stadiums  are  being  built  in  the  cities.     Hun 
dreds  of  thousands  attend  the  big  football  and  baseball 
games.  The  "movies"  are  steadily  gaining  in  popularity. 
Every  summer  the  highways  are  filled  with  motor-tourists 
on  their  way  to  and  from  vacation-land.     The  rural  popu 
lation  is  moving  daily  in  and  out  of  market  centers. 

A  great  change  in  the  habits  of  our  population  has 
clearly  taken  place.  The  entire  country  is  out  of  doors 
and  "on  the  move"  as  often  and  as  long  as  possible. 

28.  Position  of  Advertisements. — Painted  bulletins, 
poster  panels,  and  all  other  outdoor  advertisements  are 
placed  to  reach  effectively  the  greatest  number  of  persons 
passing  a  given  point.     Owing  to  individual  conditions 
this  may  necessitate  placing  the  bulletins  in  any  one  of 
the  following  positions : 

Head  on — located  at  a  turn  or  the  end  of  a  thoroughfare,  directly 
ahead  of  on-coming  traffic. 

Semi-head-on — at  the  side  of  a  thoroughfare  at  an  angle  that 
will  show  for  a  considerable  distance  to  traffic  going  in  one 
direction. 

Parallel — parallel  to  the  road  or  street,  showing  equally  to  traffic 
going  in  both  directions. 

It  must  be  remembered  that  outdoor  advertising  is 
impression  giving;  it  does  not  reason  why  or  become 
argumentative.  It  must  suggest  pleasingly  by  color  and 
picture.  It  must  present  one  thought,  quickly,  domi- 
nantly.  It  is  well  adapted  to  accomplish  this  by  its  color, 
size,  and  position. 


536B— 2 


14     OUTDOOR   AND   STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING 

Fig.  1,  which  received  honorable  mention  in  1934,  is  a 
form  of  outdoor  advertising  of  the  humorous,  impression 
istic  type  that  readily  catches  the  eye  and  registers  atten 
tion.  It  was  used  locally  in  the  Detroit  area. 

POSTER  ADVERTISING 

29.  Varieties  of  Outdoor  Advertising. — There  are 
many  varieties  of  outdoor  advertising,  but  as  considered 
in  the  advertising  business,  there  are  but  two  general 
divisions — poster  advertising  and  painted-display  adver 
tising. 


SPECIAL 

AWANCE  SHOWING 

JAM.6-13 


for  the]   0934  Chevrolet 


CONVENTION  HALL 


>WAR0      AT 


FIG.  1 


30.  Kinds  of  Posters. — In  poster  advertising,  the 
advertiser's  copy  is  displayed  by  means  of  pasting  paper 
sheets — lithographed,  printed  or  hand-painted — on  a  steel- 
surfaced  standard  structure,  built  for  the  purpose. 

The  primary  form  in  this  division  of  outdoor  advertis 
ing  is  the  24-sheet  poster,  displayed  on  the  standard  poster 
panel,  12  feet  high  and  25  feet  long.  These  posters  are 
usually  lithographed,  but  they  may  be  printed,  and  the 
hand-painted  (or  custom-made)  poster  is  a  special  method 
of  using  the  24-sheet  poster  to  secure  certain  definite 
effects. 


OUTDOOR   AND   STREET-CAR  ADVERTISING    15 

The  secondary  form  of  poster  advertising  is  the  3-sheet 
poster,  displayed  on  a  standard  3-sheet  poster  panel  5  feet 
wide  and  8  feet  high. 

In  poster  advertising,  the  advertiser  buys  a  set  show 
ing,  or  group  of  poster  panels  not  subject  to  individual 
selection,  but  so  arranged  as  to  give  general  coverage. 

31.  Advantages   of  Poster  Advertising. — The   chief 
advantages  of  poster  advertising  may  be  given  as  follows : 

1.  It  admits  of  monthly  change  of  copy. 

2.  It  is  uniform  in  character  because  the  poster  is  lithographed, 
while  painted  displays  are  each  done  by  hand. 

3.  It  gives  a  uniform-sized  publicity  throughout  a  city;  is  well 
distributed  in  all  neighborhoods,  and  guaranteed  to  be  so. 

4.  It  is  particularly  adapted  to  short-term  advertising  to  cover  a 
season.     For  instance,  mince  meat  may  be  advertised  in 
December  to  cover  the  heavy  demand,  or  underwear  may  be 
featured  for  both  spring  and  fall  trade.     Summer  underwear 
may  be  advertised  through  posters  in  some  sections  of  the 
South  and  on  the  Pacific  Coast  even  in  January.     The  United 
States  and  Canada  cover  such  a  latitude  in  temperature  and 
conditions  that  most  advertisers  have  continuous  markets, 
even  though  their  products  be  seasonable. 

5.  Color:   The  lithographed  poster  offers  the  widest  latitude  in 
the  reproducing  of  many  colors  and  in  the  faithful  reproduc 
tion  of  products. 

6.  Its  size  offers  an  opportunity  to  emphasize  the  essential  parts 
of  an  advertiser's  message. 

32.  Twenty-Four  Sheet  Poster.— Standard  24-sheet 
poster  panels  are  located  within  the  built-up  sections  of 
cities  at  strategic  points  where  traffic  is  heaviest;  along 
main  avenues  and  boulevards;  on  highways  entering  the 
city;  along  railroads;  in  shopping  and  business  centers; 
and  at  interurban  trolley  and  bus-line  terminals.     Where- 
ever  the  tide  of  traffic  flows  they  tell  their  story  to  the 
people. 

The  poster  panel  is  12  feet  high  by  25  feet  long.  The 
molding  and  lattice  work  are  painted  green.  All  panels 
throughout  the  United  States  are  uniform  in  design  and 


16     OUTDOOR   AND   STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING 


4.     . 


OUTDOOR   AND   STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING     17 

appearance.  At  important  points  of  night  traffic  in 
large  cities,  the  panels  are  illuminated.  Change  of  copy 
is  provided  every  30  days  by  posting  of  new  paper. 

Poster  advertising  is  sold  in  groups  called  showings.  All 
showings  in  a  given  town  are  equal  in  coverage  and 
advertising  value. 

In  laying  out  these  showings  scientific  methods  are 
applied  to  find  the  coverage  requirements  of  the  market. 
The  outdoor  organizations,  working  in  conjunction  with 
the  plant  operator  and  city  departments,  make  a  survey 
of  the  traffic  flow  on  all  the  main  arteries  of  travel,  ascer 
tain  the  location  of  shopping  centers,  amusement  centers, 
and  so  forth.  These  factors  form  the  basis  for  working 
out  the  location  of  panels  to  provide  a  thorough  coverage 
of  the  market — a  coverage  that  reaches  all  the  people 
with  constant  repetition. 

An  example  of  the  24-sheet  poster  is  shown  in  Fig.  2. 

33.  Three-Sheet  Posters. — The  modern  3-sheet 
poster  is  the  smallest  standardized  unit  of  outdoor  adver 
tising  used  by  poster  men.  As  the  name  implies,  these 
posters  consist  of  three  units  of  poster-size  measurements. 
The  3-sheet  poster  is  82  inches  in  height  by  41  inches  in 
width  over  all  when  posted.  When  posted  on  the  stand 
ard  3-sheet  poster  panel,  which  is  4  feet  10  inches  wide  by 
8  feet  7  inches  high,  it  is  surrounded  by  a  white  paper  mat 
or  blanking. 

Grocery  stores,  delicatessen  and  drug  stores  predomi 
nate  in  the  neighborhoods  where  3-sheet  posters  are 
found.  Various  brands  of  the  following  products  have 
been  extensively  advertised  on  these  posters:  ginger  ale, 
bread,  butter,  canned  milk,  soap,  flour,  chewing  gum,  coffee, 
crackers,  syrup. 

Three-sheet  posters  are  usually  lithographed  and  the 
prices  depend  largely  on  the  nature  of  the  design. 

A  typical  3-sheet  poster  is  illustrated  in  Fig.  3. 


18     OUTDOOR   AND   STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING 

34.  Three-sheet  posters  have  a  "point  of  purchase' ' 
advantage  because  they  are  in  a  position  to  deliver  the 
final  word  about  products  of  every-day  use  in  the  home. 

They  are  located  at  eye  level,  are  familiar  and  friendly 
— a  part  of  the  local  environment.  Three-sheet  posters, 
also,  are  sold  in  groups  called  showings.  Each  showing 
consists  of  enough  panels  to  provide  a  thorough  coverage 
of  the  retail  and  residential  sections  of  the  city.  They  are 
not  intended  to  reach  the  automobile  or  transient  circula- 


^^  PLUGS 
CLEANED 

BY    TH  E 

NEW  AC  METHOD 


FIG.  4 

tion;  24-sheet  posters  or  painted  displays  of  large  size  are 
designed  for  that  purpose.  Three-sheet  posters  reach  the 
permanent  residents  of  local  communities  in  or  near  the 
places  where  they  make  their  daily  purchases. 

These  posters  serve  to  supplement,  extend,  and  rein 
force  other  forms  of  advertising. 

New  posters  are  placed  on  the  panels  every  30  days, 
thus  providing  frequent  change  of  copy. 

PAINTED-DISPLAY  ADVERTISING 

35.  In  painted-display  advertising,  the  advertiser's 
copy  is  displayed  by  a  system  of  flashing  electric  lights  or 
the  copy  is  painted  by  hand  on  the  advertising  space, 
which  may  be  a  steel-surfaced  standard  structure  called  a 


OUTDOOR   AND    STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING     19 

painted  bulletin  or  a  wall  especially  selected  for  its  adver 
tising  value.  Often  the  advertising  unit  takes  the  form 
of  a  combination  of  painted  steel  surfaces  and  electric 
bulbs. 

Painted-display  advertising  embraces  the  following: 
(1)  Spectacular  electric  displays;  (2)  painted  bulletins, 
including  city  bulletins,  suburban  bulletins,  highway  bulle 
tins,  and  railroad  bulletins;  and  (3)  painted  walls,  includ 
ing  city  walls,  suburban  walls,  and  town  walls.  In  all 
forms  of  painted-display  advertising,  the  advertiser  may 
buy  specific  and  selected  locations.  In  some  cases,  how 
ever,  where  coverage  is  looked  for,  bulletins  and  walls 
may  be  arranged  and  sold  in  groups  or  showings. 

In  Fig.  4  is  shown  an  excellent  example  of  humorous 
outdoor  advertising.  This  design  recently  received  honor 
able  mention. 

36.  The  chief  advantages  of  painted-display  advertis 
ing  are  as  follows: 

1.  Painted  displays  have  the  value  of  permanence  or  the  con 
stant  repetition  of  an  idea  for  365  full  days.     They  make  an 
advertiser  a  part  of  the  daily  life  of  the  neighborhood  in 
which  they  stand. 

2.  They  stand  all  kinds  of  weather  conditions  and,  according 
to  the  usual  contract,  are  kept  bright  in  color  by  at  least  one 
repaint  and  often  as  many  as  four  repaints  a  year;  copy  is 
sometimes  changed  upon  additional  charge. 

3.  Painted  displays  are  often  isolated  from  other  advertise 
ments.     Each  is  built  of  a  size  to  fit  a  location  and  to  domi 
nate  the  locality. 

4.  An  advertiser  can  use  as  few  displays  as  he  chooses;  if  he 
wants  to  give  publicity  to  one  of  his  distributors  at  one 
certain  street  location  by  means  of  a  painted  wall,  he  can  do 
so.     He  need  not  cover  the  entire  city  if  he  is  not  ready  to  do 
so. 

5.  Size:    Painted  displays  and  walls  are  the  largest  advertising 
units  known. 

6.  Color:     Painted  displays  make  use  of  a  brilliance  of  colors 
which  appeals  to  all  classes  of  people. 


20     OUTDOOR    AND    STREET-CAR    ADVERTISING 


DETAILS   OF    OUTDOOR  ADVERTISING 

37,  Plant. — An    outdoor    advertising    plant    is    the 
entire  number  of  poster  panels,  painted  bulletins,  painted 
walls,  wall  bulletins,  railroad  bulletins,  suburban  bulletins, 
spectaculars,  and  semispectaculars  located  in  a  city  or 
district  and  owned  and  operated  by  an  individual  or  firm. 

Some  plants  consist  entirely  of  painted  displays, 
others  of  poster  panels  only,  while  all  kinds  of  displays 
are  combined  in  other  plants. 

38.  How  Business  is  Conducted. — Each  local  plant 
owner    secures    local   business    directly   from    the   local 
advertiser,  but  the  solicitation  and  handling  of  national 
advertising   contracts   is   done   through   the   advertising 
agencies  as  previously  described  (see  Arts.  8  and  9) . 

An  advertiser  who  operates  in  more  than  a  local  dis 
trict  and  who  is  interested  in  a  section  of  the  country 
other  than  his  own  immediate  neighborhood,  will  seek  the 
services  and  advice  of  an  advertising  agency.  If  he  is 
ready  to  consider  the  use  of  posters,  he  will  discuss  his 
problem  and  probably  ask  for  costs  and  a  plan.  He  then 
receives  an  estimate  covering  the  territory  about  which  he 
has  inquired.  This  estimate  will  show  the  total  number 
of  posters  required,  the  additional  number  of  renewals 
required  for  replacing  posters  torn  by  weather  or  neces 
sary  to  permit  new  posting  where  change  of  location  is 
made,  and  also  will  give  the  rate  per  poster  per  calendar 
month  and  the  total  cost  of  his  projected  campaign. 

The  advertising  agencies  have  men  who  are  specialists 
in  creating  ideas  and  sketches.  They  develop  every  phase 
of  the  copy  appeal  necessary  and  assist  the  advertiser  in 
coordinating  his  poster  campaign  with  his  sales  plans  and 
with  other  advertising  which  he  may  be  contemplating,  in 
addition  to  advising  him  in  all  poster  matters. 


OUTDOOR    AND   STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING     21 

39.  Location   and   Size   of   Poster   Boards. — Poster 
boards  are  built  in  locations  where  the  public  can  obtain 
an  unobstructed  view,  mostly  on  street-level  positions 
showing  to  all  vehicular  and  pedestrian  traffic,  sometimes 
on  roofs,  or  set  back  into  lots  as  yet  not  built  upon.     The 
tendency  is  not  to  crowd  too  many  boards  into  a  given 
frontage,  and  to  avoid  building  so  far  into  side  streets  as 
to  lose  the  vision  advantage  from  a  main  street.     Each 
location  is  developed  upon  its  merits,  so  as  to  be  of  the 
greatest  value  to  the  advertiser  in  his  appeal  to  the  public. 

40.  Basis    of    Poster    Display. — A    poster    plant    is 
divided  into  a  number  of  showings  of  equal  value  in  point 
of  distribution,  and  a  showing,  or  equal  parts  thereof  such 
as  i>  i>  i>  ig  the  unit  of  purchase  by  an  advertiser.     It 
might  be  said  that  a  full  showing  compares  to  a  full  page 
in  a  magazine,  a  half  showing  to  a  half  page,  and  a  quarter 
showing  to  a  quarter  page.     A  full  showing  consists  of  a 
sufficient  number  of  panels  to  cover  a  city  or  town  inten 
sively  and  evenly.     A  half  showing  consists  of  half  the 
number  of  panels  of  the  full  showing.     The  half  showing 
is  the  display  generally  recommended.     A  showing  is  the 
unit  of  sale  for  every  national  advertiser;  it  is  as  nearly 
equable  as  it  is  possible  to  make  it,  and  will  really  reach 
all  sections  of  the  city  and  all  classes  of  the  population. 
In  towns  and  the  smaller  cities,  a  half  or  a  full  showing  is 
the  only  showing  allowable. 

41.  The  time  unit  of  a  poster  showing  is  a  calendar 
month.     A  complete  poster  advertising  campaign  is  con 
tinuous  with  a  change  of  posters  monthly,  but  seasonal 
campaigns  may  be  used  for  a  series  of  months  or  even  a 
single  month.     The  advertiser  is  thus  enabled  to  spread 
his  message  for  any  chosen  length  of  time  over  the  entire 
nation  or  part  thereof,  or  confine  it  to  a  selected  state, 
city  or  town,  consistent  with  his  marketing  conditions. 
A  period  of  five  working  days  is  required  to  complete 


22     OUTDOOR   AND   STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING 

posting  of  a  poster  display,  but  in  every  event  a  full  30-day 
showing  is  furnished  the  advertiser. 

A  lithographed  poster  is  guaranteed  to  stand  exposure 
for  at  least  30  days  without  fading. 

The  term  panel  is  used  to  describe  a  single  board  upon 
which  one  poster  is  posted.  An  ornamental  molding, 
painted  a  standard  green,  composes  the  frame  of  the  panel. 
The  over-all  size  of  a  standard  poster  panel  is  12  feet  in 
height  by  25  feet  in  length.  The  inside  dimension  of  the 
actual  posting  is  23  feet  6  inches  in  length,  including 
blanking. 

The  uniformity  of  size  and  construction  places  all 
advertisers  on  a  par  in  so  far  as  the  unit  of  physical  space 
in  the  medium  is  concerned.  Comparative  attention 
value,  strength,  and  impressiveness  come  from  the  poster 
itself,  which  makes  it  essential  that  the  design  embody 
the  best  quality  of  word  and  pictorial  copy. 

42.  Poster  Sizes. — As  already  stated,  the  standard 
poster-board  size  is  12  feet  high  by  25  feet  long.  For  the 
poster  itself,  lithographers  use  a  unit  of  space  measure 
ment  known  as  sheet,  which  is  28  inches  high  by  41  inches 
wide.  The  standard  poster,  familiar  in  all  our  cities  and 
required  in  accredited  outdoor  plants,  is  known  as  the 
24-sheet  poster  and  its  size  is  19  feet  8  inches  long  by  8  feet 
10  inches  high.  There  are  some  variations  due  to  require 
ments  of  lithographers'  presses. 

On  elevated  railway  and  subway  stations,  even  on 
steam  railroad  stations,  posters  of  1-sheet,  2-sheet,  3-sheet, 
and  8-sheet  sizes  are  used.  But,  with  the  exception  of  the 
standard  3-sheet  poster,  these  are  not  included  in  outdoor 
advertising  as  recognized  by  outdoor-advertising  men. 
They  are  rather  nearer  to  street-car  or  bus  advertising 
and  are  sold  by  companies  controlling  those  privileges. 
Recognized  poster  men  confine  themselves  entirely  to  but 
two  sizes  of  poster;  namely,  the  24-sheet  and  the  3-sheet. 


OUTDOOK     AND     STREET-CAR     ADVERTISING      23 

43.  How  Posters  Are  Measured. — In  Fig.  5  is  shown 
a  diagram  illustrating  poster  sizes,  the  common  size  being 
a  24-sheet  poster.     All  are  the  same  height  as  four  single 
sheets,  the  length  merely  increasing  39  inches  for  each 
4-sheet  unit  added.     Posters  of  8-sheet  size  or  larger  are 
called   stands.     Thus,   a   24-sheet   stand   consists   of   24 
sheets,  each  28  inches  high  by  41  inches  long,  including 
the   white    lap    or    margin    around    each    sheet.     These 
margins  do  not  show  when  the  sheets  are  matched  together. 
When  posted  on  the  steel  facing,  a  white-paper  margin 
called  blanking  is  framed  around  the  poster,  and  gives 
it  a  trim,  clean,  presentable  appearance,  much  the  same 
as  a  picture  mounted  in  a  frame  with  a  mat  to  set  off  its 
colors. 

Large  posters  are  not  always  made  up  altogether  of 
single  1-sheet  sections.  Sometimes  a  section  will  be 
several  times  the  size  of  a  single  sheet.  This  enables  the 
advertiser  to  save  in  the  cost  of  color  work,  as  only  one- 
half  of  the  poster  may  require  two  colors.  In  folding,  the 
sections  are  arranged  conveniently  for  the  bill  poster,  thus 
obviating  any  confusion  in  posting  the  paper  on  the  board. 

44.  Cost  of  Poster  Advertising. — The  way  outdoor 
advertising  is  used  and  its  cost  depend  upon  circum 
stances  surrounding  a  campaign.     Each  case  is  somewhat 
different  from  others.    The  rates  for  poster  advertising  are 
usually  changed  not  more  than  once  a  year,  unless  urgent 
conditions  cause  other  changes.     They  are  based  on  a 
charge  of  so  much  per  sheet  per  calendar  month  and  are 
submitted  to  the  advertiser  on  the  24-sheet  basis;  thus, 
for  instance,  at  40  cents  per  sheet,  the  rate  would  be  $9.60 
per  24-sheet  panel  per  month.     There  is  no  discount  for 
quantity.     (Exceptional   cases   allow   a  week's   posting; 
for  example,  for  a  theatrical  company  that  will  be  in  a 
city  for  a  limited  engagement.     In  these  cases,  a  special 
rate  is  charged  for  the  service,  which  is,  of  course,  higher 
than  the  regulation  charge.) 


r 


! 


•"1  Z 


•"I  Z 


do-] 


dp-] 


SJdJ.SO<J 


24 


OUTDOOR   AND   STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING    25 

45.  Poster  Design. — As  to  technique,  poster  design 
has,  within  recent  years,  become  a  profession  of  its  own. 
It  demands  a  peculiar  type  of  composition  and  is  more 
exacting  than  almost  any  other  class  of  advertising, 
because  of  the  necessity  for  making  an  instant  impression 
and  telling  a  story  in  the  seconds  of  time  that  the  average 
poster  is  on  view. 

Many  of  the  outstanding  artists  in  the  country  are 
now  employed  in  producing  the  posters  and  painted 
bulletins  that  adorn  our  boulevards  and  highways.  One 
of  the  strongest  influences  in  the  development  of  outdoor 
technique  during  the  last  five  years  has  been  the  National 
Exhibition  of  Poster  Art,  held  each  Autumn  in  Chicago. 
By  stimulating  a  widespread  and  wholesome  competition 
in  poster  design  and  treatment  it  has  placed  an  emphasis 
upon  this  branch  of  creative  effort  that  has  resulted  in  a 
marked  improvement  in  the  displays  that  line  our  streets 
and  highways. 


SO  MUCH  MORE  FOR  -.  SO  LITTLE  MORE" 


FIG.  6 


A  beautiful  specimen  of  poster  design  is  shown  in  Fig.  6. 
This  design  received  first  prize  at  the  Chicago  Poster 
Exhibit  in  1934.  Note  the  small  amount  of  copy  on  the 
poster,  and  the  introduction  of  the  human  element. 


26     OUTDOOR   AND   STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING 

46.  Special  Poster  Locations. — In  large   cities   the 
owner  of  a  poster  plant  must  pay  high  rental  for  special 
locations,  which,  of  course,  are  of  increased  value  to  the 
advertiser.     These  are  analogous  to  preferred  positions 
in  newspapers  and  magazines.     Displays  in  such  locations 
are,  for  the  most  part,  illuminated  at  night.     These  loca 
tions  are  included  in  the  list  furnished  the  advertiser  when 
he  asks  for  an  estimate  for  a  showing  and  are  a  part  of  the 
showing  which  he  receives. 

47.  Cost  of   Covering  a  Territory. — In  some  8,000 
towns  and  cities  the  cost  of  posting  a  24-sheet  showing  is 
less  than  $200,000  for  a  calendar  month,  the  cost  of  the 
poster  paper  itself  and  the  expressage  or  freight  being 
additional.     This  is  a  real  national  showing.     It  is  very 
seldom  any  advertisers  wish  to  undertake  so  gigantic  a 
campaign — they  usually  select  territories,  such  as  cities  of 
a  certain  size,  or  certain  states,  or  even  industrial  districts. 

For  example,  an  advertiser,  desirous  of  «securing 
publicity  in  a  single  state,  might  decide  to  place  displays 
in  only  the  cities  of  10,000  population  and  over  in  that 
state,  in  which  case  an  exact  estimate  of  cost  would  be 
furnished  him  for  posting  in  those  cities  for  the  month  or 
months  selected. 

The  advertiser  can  then  consider  this  cost  with  what 
ever  other  local  work  he  is  going  to  do,  which  may  include 
newspaper  advertising  or  street-car  or  bus  advertising; 
and  he  can  determine  precisely  what  his  campaign  will 
cost;  how  many  dealers  he  will  reach;  how  many  people 
he  will  affect,  and  thus  have  a  thoroughly  complete  drive 
mapped  out  and  ready  to  carry  into  effect.  In  other 
words,  all  the  data  are  furnished  him  upon  which  he  may 
definitely  plan  out  a  campaign  in  advance. 

48.  The  cost  per  thousand  is  the  common  denominator 
in  determining  the  economy  of  advertising.     Circulation, 
or  the  number  of  people  who  can  see  the  advertisement  in 


OUTDOOR   AND   STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING    27 


a  medium,  is  the  accepted  basis  for  computing  its  cost. 
In  outdoor  advertising  the  circulation  is  so  great  that  the 
cost  per  thousand  is  unusually  low.  Cost  figures,  how 
ever,  are  subject  to  frequent  change,  so  that  it  is  difficult 
to  furnish  estimates  for  named  cities  or  states  that  will 
remain  constant.  A  fair  estimate  of  the  cost  of  poster 
showings,  in  cities  of  typical  populations,  is  shown  in 
Table  I.  The  figures  refer  only  to  space  and  service 
rendered  by  the  plant  owner. 

TABLE  I— COST  OF  POSTER  SHOWINGS 


Population  of 
City,  in 

Number  of  Posters 

Number 

Space 

Cost  per 
Thousand 

Round 

of 

Cost 

Circulation 

Numbers 

Regular 

Special 

Renewals 

1  Month 

per  Day 

25,000 

6 

1 

1 

$       71.80 

$0.09 

120,100 

12 

4 

3 

233.60 

0.06 

214,100 

20 

8 

6 

436.00 

0.06 

395,200 

36 

13 

10 

735.80 

0.06 

538,000 

32 

28 

12 

1,229  60 

0.07 

936,500 

40 

30 

14 

1,362.00 

0.05 

2,035,900 

74 

36 

22 

1,837.20 

0.03 

49.  Poster  Service. — When  an  order  is  received  from 
the  advertiser,  the  poster-plant  owner  agrees  to  post,  for 
the  month  or  months  required,  on  the  boards  of  the 
designated  city  or  town,  the  size  showing  contracted  for, 
to  replace  without  extra  charge  during  this  time  any  paper 
damaged  by  weather  or  other  cause,  and  to  furnish,  upon 
completion  of  the  posting  of  the  posters,  a  list  of  the  loca 
tions  on  which  the  paper  was  posted.  Renewal  paper 
averages  about  20  per  cent;  therefore,  if  50  posters  will 
make  a  showing,  10  additional  must  be  included. 

When  an  advertisement  appears  in  a  periodical  or  news 
paper,  a  copy  mailed  to  the  advertiser  proves  its  actual 
appearance.  So  when  a  poster  campaign  is  on  the  boards, 
the  advertiser  receives  a  list  of  the  exact  locations  upon 
which  his  poster  advertisement  is  posted. 


28     OUTDOOR   AND   STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING 

50.  Cooperative  Posting. — Some  manufacturers  have 
adopted  a  selling  plan  which  demands  that  a  portion  of 
the  local  advertising  investment  be  paid  by  the  dealer. 
This  is  called  cooperative  poster  advertising.     The  coopera 
tive  plan  calls  for  the  display  of  the  dealer's  name  on  the 
posters.     Imprint  or  overlay  strips  should  not  be  used  for 
this  purpose,  as  they  come  off  very  easily.     Plant  owners 
do  not  guarantee  that  such  surface  strips  will  stay  up 
for  the  30-day  period.     The  imprint  bearing  the  dealer's 
name  should  be  lithographed  or  printed  on  the  poster 
itself  in  a  space  provided  for  it.     If  this  is  properly  done, 
the  dealer's  name  appears  as  part  of  the  poster  design. 

51.  Methods  of  Printing  Posters. — There  are  a  num 
ber  of  ways  of  printing  posters,  but  only  the  important 
processes  will  be  here  mentioned : 

Lithography:  The  lithographic  process  of  printing  from 
stone  permits  the  use  of  from  three  colors  up  to  eight  and 
sometimes  more,  giving  splendid  reproductions  of  the 
original  sketches  in  a  soft  tone. 

Aluminum  plates:  A  more  modern  adaptation  of  the  principle 
of  stone  lithography.  It  is  economical  and  satisfactory. 

Zinc  plates:  Also  a  modern  development  in  lithography  which 
has  working  advantages  over  stone  and  which  turns  out 
very  faithful  color  reproductions. 

Wood-block  process:  An  early  form  of  printing  large  posters, 
usually  used  for  lettering  and  decoration  with  some  pictorial 
copy.  It  is  really  not  suitable  for  high-grade  work  of 
lithography,  because  of  its  limitations. 

Some  form  of  lithographed  poster  is  the  most  commonly 
used.  The  cost  depends  upon  the  quantity,  upon  the 
number  of  sheets,  and  the  number  of  colors  used.  The 
quality  of  ink  and  paper  makes  a  difference  in  poster  cost. 
The  best  colors  do  not  fade  in  a  month's  showing,  and  the 
best  paper  does  not  tear  away  easily.  The  trade  tendency 
is  toward  more  artistic  designing,  use  being  made  of  the 
work  of  well-known  artists,  and  better  coloring. 


OUTDOOR   AND   STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING    29 

An  excellent  example  of  this  high-class  work  is  shown 
in  Fig.  7.  It  will  be  noted  that  the  humorous  slant  is 
quite  in  evidence,  yet  the  message  sought  to  be  conveyed 
is  unmistakable  and  will  appeal  to  all  who  travel  the  rail 
road  by  night. 

KINDS   OF   POSTERS 

52.  Stock  Posters. — In  addition  to  the  lithographed 
posters  made  from  special  designs  for  advertisers,  many 
lithographers  deal  in  stock  posters  that  can  be  bought  in 
any  quantity.  The  stock  part  of  the  poster  is  printed 
in  large  quantities  with  a  space  left  in  which  the  advertiser 


IN  AIR   CONDITIONED    COMFORT 


EORGE  WASHINGTON   •  THE  S 


THE   F.F.V. 


CHESAPEAKE  and  OHIO 

TO   WHS  HI  NO  TOM    AMD   NIW  YORK 


FIG.  7 

may  have  his  name,  address,  or  other  matter  inserted. 
For  example,  a  stock  design  showing  several  women  in 
street  dress  may  be  used  for  a  department  store  or  for  a 
woman's  specialty  shop.  Stock  posters  are  used  only  by 
local  advertisers.  They  lack  the  individuality  required  by 
larger  advertisers,  but  are  just  the  thing  for  those  who 
cannot  afford  to  have  large  quantities  of  colored  posters 
printed.  Stock  posters  are  largely  used  by  banks, 
clothiers,  dairies,  florists,  furniture  dealers,  jewelers,  etc. 
Contracts  are  usually  placed  on  a  12  months  basis,  with 
a  change  of  copy  each  month.  The  retailer  is,  of  course, 
given  the  exclusive  right  to  use  a  certain  series  of  designs 


536B— 3 


30     OUTDOOR   AND   STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING 

in  his  community,  so   that   local   advertisers   can   avail 
themselves  of  the  pulling  power  of  poster  advertising. 

53.  Hand-Painted   or   Manugraph   Posters. — There 
are  times  when  a  local  advertiser  can  use  only  a  few  loca 
tions,  in  which  event  the  plant  owner  can  have  posters 
painted  by  hand  made  for  him.     In  making  the  manu- 
graph,  the  original  is  done  by  hand,  on  a  screen,  by  an 
artist.     Duplicate  posters  are  placed  over  the  original 
and,  by  strong  light,  an  artist  of  less  experience  traces  and 
fills  in  the  second,  third,  and  so  on.     This  reduces  the 
cost.     Space  is  left  for  the  dealer's  name.     Some  of  the 
uses  of  this  form  of  advertising  are  to  capitalize  some  news 
announcement,  and  to  meet  conditions  in  local  territory. 

PREPARATION   OF  POSTER  ADVERTISING 

54.  The  Investigation. — The  first  step  in  copy  prep 
aration  is  the  investigation.     This  usually  covers  every 
phase  of  marketing  the  product.     It  may  be  necessary  to 
conduct  a  dealer  survey  to  discover  the  attitude  of  the 
retailer    and   the   standing   of    competitive    articles.     A 
consumer    investigation    may    also    be    desirable.     The 
questionnaire  method  is  the  usual  procedure,  and  the 
survey  is  made  by  trained  men  and  women  who  can  be 
depended  on  to  render  an  accurate    report.     Valuable 
information  may  be  gained  from  a  visit  to  the  advertiser's 
factory  to  observe  each  step  in  the  manufacture  of  the 
commodity.     The  investigation  should  be  thorough,  and 
the  facts,  when  gathered,  should  be  as  accurate  as  possible. 

There  has  been  within  the  last  two  years  a  great  deal 
of  intensive  study  as  to  traffic  flow  and  visibility,  and 
accurate  figures  and  charts  have  been  compiled  that  show 
at  a  glance  the  intensity  of  traffic  flow  and  the  character 
of  traffic  from  a  buying  standpoint  in  all  major  centers. 
This  makes  it  possible  to  select  locations  in  any  part  of 
the  country  with  a  very  definite  idea  as  to  their  value 
from  a  circulation  standpoint. 


OUTDOOR   AND   STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING    31 


THE  RIGHT  FORM   OF  OUTDOOR  ADVERTISING 

55.  Factors  Governing  Form. — Having  completed  the 
market  investigation  the  advertising  man  is  ready  to 
determine  the  form  of  outdoor  advertising  to  recommend 
and  the  term  of  the  campaign  to  be  covered  by  contract. 

The  following  outlines  will  be  helpful  in  coming  to  a 
decision : 

Poster  advertising  should  be  recommended  when 
general  coverage,  general  distribution,  and  repetition  are 
the  main  factors  for  consideration,  such  as: 

1.  The  product  is  sold  by  a  large  number  of  thoroughly  distrib 
uted  retail  outlets. 

2.  The  product  is  consumed  in  a  short  period  of  time  and 
requires  frequent  replacement. 

3.  The  product  has  a  small  unit  cost. 

4.  When  the  product  is  of  large  unit  cost  using  exclusive  or 
few  dealers,  and  is  of  wide  public  interest. 

The  term  of  the  poster  campaign  should  be  governed 
by  the  following  considerations : 

1.  If  the  product  is  consumed  frequently  and  at  a  constant  rate 
throughout  the  year,  then  the  campaign  should  be  on  a  12- 
month  basis  and  the  objective  to  be  accomplished  should  be 
divided  into  twelve  copy  messages  containing  a  major  factor 
of  continuity  in  basic  sales  appeal  and  copy  theme,  and  also 
a  major  factor  of  variety  or  change  in  color  and  illustration  to 
maintain  attention  value. 

2.  If  the  product  is  seasonable,  then  the  term  of  campaign 
should  be  equal  to  and  be  continuous  during  the  months 
of  the  season  or  seasons  in  which  the  article  is  consumed, 
and  the  objectives  should  be  reached  by  dividing  the  copy 
into  as  many  strong  selling  statements  as  there  are  months 
involved.     Continuity  in  this  case  can  be  secured  through 
use  of  color  and  illustration.     If  the  number  of  months 
involved  in  the  season  or  seasons  is  more  than  three,  do 
not  sacrifice  continuity. 

3.  If  the  season  is  not  more  than  3  months,  then  the  copy  may 
be  made  single  in  attention  and  impression  value  for  each 
month  and  continuity  may  be  somewhat  sacrificed. 


32     OUTDOOR  AND   STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING 

Painted  display  advertising  should  be  recommended 
when  specific  coverage,  restricted  distribution,  and  domi 
nant  impression  are  the  main  factors,  such  as: 

1.  The  product  is  sold  through  an  exclusive  dealer  or  a  small 
number  of  appointed  dealers  and  is  of  substantial  unit  cost, 
its  purchase  and  replacement  occurring  infrequently.     Pre 
ferred  position  painted  display  located  in  dominant  positions 
in  heavy  traffic  zones  of  strategic  value  should  be  used. 

2.  If  the  product  is  sold  in  a  limited  section  of  the  market  (one 
or  more  neighborhoods),  then  either  store  bulletins  or  neigh 
borhood  walls,  or  a  combination  of  both,  should  be  recom 
mended. 

3.  If  prestige,  stability,  or  institutional  factors  control  con 
sideration,  then  boulevard  and  highway  or  central  business 
district  bulletins  in  combination  should  be  recommended. 

The  term  of  the  painted-display  campaign  should  be 
governed  by  the  following  considerations : 

1.  Painted  display  as  a  primary  medium  should  not  be  used  for 
a  term  less  than  one  year. 

2.  It  is  most  effective  when  divided  into  three  or  four  paints 
per  year. 

3.  Repaints  with  same  copy  should  be  discouraged.     Change 
of  copy  improves  the  effectiveness  of  painted  display. 

4.  The  dates  on  which  change  of  copy  should  occur  should 
follow  as  nearly  as  possible  any  special  or  seasonal  appeal 
that  may  be  made  in  behalf  of  the  product  as  determined  by 
the  investigation  and  the  basic  sales  appeal  decided  upon. 
In  other  words,  change  of  copy  dates  should  not  be  made 
arbitrarily  every  3  months  or  every  4  months.     Instead,  the 
copy  should  fit  the  merchandising  and  advertising  problem 
of  the  advertiser. 

Poster  advertising  and  painted  display  in  combination 
should  be  recommended  when: 

1.  The  product  is  sold  through  an  exclusive  dealer  or  a  small 
number  of  appointed  dealers  and  is  a  product  consumed 
during  a  short  period  of  time  requiring  frequent  replacement, 
and  is  of  general  public  interest.     Preferred  position  painted 
display  should  be  used  in  this  type  of  case  to  reinforce  the 
general  coverage  of  poster  advertising,  and  in  addition  high 
way  painted  display  within  the  radius  of  the  market  or  trad 
ing  area  may  properly  be  recommended. 

2.  When  a  combination  of  any  of  the  primary  reasons  for  using 
each  form  exists. 


OUTDOOR   AND   STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING     33 

The  term  of  the  campaign  for  poster  and  painted  dis 
play  in  combination  should  be  governed  by  the  following 
considerations : 

1.  It  should  be  a  12-month  campaign. 

2.  The  painted  display  should  be  used  not  only  to  reinforce  the 
general  coverage  of  poster  display  at  strategic  points,  but  it 
should  emphasize  any  seasonal  or  special  points  of  public 
interest  in  the  product  during  such  periods,  as  such  emphasis 
would  logically  increase  sales.     This  would  normally  require 
at  least  three  and  probably  four  changes  of  copy.     Changes 
of  copy  on  the  painted  display  should  not  necessarily  be  on  an 
every  3  or  4  months'  basis  if  sales  conditions  dictate  shorter 
or  longer  periods  of  time  between  changes  of  copy. 

56.  The  Essentials. — An  outdoor  advertisement 
should  have  simplicity,  attention  value,  brevity  in  text, 
pleasing  and  harmonious  colors,  and  good  composition. 

57.  Simplicity. — Outdoor     advertising     should     be 
simple  and  easy  to  understand.     If  the  message  is  com 
plex  or  involved,  mental  effort  is  required,  and  the  method 
becomes  argumentative  rather  than  suggestive.     A  good 
example  of  simplicity  is  a  design  which  contains  the  fol 
lowing  elements:     (1)   the  picture;   (2)   a  brief  text  to 
reinforce  the  picture;  (3)  the  name  of  the  product;  (4)  the 
package;  and  (5)  the  selling  phrase.     The  picture  and  the 
few  words  which  accompany  it  might  really  be  called  one 
element,  since  both  should  reach  the  eye  and  the  mind  at 
the  same  time.     More  than  five  elements  are  dangerous; 
in  fact,   generally  speaking,   the  fewer  the  number  of 
elements  the  more  striking  will  be  the  design.     It  is  a 
good  idea  for  the  advertiser  and  the  art  director  to  scrutin 
ize  a  finished  sketch  for  the  sole  purpose  of  trying  to  elimi 
nate  one  or  more  elements. 

58.  Attention  Value. — To  be  seen,  an  outdoor  adver 
tisement  must  attract  attention.     This  may  be  secured 
by  an  idea  or  a  design  that  is  different  without  being 
freakish.     If  the  advertisement  is  too  bizarre,  too  "clever," 


34     OUTDOOR  AND   STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING 


OUTDOOR   AND   STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING    35 

or  too  far  from  the  point,  it  inevitably  distracts  the  mind 
and  defeats  its  own  purpose.  A  study  of  current  outdoor 
designs  reveals  that  advertisers  are  using  many  devices 
to  attract  attention.  In  poster  advertising,  some  adver 
tisers  adopt  the  white  background  for  their  posters.  This 
automatically  enlarges  the  effect  of  the  24-sheet  poster. 
A  good  example  of  attention  value  of  this  character  is 
illustrated  in  Fig.  8,  which  was  awarded  honorable  men 
tion  at  the  Chicago  Poster  Exhibit. 

59.  Brevity  in  Copy. — The  advertiser  must  make  up 
his  mind  that  the  better  and  stronger  he  can  make  his 
copy  by  a  choice  of  few  words,  the  stronger  will  be  the 
poster.     A  newspaper  or  a  book  is  read  at  a  distance  of 
a  few  inches.     A  poster  is  seen  at  a  distance  of  20  to  200 
feet,  or  even  farther.     Most  people  who  see  it  are  not 
sitting  quietly;  they  are  walking  or  riding  as  they  read. 
So  the  copy  must  be  concise  enough  to  present,  pleasingly, 
to  the  reader  a  full  message  in  one  brief  glance. 

Posters  are  often  faulty  in  just  this  point:  the  adver 
tiser  is  so  anxious  to  explain  by  word  that  he  complicates 
his  whole  story.  There  is  no  copy,  as  the  magazine  or 
newspaper  copy  writer  understands  it,  on  the  poster. 
Outdoor  advertising  talks  in  headlines,  and  the  headlines 
have  to  be  good.  The  time  allotted  for  the  reading  of  a 
poster  is  seldom  more  than  5  seconds  and  is  more  likely 
to  be  in  the  neighborhood  of  2  seconds.  Obviously,  there 
can  be  no  long  expositions  or  hard-to-understand  phrases. 
In  addition  to  this,  the  copy  is  always  read  from  left  to 
right.  When  traffic  is  passing  the  poster  from  right  to 
left,  the  copy  is  hard  to  read — another  strong  reason  for 
brevity. 

60.  Color. — Color   in   advertising   will  perform  the 
following  functions:     Attract  attention;  lend  emphasis; 
lend  realism;  add  novelty;  give  the  impression  of  strength, 
coolness,  warmth,  purity,  dignity,  or  style.     Combining 


36     OUTDOOR   AND    STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING 

colors  is  a  science  in  itself.  Certain  colors  are  warm, 
others  are  cold ;  certain  colors  appeal  strongly  to  men,  and 
others  to  women.  Colors,  of  course,  must  always  be  pleas 
ing  and  suited  to  the  product.  If  a  food  product  is  adver 
tised,  obviously,  the  general  effect  of  the  entire  color 
scheme  must  be  clean,  wholesome,  and  appetizing.  What 
ever  colors  are  used,  they  should  be  in  keeping  with  the 
exact  suggestion  or  impression  which  the  outdoor  adver 
tisement  is  intended  to  convey. 

In  choosing  colors,  it  must  be  remembered  that  com 
binations  having  the  greatest  legibility  are  not  always  the 
most  pleasing;  for  instance,  black  letters  on  yellow  have 
the  greatest  legibility,  but  the  combination  is  not  so 
pleasing  as  the  yellow  and  blue  combination. 

Numerous  tests  show  that  blue  is  a  favorite  color  with 
men,  and  red  with  women.  In  choosing  a  color  for  adver 
tising  a  refrigerator,  while  red  would  be  the  natural  color 
to  appeal  to  women,  yet  in  this  case  it  would  have  the 
wrong  association.  The  ideal  dominant  color  to  use  would 
be  a  cold  color  such  as  blue.  It  has  the  proper  associa 
tion,  even  though  it  ranks  second  with  women. 

Colors  may  look  quite  different  under  artificial  illumina 
tion  than  when  viewed  in  daylight.  Under  such  con 
ditions,  dark  blues  and  purples  may  appear  nearly  black, 
and  red  and  yellow  may  appear  more  yellow.  It  is  well  to 
remember  that  in  illuminated  advertisements,  large  light- 
colored  areas  should  be  used,  and  that  the  letters  and 
background  should  be  so  related  as  to  give  greatest 
legibility. 

61.  The  poster  setting  varies  with  its  location,  de 
pending  on  sectional  differences  in  climate,  in  opinion  and 
in  color. 

In  winter,  the  predominant  tone  is  dull  and  cold  and 
grey,  so  warm,  brilliant  hues  provide  the  most  effective 
contrast.  In  summer,  the  situation  is  reversed.  Yellows 


OUTDOOR   AND    STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING     37 

and  yellow  greens  make  up  the  background,  and  cool  colors 
will  attract  more  attention. 

Sectional  considerations  are  an  additional  problem  in 
this  connection.  On  the  Pacific  Coast,  for  example,  the 
colors  of  posters  which  have  adequate  brilliance  and  carry 
ing  power  in  other  parts  of  the  country  are  dulled  and  made 
ineffective  because  of  the  more  highly  keyed  background 
hues  of  the  landscape. 

The  tendency  of  nature  is  to  reduce  all  colors  to  one 
monotone — therefore,  strongly  complementary  colors  fur 
nish  the  most  powerful  contrast  with  nature,  with  a  result 
ing  gain  in  attention  value. 

The  green  molding  and  lattice  of  the  standard  struc 
tures  must  be  taken  into  consideration  when  painting  the 
poster.  If  allowance  is  not  made  for  this  color  frame,  a 
design  that  is  successful  when  considered  alone  may  become 
a  disastrous  failure  when  placed  upon  the  standard  struc 
ture. 

The  poster  artist,  having  to  blend  his  coloring  into  the 
surrounding  colors  of  nature,  cannot  use  color  with  the 
freedom  and  subtlety  of  the  magazine  artist.  No  color 
rule  can  be  formulated  for  the  use  of  the  poster  artist, 
but  it  can  be  said  that,  unless  analogous  colors  are  used 
remarkably  well,  they  will  not  produce  as  good  a  poster 
as  will  the  use  of  complementaries. 

62.  Composition. — Composition  in  poster  design 
means  securing  a  well-reasoned  and  striking  relationship 
of  the  three  primary  elements  of  a  poster — picture,  lettering, 
and  open  space.  Composition  is  the  real  basis  in  produc 
ing  striking  designs. 

There  are  two  kinds  of  poster  composition,  variously 
known  as  balanced  and  unbalanced,  formal  and  informal, 
symmetrical  and  unsymmetrical.  The  most  striking 
composition  for  a  poster  is  the  unbalanced  form.  While 
formal  or  balanced  compositions  convey  a  sense  of  dignity 


38     OUTDOOR   AND   STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING 

and  repose,  the  sense  which  a  poster  must  convey  in  order 
to  be  most  effective  is  one  of  surprise  and  action. 

When  a  designer  speaks  of  an  unbalanced  composition 
he  means  one  in  which  the  balance  is  not  immediately 
apparent.  He  knows  that  there  must  be  balance,  though 
subtly  concealed  in  an  apparently  informal  arrangement 
of  parts. 

63.  Incorporating    a    Selling    Point. — Because    the 
wording  must  be  concise,  it  does  not  follow  that  the  copy 
may  not  bring  out  a  selling  point.     Perhaps  there  are  too 
many  posters  simply  announcing  a  name  without  a  sugges 
tion  of  the  desirable  qualities  in  the  product.     But  a  well- 
expressed  phrase  may  bring  out  a  strong  selling  point  in 
an  article. 

Using  more  than  one  selling  point  in  a  single  poster  is 
not  good  poster  advertising.  It  is  best  to  bring  out  the 
one  selling  point  in  one  design  and  another  in  a  different 
design,  thus  forming  a  varied  poster  campaign. 

64.  Copy  Suggestions. — In  creating  good  headlines 
or  text  in  the  preparation  of  poster  copy,  the  following 
words,  classified  by  basic  appeals,  may  be  found  sugges 
tive.     The  list  may  be  greatly  enlarged  as  additional  and 
appropriate  words  come  to  one's  attention. 

Appetite  Appeal. — Aroma,  bouquet,  dainty,  delicate,  delicious, 
juicy,  luscious,  rich,  savory,  smack,  spice,  tidbit,  toothsome, 
zest. 

Beauty  and  Appearance  Appeal. — Aristocratic,  artistic,  attrac 
tive,  beautiful,  blooming,  brilliant,  comeliness,  courtly, 
culture,  dazzling,  distinguished,  elegant,  exquisite,  gorgeous, 
graceful,  loveliness,  modish,  pictorial,  radiance,  ruddy, 
smart,  splendor,  sublime,  thoroughbred,  trim. 

Comfort  Appeal. — Allure,  cordial,  cushion,  enjoyment,  flowery, 
gladden,  invigorate,  lullaby,  luxurious,  refreshment,  satis 
faction,  serenity,  sunny,  velvet,  welcome. 

Convenience  Appeal. — Advantage,  aid,  assistance,  ease,  leisure, 
opportunity,  repose,  resource,  rest. 


OUTDOOR    AND    STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING     39 

Economy  Appeal. — Care,  discipline,  frugality,  harmony,  regu 
larity,  routine,  savings,  system,  thrift. 

Educational  Appeal — Academic,  collegiate,  cultural,  edification, 
encyclopedia,  guidance,  industrious,  intellect,  knowledge, 
liberal,  literature,  military,  nurture,  philosophy,  prepara 
tion,  qualification,  scholarly,  scientific,  studious,  technical, 
tuition,  vocational. 

Entertainment  Appeal. — Amusement,  association,  comradeship, 
conviviality,  courtesy,  festive,  heartiness,  joviality,  pleasure, 
pastime,  society,  welcome. 

Health  Appeal. — Brave,  chipper,  fettle,  flourish,  fresh,  hale, 
hearty,  pep,  poise,  robust,  sanitary,  vigorous,  weatherproof. 

Pride  of  Ownership  Appeal. — Adorn,  appreciation,  decorate, 
delicacy,  enrich,  estate,  interest,  landowner,  occupant, 
proprietor,  refinement,  resources,  wealth. 

Profit  Appeal. — Accrue,  beneficial,  earnings,  enhance,  flourish, 
fortune,  growth,  improvement,  income,  invaluable,  property, 
prosper,  remuneration,  resources,  revenue,  reward,  service, 
thrive,  win,  worth,  yield. 

Protection  Appeal. — Assurance,  bodyguard,  buffer,  bulwark, 
confidence,  custodian,  gain,  guarantee,  guardianship, 
invulnerable,  master,  patronage,  preservation,  safeguard, 
security,  stronghold,  vigilant,  warranty. 

Sentiment  Appeal. — Anticipate,  ardent,  assure,  belief,  calm, 
character,  cherish,  deep-rooted,  eagerness,  enthusiasm, 
fervor,  foster,  fullness,  heartiness,  indelible,  opinion, 
principle,  promise,  response,  sanguine,  secret,  sincere,  soul, 
spirit,  staunch,  steadfast,  sympathy,  touching,  trustful, 
warmth,  zealous. 

65.  A  Typical  Poster  Campaign. — The  advertiser 
introducing  a  new  article  or  entering  a  territory  new  to 
his  goods,  must  decide  whether  he  will  post  in  advance 
of  his  salesmen  or  after  distribution  has  been  obtained 
among  dealers  by  the  salesmen.  If  the  advertiser  is  not 
well  known  in  that  territory,  it  will  be  a  big  sales  asset 
for  the  posters  to  appear  in  the  month  in  which  the  mis 
sionary  salesman  solicits  orders,  so  that  the  dealer  will 
have  this  visual  evidence  of  advertising,  and  not  a  mere 
promise.  If  the  advertiser  and  product  are  known  to  the 
merchant,  and  the  product  has  distribution,  then  the 
salesman  can  either  precede  the  posting  or  work  along 


40     OUTDOOR   AND   STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING 

at  the  same  time.  It  is  a  great  stimulation  to  the  sales 
man  to  see  his  product  advertised  right  in  the  vicinity 
of  the  dealers  on  whom  he  is  to  call. 

Let  us  picture  a  campaign  of  posting  by  a  well-estab 
lished  advertiser,  but  new  to  the  territory.  He  is  selling 
a  beverage  that  is  sold  at  soda  fountains,  and  also  in  bottles 
for  the  home — a  ginger  ale  for  instance.  How  will  he 
proceed? 

First  his  salesmen  must  be  thoroughly  schooled  in 
the  campaign.  They  must  be  equipped  with  the  proper 
dealer  aids,  such  as  store  signs,  window  trims,  etc.,  carry 
a  portfolio  which  will  show  the  posters,  preferably  in  color, 
and  reproductions  of  other  advertising  to  be  done;  in  this 
way  they  will  be  able  to  explain  the  whole  advertising  plan 
to  the  dealer. 

It  is  fine  practice  for  salesmen  to  place  upon  store 
windows  small  color  reproductions  of  the  poster,  as  this 
makes  a  tie-up  between  the  large  poster  advertising  and  the 
retail  point  of  sale.  Then,  when  the  posters  appear,  the  full 
effect  of  demand  for  the  ginger  ale  comes  from  the  public, 
and  the  dealer,  seeing  his  new  stock  begin  to  move,  recalls 
that  the  salesman's  promises  have  been  fulfilled. 

All  soft  drinks  are  presumed  to  have  a  season  of  heavi 
est  sale  in  the  summer  months,  and  this  heated  period  is 
the  proper  time  for  the  poster  campaign  to  appear.  This 
does  not  mean,  however,  that  soft-drink  advertising  is 
limited  to  a  short  season;  for  the  United  States  is  so  large 
that  the  advertiser  has  a  year-round  season  somewhere 
in  the  states.  In  New  England,  in  January  the  snow  on 
the  ground  does  not  whet  appetites  for  soft  drinks ;  but  in 
January  thousands  of  people  in  Florida,  along  the  southern 
Gulf  states,  and  in  parts  of  California  are  thirsty  because 
of  the  heat.  The  four  seasons  in  America  vary  as  to  their 
arrival  in  the  different  states,  and  a  soft-drink  manufac 
turer  can  take  advantage  of  these  weather  conditions  to 


OUTDOOR   AND   STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING    41 

keep  his  plant  busy  in  months  he  may  have  considered 
dull.  It  is  a  recent  accomplishment  of  advertising  to 
break  up  seasonable  demand  and  make  a  more  even  sale 
throughout  the  year,  and  great  strides  have  been  made  by 
soft-drink  manufacturers  in  this  respect. 

PAINTED   BULLETINS   AND   WALLS 

66.  Painted  Bulletins. — The  name  painted  bulletin  is 
applied  to  an  individual  structure  built  of  steel  and  wood, 
on  the  surface  of  which  the  advertisement  is  painted  or 
occasionally  affixed  in  some  unusual  manner.     Bulletins 
may  be  located  on  the  surface  of  the  ground,  or  on  the 
roofs  or  walls  of  buildings.     They  are  placed  upon  care 
fully  chosen  locations  within  a  city,  along  suburban  arteries, 
on  commercial  highways,  or  along  interurban,  electric  or 
railway  lines.     Where  night  circulation  warrants,  they 
are  effectively  illuminated.     While  posters  are  used  for 
general  market  coverage,  painted  displays  are  commonly 
used  for  selective  coverage.     They  are  probably  the  most 
flexible  of  all  forms  of  advertising.     Each  unit  is  selected 
by  the  advertiser  to  serve  his  specific  needs;  and  displays 
may  be  used  as  single  units  or  in  numbers  sufficient  to 
cover  a  city  or  other  market  area. 

There  are  two  general  types — bulletins  and  walls. 
The  advertisement  is  painted  by  hand  directly  on  the 
sheet-metal  surface  of  the  bulletin  or  upon  the  wall  of  a 
building.  Painted  displays  may  be  used  on  the  basis  of 
a  single  unit,  in  groups  to  provide  coverage  of  the  market, 
or  in  any  number  desired  to  serve  the  specific  needs  of  the 
advertiser. 

Market  coverages  are  not  standardized  to  the  same 
extent  as  in  poster  advertising. 

67.  City  and  Suburban  Bulletins. — The  number  of 
types  of  city  and  suburban  bulletins  has  been  reduced  so 
that  now  there  are  four  general  types  of  structure:  ground 


42     OUTDOOR   AND   STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING 

bulletin,  roof  bulletin,  store  bulletin,  and  wall  bulletin. 
Standard  structures  have  been  adopted  for  these  four 
types.  In  all  cases  the  painting  surface  is  made  of  smooth 
galvanized  sheet  iron,  with  a  standardized  frame  or  mold 
ing.  On  all  city  and  suburban  bulletins,  the  molding  and 
lattice  are  painted  white. 

The  city  and  suburban  bulletin  is  one  of  the  most 
beautiful  and  dignified  types  of  outdoor  advertising .  This 
type  of  bulletin  is  used  to  a  large  extent  to  reach  the  high- 
class  automobile  circulation  on  city  boulevards  and  main 
suburban  highways.  It  is  12J  feet  high  by  47  feet  long, 
allowing  a  painting  surface  of  10  feet  6  inches  high  by  44 
feet  long.  It  has  a  decorative  molding  and  is  set  on  a 
base  of  diagonal  lattice  work.  Where  night  traffic  is 
heavy,  it  is  illuminated. 

The  1930  census  figures  show  that  a  gradual  shifting 
of  the  city  population  to  surburban  residential  towns  is 
now  in  progress.  This  development  increases  the  circula 
tion  between  the  city  proper  and  the  surrounding  area 
and,  of  course,  also  increases  the  value  of  city  and  sub 
urban  bulletins  along  the  main  arteries  of  travel. 

Another  recent  development  which  has  greatly 
enhanced  the  value  of  this  type  of  display  is  the  tre 
mendous  increase  in  the  number  of  automobiles  in  the 
United  States  during  recent  years — from  9,200,000 
registered  in  1920  to  over  24,700,000  all  types,  registered 
in  1934.  Today  people  are  constantly  on  the  go.  And 
the  greater  the  number  of  people  who  are  out  motoring, 
the  greater  is  the  number  who  see  outdoor  advertising; 
while  the  more  time  they  spend  outdoors,  the  more  often 
they  see  these  large  colorful  displays. 

City  and  suburban  bulletins  have  an  all-round  value 
in  that  they  reach  jobbers,  dealers,  salesmen,  consumers 
— every  element  that  makes  up  a  market. 

A  beautiful  example  of  a  city  and  suburban  bulletin  is 
shown  in  Fig.  9. 


OUTDOOR   AND   STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING    43 

68.  The  most  important  locations  for  city  bulletins 
are  very  often  embellished  by  the  plant  owner  with  a 
landscape  treatment,  or  if  the  location  is  not  suitable  for 
grass  and  shrubs,  gravel  or  crushed  rock  is  spread  over 
the  entire  area  between  the  structure  and  the  sidewalk. 
This  gravel  is  raked  over  sufficiently  often  to  keep  it 
smooth  and  level  and  free  from  weeds. 

City  and  suburban  bulletins  are  painted  usually  three 
times  a  year,  with  change  of  copy  if  ordered  and  approved 
by  the  advertiser. 

69.  Ground  Bulletins. — Ground  bulletins  are  erected 
on  the  surface  of  undeveloped  property.     The  standard 
structure  measures  12|  feet  in  height  and  47  feet  in  length. 
It  is  set  on  a  base  of  lattice  work.     These  painted-dis 
play  units  are  separated  and  individualized  as  much  as 
possible,  the  minimum  separation  between  ground  bulle 
tins  being  5  feet.     An  example  of  a  typical  gound  bulletin 
is  displayed  in  Fig.  10. 

An  illuminated  ground  bulletin  has  at  least  six  reflectors 
with  a  150- watt  lamp  in  each  reflector.  If  the  bulletin  is 
in  a  locality  where  it  is  surrounded  by  other  light  competi 
tion,  the  size  of  the  lamps  is  increased  to  200-watt  or 
more  in  order  to  insure  effective  lighting.  As  in  the  case 
of  all  illuminated  displays,  illumination  begins  at  sunset 
and  continues  as  long  as  circulation  warrants. 

70.  Roof  Bulletins. — Roof  bulletins  are  built  in  accor 
dance   with   rigid   plans    and   specifications.     They   are 
regularly  inspected  to  insure  their  safe  and  proper  main 
tenance.     The  framework  is  designed  under  the  direction 
of  competent  engineers,  to  insure  safety  and  to  meet  the 
requirements  of  local  building  ordinances. 

71.  Preferred    Position. — Preferred    position    is    the 
name  given  to  painted  displays  located  at  downtown 
points  of  great  circulation  in  the  larger  cities.     From  these 


44     OUTDOOR  AND  STREET-CAR  ADVERTISING 


OUTDOOR   AND   STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING    45 


536B— 4 


46     OUTDOOR   AND   STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING 

points  of  vantage,  preferred  positions  reach  the  resident 
population  of  the  city,  people  from  the  surrounding  sub 
urbs,  and  out-of-town  visitors;  for  practically  all  these 
people  are  naturally  drawn  to  the  downtown  centers 
where  the  larger  stores,  hotels,  and  theatres  are  located. 

Displays  of  this  type  may  be  either  ground  or  roof 
bulletins  that  possess  high  advertising  value  because  of 
their  dominant  size,  high  visibility,  and  large  circulation. 

The  preferred  position  illustrated  in  Fig.  11  is  a  roof 
bulletin — erected  according  to  standard  specifications. 
At  night  these  bulletins  are  usually  illuminated.  Their 
size  varies  according  to  space  available.  The  advertising 
copy  is  painted  on  the  steel  surface  of  the  bulletin  and 
repainted  every  4  months.  If  desired,  the  copy  may  be 
changed  at  each  repaint. 

Because  of  conditions  to  be  contended  with  in  building 
structures,  it  is  impossible  to  adopt  a  standard  size. 
However,  displays  are  of  a  standard  type  in  all  cases,  and 
so  located  as  to  dominate  points  of  great  circulation. 

Preferred  positions  may  be  selected  as  individual  bulle 
tins  to  reach  a  particular  part  of  the  market,  or  selected 
as  a  group  to  provide  coverage  of  the  entire  city.  But 
wherever  or  however  used,  their  message  is  outstanding. 

72.  Store  Bulletins. — Store  bulletins  are  affixed,  at 
eye-level  (about  3  feet)  to  walls  of  buildings — right  in  the 
line  of  vision  to  passing  circulation  in  neighborhood  com 
munities.  Their  height  is  standard,  9  feet  10J  inches. 
Their  length  varies  from  11  feet  to  26  feet,  depending  on 
the  amount  of  space  available. 

These  bulletins  are  usually  attached  to  corner  drug 
stores,  grocery  stores,  meat  markets,  delicatessens,  or 
cigar  stores.  They  are  essentially  localized  advertising 
for  the  products  sold  through  these  outlets. 

Such  locations  give  them  a  "point  of  purchase"  advan 
tage  for  the  products  of  every-day  use,  bought  at  neigh 
borhood  stores  within  walking  distance  of  the  home. 


OUTDOOR   AND   STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING    47 

Store  bulletins  may  be  used  in  any  number  desired  and 
in  any  section  of  the  city.  They  are  well  suited  to  cover 
specific  markets,  such  as  neighborhood  shopping  centers, 
racial  residential  sections,  or  school  neighborhoods. 
They  may  be  selected  by  the  advertiser  to  do  the  particular 
job  required  to  keep  his  product  moving.  The  best  loca 
tions  for  store  bulletins  are  at  transfer  points  and  junc 
tions  of  primary  streets  and  neighborhood  business  centers. 
These  bulletins  are  usually  illuminated  where  night  traffic 
warrants.  The  store  bulletin  illustrated  in  Fig.  12  is 
placed  just  where  it  will  attract  the  passer-by  to  the 
drug  store  where  the  article  advertised  may  be  had. 

Wall  bulletins  are  structurally  the  same  as  roof  bulle 
tins,  except  that  they  have  no  supporting  framework. 
Wall  bulletins  are  fastened  to  the  face  of  buildings  and 
conform  to  standard  dimensions  as  nearly  as  possible. 
In  some  plants,  no  special  distinction  is  made  between 
store  and  wall  bulletins,  since  both  are  affixed  to  walls. 
The  bulletins  are  designed  with  removable  sections  so 
that  all  painting  can  be  done  in  the  studio. 

73.  Railroad  Bulletins. — Bulletins  of  this  type  are 
constructed  in  two  sizes,  18  feet  high  by  72  feet  long  and 
12J  feet  high  by  42  feet  long.  Bulletins  of  the  larger  size 
are  generally  referred  to  as  metropolitan  railroad  bulletins. 
They  are  located  adjacent  to  large  cities  where  traffic  is 
greatest  and  where  they  reach  both  out-of-town  and  local 
passengers.  As  trains  approach  the  larger  metropolises, 
passengers  are  usually  "all  eyes,"  and  it  is  at  this  time 
that  these  bulletins  command  attention  and  register  their 
message.  Bulletins  of  the  smaller  type  are  usually  located 
farther  from  the  large  cities;  otherwise  they  are  much  the 
same  as  the  metropolitan  bulletins. 

Railroad  bulletins  reach  the  traveling  public — busi 
ness  men,  national  travelers,  and  commuters — people  of 
better  than  average  means;  and,  therefore,  good  prospects. 


48     OUTDOOR   AND   STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING 


OUTDOOR   AND   STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING    49 


1 


50     OUTDOOR   AND   STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING 

This  type  of  bulletin  is  ideally  suited  to  advertising 
hotels,  restaurants,  theaters,  stores,  or  high-class  products 
which  appeal  to  the  well-to-do  people  of  America. 

An  excellent  railroad  bulletin  is  shown  in  Fig.   13. 

Out-of-town  visitors  come  to  the  cities  from  all  over  the 
country — buyers,  executives,  and  leaders  in  various  walks 
of  life,  whose  influence  reaches  to  all  sections  of  the 
country.  The  shift  of  the  better  classes  from  the  city  to 
the  suburban  area  has  greatly  increased  the  number  of 
commuters — a  new  army  of  daily  travelers  who  represent 
the  best  buying  class  in  America.  Railroad  bulletins 
reach  both  national  travelers  and  commuters. 

74.  Adjacent  to  metropolitan  cities,  where  railroad 
traffic  is  unusually  heavy,  a  special  railroad  bulletin  may 
be  used,  measuring  18  feet  in  height  and  72  feet  in  length. 
Some  such  bulletins  are  as  high  as  20  feet  and  as  long  as 
300  or  400  feet  with  cut-outs  reproducing  packages  or 
factory  buildings  which  extend  over  the  top  of  the  display. 
A  cut-out  is  a  section  of  the  board  in  outline,  extending 
above  the  bulletin  top ;  it  may  outline  a  package,  such  as  a 
tube  of  tooth  paste.  Cut-outs  may  be  made  so  unique  in 
design  that  they  are  bound  to  get  attention.  They  attract 
by  their  contrast  to  the  regular  rectangular  shape  of  the 
ordinary  board. 

Railroad  bulletins  are  erected  wherever  train  move 
ment  justifies,  paralleling  the  main  lines  of  the  principal 
railroads  and  also  covering  suburban  electric  lines  enter 
ing  important  commercial  centers.  They  stand  on  both 
sides  of  the  tracks  at  distances  which  enable  the  passengers 
to  read  easily  the  advertisements  displayed. 

Railroad  bulletins  are  set  back  far  enough  from  the 
tracks  to  give  the  eye  full  opportunity  to  read  even  when 
trains  are  passing  at  high  speed.  It  is  very  important 
that  the  placing  of  the  bulletin  be  not  too  close  to  the 
tracks. 


OUTDOOR   AND   STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING     51 

It  should  also  be  recorded  that  local  factories  use  a  few 
bulletins  along  the  railroads  approaching  their  home  cities, 
even  erecting  bulletins  on  their  own  grounds  when  the 
factory  happens  to  be  located  on  the  railroad  main  line. 
Many  cities,  too,  have  bulletins  inviting  manufacturers  to 
locate  there  and  depicting  a  few  of  the  city's  industrial 
advantages. 

Where  there  is  a  heavy  commuter  travel,  railroad- 
bulletin  advertising  has  advantages  for  many  other  lines 
of  business,  such  as  office  appliances,  portable  houses, 
building  material,  real  estate,  and  especially  shops.  Com 
muters  can  see  these  advertising  messages  twice  a  day. 

75.  Highway  Bulletins. — Standard  highway  bulletins 
are  located  on  heavily-traveled  highways.  Care  is  taken 
to  make  certain  that  bulletins  are  not  placed  where  they 
might  interfere  with  natural  scenic  beauty.  These  bulle 
tins  are  12J  feet  high  by  42  feet  long. 

During  the  last  decade  the  use  of  the  automobile  has 
grown  rapidly  until  there  are  now  approximately  24,700,000 
cars  in  use  and  over  700,000  miles  of  hard-surfaced  high 
ways  in  the  United  States.  Forty  million  people  a  year 
go  on  long-distance  motor  trips.  Shorter  working  hours 
and  labor-saving  appliances  in  the  home  allow  people 
more  time  for  recreation.  Gold  clubs,  stadiums,  parks, 
athletic  fields,  and  resorts  dot  the  land.  They  satisfy 
the  demand  of  the  millions  for  outdoor  recreation. 

Just  as  there  are  many  different  makes  of  automobiles 
on  the  roads,  there  are  many  different  kinds  of  people  liv 
ing  in  various  towns,  having  their  own  particular  tastes 
and  habits,  accustomed  to  different  standards  of  living, 
reading  different  publications,  going  to  different  churches 
— every  one  differing  from  every  other  one — but  with 
these  few  things  in  common:  all  ride  in  automobiles,  al) 
buy  food,  clothes,  shelter,  and  amusement;  and  all  see 
outdoor  advertising.  It  is  the  common  denominator 


52     OUTDOOR   AND   STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING 

— the  medium  which  suits  practically  all  kinds  of  products 
and  all  kinds  of  people. 

Highway  bulletins  may  be  used  to  cover  the  entire 
country,  a  state,  a  particular  territory,  or  the  approaches 
to  a  city;  whichever  suits  the  advertiser's  requirements. 

The  standard  highway  bulletin  face  is  enclosed  in  a 
frame  and  structure  having  3  feet  of  lattice  and  satis 
factory  base  columns.  In  appearance  it  is  similar  to  the 
standard  city  or  suburban  bulletin.  Highway  bulletins 
should  be  repainted  twice  a  year.  The  molding  and 
lattice  work  of  both  highway  and  railroad  bulletins  are 
painted  a  cream  color. 

The  setting  of  the  automobile-highway  bulletin  is  in 
three  positions:  the  head-on,  facing  traffic  directly,  so  as 
to  be  read  without  effort;  the  semi-head-on,  facing  traffic 
at  an  angle;  and  the  flat-on,  which  stands  parallel  to  the 
road. 

In  Fig.  14  is  shown  a  highway  bulletin  of  de  luxe  semi- 
head-on  construction  so  placed  as  to  give  autoists  a  fair 
chance  to  read. 

76.  Painted  City  Walls. — A  painted  city  wall  is  an 
advertisement  painted  on  the  wall  of  a  building  in  any 
of  the  larger  cities  throughout  the  country. 

These  painted  walls  average  about  200  square  feet  in 
size  and  are  surrounded  by  a  standard  cream-colored 
border.  They  are  located  at  eye-level  or  just  above  it. 
Day  after  day  they  command  the  attention  of  passersby, 
stamping  the  advertiser's  message  in  their  memory,  creat 
ing  belief,  and  building  familiarity. 

Located  upon  grocery  stores,  drug  stores  or  other  build 
ings  in  neighborhood  centers,  painted  walls  reach  the 
housewife  while  she  does  her  daily  shopping,  constantly 
acting  as  a  last-minute  reminder  at  the  point  where  the 
advertised  goods  are  sold.  In  factory  sections  they  are 
ideally  suited  to  deliver  an  advertising  message  direct 


OUTDOOR   AND   STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING    53 

to  the  wage  earner.  Tobacco  products,  work  clothes,  food 
products — in  fact,  almost  everything  sold  to  these  con 
sumers,  can  be  profitably  advertised  in  this  way. 

Painted  walls  may  be  selected  to  cover  any  particular 
market  or  combination  of  markets.  By  concentrating 
where  the  opportunity  for  sales  is  best,  the  advertiser 
obtains  maximum  effectiveness. 

77.  Painted  Town  Walls. — A  painted  town  wall  is  an 
advertisement  painted  on  the  wall  of  a  building  in  any 
town  or  small  city  throughout  the  country.  Only  walls 
that  offer  a  definite  advertising  value  are  chosen,  and  only 
that  portion  is  painted  which  provides  the  greatest 
visibility.  The  average  size  of  these  walls  is  about  200 
square  feet. 

A  standard  cream-colored  border  has  been  adopted 
which  adds  to  the  uniformity  of  appearance. 

The  towns  and  cities  of  less  than  50,000  population  in 
the  United  States  represent  the  tremendous  buying  power 
of  80,000,000  people — about  two-thirds  of  the  country's 
entire  population. 

With  painted-wall  displays  the  manufacturer  covers 
the  town.  He  delivers  his  story  to  the  entire  resident 
population  and  to  visitors  from  the  surrounding  territory 
as  well.  The  dealer,  the  manufacturer's  salesmen,  and 
the  jobber's  salesmen  are  stimulated  to  new  enthusiasm 
by  wall  displays  right  in  their  own  territories.  They 
have  tangible  evidence  of  their  companies'  support. 

Painted  walls  may  be  purchased  on  a  showing  basis 
for  national,  territorial,  or  state  coverage. 

They  may  also  be  used  on  a  selective  basis  to  cover 
specific  types  of  towns  or  classes  of  people.  Important 
highways  may  be  covered  by  using  walls  in  towns  along 
the  route.  Such  a  display  provides  a  continuous  selling 
force  for  automotive  products  or  any  other  product  sold 
to  motorists — and  the  automobile  owner  is  a  logical  con- 


54     OUTDOOR   AND    STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING 


> 


ARMOUR'S 

STAR 
BACON 


Oi  UCJGUS  KUfcVOR 


I 


FIG.  IS 


OUTDOOR   AND   STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING    55 

sumer  for  virtually  every  commodity.  Painted  wall  dis 
plays  in  small  cities  may  be  used  on  a  showing  basis  assur 
ing  uniform  and  adequate  coverage  of  selective  markets. 

City  and  suburban  walls  are  of  various  sizes — in 
metropolitan  centers  they  are  usually  vertical  rectangles. 
All  city  and  suburban  walls  are  surrounded  by  an  orna 
mental  painted  border,  which  gives  the  general  effect  of 
a  standard  bulletin  structure.  That  part  of  the  wall  which 
is  exposed  to  view,  but  is  not  a  part  of  the  advertising 
surface,  is  usually  painted  a  standard  olive  green. 

City  and  suburban  walls  are  sold  on  long-term  con 
tracts,  usually  for  1,  2  or  3  years.  They  are  painted  semi- 
annually,  with  change  of  copy  if  desired  by  the  advertiser. 

In  Fig.  15  is  shown  a  good  example  of  a  painted  city 
wall.  Town  walls  vary  in  position  and  dimensions,  depend 
ing  on  the  conditions  to  be  met. 

78.  Cost  of  Painted  Displays. — The  best  painted  dis 
plays  are  executed  by  high-class  sign  painters  and  scenic 
artists,  and  the  bulletin  or  wall  is  usually  sold  at  a  specified 
price.  This  price  is  based  on  the  circulation  value  of  the 
location  to  the  advertiser,  the  comparative  dominance  of 
the  display,  the  price  the  plant  owner  must  pay  for  the 
lease,  and  the  cost  of  preparing  the  structure.  The  old- 
time  method  of  basing  the  charge  for  painting-display 
surfaces  at  so  much  a  square  foot  has  been  abolished,  even 
in  remote  rural  districts.  All  prices  are  now  quoted  on  a 
unit  of  space,  which  varies  according  to  the  circulation 
value  of  the  medium. 

Contracts  are  usually  made  for  a  period  of  12  months, 
and  sometimes  up  to  as  many  as  10  years.  There  are 
some  6-month  contracts;  but  these  are  the  exception. 
In  the  price  paid  by  an  advertiser  is  included  the  value 
of  the  original  sketches,  the  first  painting,  the  repainting, 
and  all  maintenance;  so  that  the  advertiser  knows  there 
are  no  additional  expense  items. 


^ 

8 

8 

8 

8 

o 
o 

8 

8 

$ 

|s| 

1 

S 

1 

8 

o 

8 

1 

8 

I 

** 

1 

Number 

c^ 

CO 

i 

00 

1 

iO 

r—  1 

S 

>> 

^    -5 

s 

8 

8 

8 

8 

8 

8 

3. 

o  ft§ 

i-H 

t^ 

S 

g 

§ 

»d 

g 

§ 

5 

°    s 

CO 

CO 

i—  i 

CO 

CO 

^ 

0 

T3 

8 

> 

h 

0) 

1 

Pti 

0 

1 

1 

*"" 

1—1 

"* 

CM 

iO 

10 

iO 

w 

fc 

0 
ID 

1, 

^ 

8 

8 

8 

8 

g 

8 

8 

fa 

fe    5 

o 

o 

id 

id 

o 

id 

0 

QJ    ! 

S 

55 

CO 

i-H 

CN 

te 

C 

1 

^ 

o 

S   c 

B 

IJ 

5                (H 

3               4) 

2 

11 

?             1 

(M 

T—  1 

<N 

^ 

T—  1 

d 

CO 

P 

OP 

•H                - 

P4 

q 

_•    o 

~* 

B    S 

w    < 

|> 

^ 

S 

| 

8 

o 

8 

8 

8 

.i1 

§  |  § 

CO 

OO 

id 

00 

1 

g 

id 

c§ 

9         HH 

0 

^     ^ 

CO 

(N 

CO 

(N 

^f 

H     ^ 

1> 

C/3 

"S 

01 

i 

I 

4) 

a 
H 

o 

"O 

__; 

^_; 

^; 

fe 

5 

i 

*~^   co 

VI 

. 

r^ 

^^ 

^r^ 

•   co 

W 

I 

1 

_;    §^ 

^."3 

dhS 

^.'oJ 

^H      §^ 

^    0^ 

^""^ 

0 

2n 

HH  ^H  t^ 

HH  1^ 

HH  I-H 

HH  t^ 

HH  r<  t^ 

hH  ^H  t^ 

|TJ  [^  r~1 

s 

> 

1 

E 

(M  t^  i-H 

i-H 

I-H  CM 

0,^ 

^  rH  O 
r-  1 

I-H  coco 

-^  iO  CM 

0 

o 

§ 

00 

00 
1—  1 

^ 

0 

cO 

JO 

h. 

- 

'•3 

CO 

i-H 

o 

T—  1 

°°~ 

CO 

iO 

M 

a 

06 

^ 

o 

00 

§ 

§ 

§ 

9 

o 

C1^ 

r-H 

CM 

1—  ( 

T—  H 

< 

ft 

d 

3 

03 

• 

3 

• 

I 

\ 

X 

0 

O 

§ 

Cj 

*N 

BQ 

"~^ 

o 

03 
U 

4 
I 

1 

O 

i 

r^ 

1 

a 

s 

ef 

o 

W 

Imington 

PQ 

PL, 

1 

1 

1 

03 

g 

66 


g 


o 

Q 
I 

bfi 
_C 

',5 

02 

I 

57 


P££ 
CO  CO  TH 


8 


CO 


s 


CO 


lo      I 


al 


8 


HH  PQ 
rH  IO 


8 


8 


_.  3^3 

•*  CO  O 


K 


9 


8 


^  o 


§ 

J 


^ 

8 

8 

8 

g 

8 

1 

8 

1 

1 

3M 

10 

(M 

rH 

0^ 

§ 

8 

S 

oc 

S 

rH 

s 

ft% 

1 

i 

s 

0 

rH 

CD 

10 

oi 

o 

CO 

oo 

oo 

<N 

rH 

fc 

| 

*M| 

8 

8 

8 

8 

| 

8 

8 

3 

G 

o»| 

CO 

^ 

S 

CO 

8 

I 

c^ 

PS 

o 

1 

r-T 

« 

| 

rH 

^ 

<N 

rH 

rH 

(M 

CO 

0 

i 

D 

rH 

8 

% 

0 

o" 

LO 

1> 

$    -^  ^^5 

8 

8 

8 

8 

8 

8 

8 

0 

h 

r  : 

8 

8 

S 

8 

8 

16 

8 

1 

O 

i    ^    ^ 

rH 

rH 

CO 

rH 

rH 

£ 

^ 

~c 

s  , 

M 

?l 

£  I 
"S7 

5         rQ 

^           ;J 

s    ri 

5     a 

rH 

<M 

rH 

CO 

(N 

rH 

rH 

rH 

S    g 

Q 

1 

2     O 

5     * 

>     < 

1 

- 

8 

8 

8 

8 

8 

8 

8 

8^ 

„    B 

.1 

o  |  § 

rH 

c3 

g 

S 

S 

t^ 

g 

t? 

j     ^ 

Q 

s 

rH 

CO 

" 

rH 

rH 

rH 

3    « 

"c 

a 

H        rt 

1 

H 

. 

. 

. 

fc 

H 

H 

0 

iresental 

c 

i 

HH 

al 

i 

—  ;  o 

— 

al 

hH 

al 

1 

all 

HH  ^  ^ 

2 

a 

3 

55 

r-«N 

O5  CD 

rH  CO 

CD 

CO  10 

rH  CO 

rH  (N  CO 

rH  rH  CO 

> 

8 

g 

0 

s 

S! 

S 

CD 

00 

£ 

1 

tj 

'-S 

00 

00^ 

O5 

»O 

cD 

Cl 

lO 

w 

i 

1 

g" 

1 

rf 

CD 

rH 

S 

oo" 

rH 

£5 

8" 

K 
§ 

PH 

s 

1 

\ 

CJ 

; 

OQ 

'd 

1 

^ 

d 

; 

6 

1 

6 

S 

-3 

2 

co 

S 

,a 

Q 

£ 

I 

1 

'I 

PH 

a. 

*3 

S 

cf 

1 

^ 

I 

J 

I 

« 

1 

O 

1 

i 

1 

1 

1 

| 

58 


8 

8 

8 

8 

8 

8 

o 

o 

8 

8 

i 

8 

o 

8 

to 

o 

ca 

0 

§ 

w 

CO 

CO 

CO 

(N 

10 

^^ 

CO 

o 

rH 

<M 

rH 

o 

8 

8 

s 

rH 

s 

« 

I 

8 

8 

8 
8 

i 

d 
1 

1 

8 
S 

8 

lo 

I 

CO 

<M 

CO 

- 

CO 

10 

« 

. 

* 

„ 

8 

§ 

8 

8 

8 

8 

g 

8 

o 

8 

8 

1 

1 

1 

i 

o 

1 

(N 

§ 

o5 

<M 

rH 

rH 

CO 

rH 

rH 

- 

- 

(N 

rH 

8 

8 

8 

8 

8 

8 

8 

o 

8 

8 

o 

0 

00 

»o 

1C 

»o 

o 

o 

o 

rfi 

(N 

CO 

T—1 

CO 

s 

«, 

1-1 

l> 

rH 

*ii 

d 

-d 

hH 

a'a  °^ 

hH 

i 
o 

tt 

all 

all 

si 

^B 

^m  ^ 
sS^ 

hH 

C 

rH 

rH  rH  rH  C^ 

CO 

<NrH 

rH  CO  10 

(N  CO  CO 

10  CO 

rHrHCN 

rHT^  CO 

** 

TH 

00 
O5 

(M 

OS 

00 

i 

to 

O5 

rH 
00 

5o 

00 

rH 

T^ 

iO 

os 

CO 

00 

CO 

O5 

C^l 

CO 

S 

si 

rH 

s 

8 

iO~ 
00 

rH 

1 

o 
oo 

(N 

CO 

;' 

• 

03 

i' 

W 
fc 

•-3 
fc 

O 
& 

d 

O 
>^ 

$w 

d 
PH 

hH 
PJ 

d 

rri 

Manchester, 

O 

1 

I 

Greensboro, 

§ 

I 

i 

Oklahoma  C 

Portland,  Or 

Harrisburg, 

Providence, 

Charleston, 

^a 

8 

8 

8 

8 

8 

s? 

* 

|s| 

8 

1 

I 

i 

S 

^^ 

0 

** 

1 

1 

8 

1 

* 

10 

S 

S3 

1 

1" 

-s.-^ 

8 

8 

8 

8 

8 

So 

& 

8 

^3 

8 

t^  id 

s 

3 

S 

CO 

CO 

^H  >0 

o 

"H 

1 

S 

> 

h 

g 

1 

1 

co 

CD 

Tt< 

T* 

^ 

^^ 

pq 

55 

0 

m 

1> 

M 

8 

8 

8 

8 

8 

B8 

§ 

1] 

'    |a| 

8 

8 

o 

1 

g 

88 

fc 

PH£ 

€^ 

G  g 

"S  '5 

1 

>»            J 

£  ° 

a 

^ 

(N 

rH 

(M 

j—  i 

co  c^ 

.§      E 

P* 

i| 

"S    o 

1    ft 
B  < 

1 

8 

8 

8 

8 

8 

88 

i    g 

S 

|s.| 

8 

8 

(M 

0 

CO 

| 

8  id 
10 
(N  O 

:  $ 

3 

«% 

1-1 

s  g 

.s 

05 

9  a 

s  s 

PH 

_. 

&      „• 

fc 

3 

a 

03 

P? 

CQ 

hH 

JO 

HH 

^         HH 

M 

c 

^ 

A 

•   IJ-H 

d 

^— 

CH 

*KTl                ^H 

H 

O 

1 

^ 

ffi^ 

3^ 

s'l 

'SSsI 

£ 

Pi) 

a 

OJ 

^ 

^^ 

CD  00 

^^ 

i-HO 

<N  (N 

CDIOO5 

^ 

O 
O 

| 

(N 

1 

IO 

| 

§ 

S 

CSICi 

w 

"3 

O 

i 

a" 

Jff 

id"oo" 
t>i> 

w 

0 

T—  1 

. 

i—  i 

T-H 

I—  1 

10 

M 

PH 

1 

pq 

5 

d' 

"cS 

P 

*> 

City  and  SI 

1 

1 

o 

i 

d 
O 

1 

1 

I 

^ 

J 

a 

03 

"Ta    °^ 

O 

•+3 

A 

r-^ 

fl    ^ 

d 

C^ 

pt5 

o 

5 

^J  •»—  i 

Q 

03 

m 

13 

O2 

W^ 

60 


OUTDOOR  AND  STREET-CAR  ADVERTISING     61 

Table  II  shows  the  cost  of  coverage  in  representative 
cities  of  50,000  or  over  throughout  the  United  States  as 
of  1935.  In  this  table,  data  are  given  for  typical  painted 
displays  as  well  as  for  downtown  preferred  position,  boule 
vard,  and  wall  display.  The  figures  given  may  vary  as 
conditions  change,  but  they  will  be  found  sufficiently  accu 
rate  for  purposes  of  comparison. 

79.  In  towns  and  smaller  cities  where  the  population 
ranges  from  1,000  to  50,000,  painted  walls  may  be  used 
to  provide  market  coverage  in  most  states.  These  walls 
average  about  200  square  feet  and  the  advertisement 
proper  is  surrounded  by  a  plain  border.  They  may  be 
used  for  periods  of  one  year  or  more.  Table  III  will 
serve  as  a  basis  for  allotments  and  cost. 

TABLE  III 

NUMBER  AND  COST  OF  WALLS  IN  TOWNS  AND  SMALL  CITIES 


Cities  and  Towns 
Population 

Number    of 
Walls 

Cost 
per  Wall 

Cost  for  Coverage 
per  Month 

1,000  to    2,500 

1 

$6.00 

$6.00 

2,500  to    5,000 

2 

6.00 

12.00 

5,000  to    7,500 

3 

6.00 

18.00 

7,500  to  10,000 

4 

6.50 

26.00 

10,000  to  15,000 

5 

7.00 

35.00 

15,000  to  25,000 

7 

7.50 

52.50 

25,000  to  35,000 

9 

8.00 

72.00 

35,000  to  50,000 

12 

8.50 

102.00 

These  allotments  are  considered  as  a  representative 
display  comparable  with  a  representative  (half)  showing 
in  poster  advertising.  They  are  applicable  in  the  event 
an  advertiser  is  interested  in  all  the  towns  recommended 
in  any  state  or  group  of  states.  Where  towns  of  only  cer 
tain  population  are  selected,  specific  estimates  must  be 
prepared.  The  minimum  appropriation  is  100  units  per 
state. 


536B— 5 


62     OUTDOOR   AND   STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING 

These  wall  displays  serve  a  threefold  purpose  in  the 
market  coverage  they  provide:  (1)  They  cover  the  entire 
resident  population  of  the  towns.  (2)  They  reach  the 
farmers  from  a  wide  area  who  trade  in  these  towns.  (3) 
They  reach  a  large  circulation  of  national  travelers  who 
pass  through  these  towns  and  who  are  impressed  with  an 
advertiser's  product  which  they  see  every  few  miles  along 
their  route  of  travel. 

80.  Manner  of  Using  Painted  Displays. — Since  each 
painted  display  is  a  unit  capable  of  separate  treatment, 
the  methods  of  making  use  of  such  displays  are  various 
and  depend  on  the  purpose  the  advertiser  wishes  to 
accomplish.  There  are,  however,  three  generally  used 
methods,  which  are  as  follows: 

1.  Using  the  ' 'high-spots,"  or  centrally  located  bulletin  boards 
and  walls  where  it  is  reasonable  to  assume  that  most  of  the 
population  passes  at  some  time  during  a  week  or  month. 
These  locations  are  the  highest  priced  and  have  the  greatest 
circulation  value,  and  displays  on  them  make  a  strong  im 
pression  on  the  public. 

2.  Making  use  of  distributed  locations  to  reach  certain  neighbor 
hoods  and  shopping  sections.     For  a  grocery  product,  as  an 
example,  it  is  advantageous  to  use  displays  in  the  neighbor 
hoods  where  women  go  to  the  grocery  every  day.     In  fact, 
for  any  product  sold  through  a  great  number  of  retail  stores, 
the   advertiser  usually   wants   as   many   locations   of  this 
character  as  will  give  him  a  general  showing.     Sometimes,  in 
a  large  city,  he  may  be  interested  in  only  one  or  two  particu 
lar  sections  where  the  brand  or  package  needs  support.     To 
reach  the  people  coming  from  points  outside  the  city,  he 
may  make  use  of  one  highway  bulletin  or  a  group  of  them,  or 
one  railroad  bulletin  or  a  group  of  them,  for  whatever  num 
ber  of  displays  are  needed. 

3.  The  using  of  displays  in  one  or  two  locations  to  draw  trade 
to  a  local  store  from  a  neighborhood  which  logically  is  tribu 
tary  to  that  store.     Products  and  services  of  interest  to 
motorists,  such  as  accessories,  tires,  batteries,  insurance,  etc., 
are  popularly  featured  on  bulletins  along  highways,  as  are 
also  inns  and  summer  hotels.     Manufacturers  and  others 
wanting  to  reach  out-of-town  buyers  use   bulletins  along 
railroads. 


OUTDOOR   AND   STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING    63 

ILLUMINATED   DISPLAYS 

81.  Illuminated  Bulletins. — Where  night  crowds  are 
comparatively  large,  it  is  profitable  to  illuminate  some  of 
the  bulletins  that  occupy  positions  of  special  prominence. 
The  additional  expense  of  illumination  is  justified  by  the 
increased  time  of  circulation,  as  the  bulletins  are  then 
visible  for  about  17  hours  a  day.  The  time  when  the 
bulletins  are  illuminated  is,  of  course,  the  most  valu 
able. 

The  lighting  is  done  indirectly  by  reflectors  extending 
out  from  the  bulletin  and  throwing  an  even  glare  over  the 
entire  bulletin  surface.  Some  of  these  bulletins  have  a 
succession  of  colored  globes  such  as  blue,  red,  and  white. 
These  bulletins  are  built  in  de  luxe  framing  and  many 
have  a  change  of  copy  two  and  three  times  a  year.  They 
will  be  found  mostly  on  roofs,  but  also  on  street  levels  and 
along  motor  highways  close  to  cities. 

Illuminated-bulletin  locations  are  determined  upon 
only  after  careful  selection  from  the  choicest  spots;  and 
only  artistic  designs  are  used,  because  of  the  intrinsic 
advertising  value  and  the  cost  of  the  locations.  The 
bulletins  are  of  steel  surface  with  the  de-luxe  frame.  All 
illuminated  displays  receive  three  paintings  a  year  and 
other  classifications  two,  with  change  of  copy,  if  desired, 
at  time  of  each  repaint. 

All  locations  sold  on  an  illuminated  basis  are  lighted 
from  dusk  to  midnight,  although  this  period  may  vary, 
owing  to  local  conditions.  In  the  Times  Square  District, 
New  York  City,  all  such  displays  are  lighted  until  1 :00 
in  the  morning. 

It  is  customary  to  embody  in  the  contract  a  special 
clause  which  gives  an  advertiser  25  per  cent  credit  pro  rata 
for  any  period  of  non-illumination  due  to  any  cause 
whatsoever. 


64     OUTDOOR   AND   STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING 

82.  Neon  Signs. — Because  of  their  brilliance  and  high 
visibility,  even  in  dull  and  foggy  weather,  neon  signs,  in 
spite  of  their  increased  cost  over  electric  signs,  have  come 
into  fairly  general  use.  Unlike  the  usual  electric  sign, 
neon  light  is  distributed  evenly  throughout  the  lettering 
of  the  sign  and  presents  a  smooth,  unbroken  appearance. 
Essentially,  the  neon  light  is  an  elongated  tube  with  an 
electrode  at  each  end,  to  which  a  high  voltage  is  applied. 
This  causes  a  current  flow  within  the  tube  from  one  end  of 
the  tube  to  the  other.  By  introducing  into  the  vacuum 
a  small  amount  of  one  of  the  rare  gases,  the  entire  space 
becomes  highly  luminous  when  the  space  current  flows. 
The  kind  of  gas  used  determines  the  color.  The  colors 
usually  available  are  orange-red,  violet-blue,  and  green. 
While  neon  is  not  as  yet  applicable  to  moving  figures,  yet 
for  borders  and  fixed  elements,  like  names,  floral  effects 
and  the  like,  its  attention  value  and  inherent  beauty  and 
brilliance  serve  to  enhance  the  moving  parts  of  a  sign. 


ELECTRIC   SPECTACULARS 

83.  Nature  of  Display. — Brilliant  colored  lights,  strik 
ing  illumination,  and  mechanical  motion  are  combined  in 
the  displays  known  as  electric  spectaculars,  to  produce  an 
effect  of  ever  changing  light  and  color  and  action. 

Some  special  feature,  symbol  or  model  of  the  product 
advertised,  and  its  trade  name,  are  usually  featured  in  the 
design.  Running  words  in  moving  electric  light  are  also 
generally  included,  and  these  carry  a  complete  message, 
which  may  be  changed  whenever  desired.  Sometimes 
figures  that  appear  to  move  with  lifelike  action  form  part 
of  the  design  and  add  to  its  attention  and  interest  value. 

Electric  spectaculars  are  one  of  the  most  exclusive  forms 
of  advertising.  They  are  limited  to  a  comparatively  small 
number  of  locations  at  centers  in  the  larger  cities,  where 
night  life  constitutes  a  major  part  of  the  circulation. 


OUTDOOR   AND   STREET-CAB   ADVERTISING    65 

The  influence  of  spectaculars  is  nation-wide.  In 
addition  to  reaching  the  population  of  the  city  and  its 
metropolitan  area,  they  also  reach  a  large  number  of 
visitors  from  all  parts  of  the  country.  These  people  are 
usually  the  most  active  and  progressive  in  the  towns 
from  which  they  come.  They  are  quick  to  observe  what 
is  being  featured  in  the  brilliant  lights  of  the  city,  and  the 
names  they  see  they  naturally  associate  with  national 
leadership.  This  influence  tends  to  develop  into  national 
trends  and  to  spread  to  all  parts  of  the  country, 

84.  Essentially,  a  spectacular  display  is  an  outdoor- 
advertising  unit  that  delivers  the  advertiser's  message  by 
means  of  characters,  designs,  and  letters,  studded  with 
incandescent  lamps.  Because  of  various  position  condi 
tions  at  each  location,  they  vary  in  size  and  type  of  con 
struction. 

One  of  the  most  imposing  of  these  outdoor  displays 
probably  is  the  gigantic  Chevrolet  Spectacular  on  Michi 
gan  Avenue,  Chicago.  This  spectacular  is  nearly  400 
feet  high  and  cost  about  a  quarter  million  dollars  to  build. 
Others,  although  small,  are  effective  because  of  their 
unique  position.  The  sites  for  effective  use  of  these  dis 
plays  are  limited  to  locations  in  concentrated  night  circu- 
culation  centers  that  are  visible  from  many  heavy-traffic 
points  or  for  a  long  distance  along  a  thoroughfare  that 
carries  particularly  heavy  traffic.  The  display  is  generally 
erected  on  the  walls  or  roofs  of  buildings  and  in  plain  view 
of  the  heaviest  night  circulation  of  a  city. 

Spectacular  display  has  reached  its  highest  develop 
ment  on  "The  Great  White  Way"  in  New  York  City, 
where,  on  Broadway  from  Times  Square  to  Columbus 
Circle,  the  night  scene  is  the  most  amazing  in  the  world. 
National  advertisers  estimate  that  a  spectacular  display 
on  Broadway  has  25  per  cent  local  value  and  75  per  cent 
national  value. 


66     OUTDOOR   AND   STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING 


OUTDOOR   AND   STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING    67 

Atlantic  City,  Chicago,  Buffalo,  Detroit,  Los  Angeles, 
San  Francisco,  Pittsburgh,  Cleveland,  Boston,  and  many 
other  cities  furnish  interesting  examples  of  this  form  of 
advertising. 

While  the  night  circulation  is  the  chief  aim  of  the 
spectacular-display  advertiser,  yet  electric  displays  are 
now  designed  so  that  they  will  also  have  day  value;  that 
is,  so  that  the  advertisement  will  deliver  its  message  effec 
tively  during  the  daylight  hours  when  it  is  not  illuminated. 
This  greatly  increases  the  circulation  of  the  display. 

The  electric  spectacular  does  not  take  the  place  of 
posters,  painted  bulletins,  and  other  forms  of  outdoor 
advertising.  It  supplements  them — vitalizes  them,  gives 
them  dominance,  adds  materially  to  the  productiveness 
of  the  outdoor  advertising  dollar.  The  electric  spectacular 
is  the  "four-color-center  spread"  of  the  outdoor  medium. 
It  is  big,  dominant,  dramatic,  affording  an  opportunity 
for  the  expression  of  individuality  that  can  be  found  in 
no  other  form  of  advertising.  And  it  is  exclusive. 

Usually  a  spectacular  display  functions  as  the  climax 
of  an  extensive  advertising  campaign  in  other  mediums. 
It  gives  new  life  to  all  other  advertising  of  the  product  and 
lends  the  final  touch  of  emphasis  and  dominance. 

Although  the  effects  produced  would  seem  to  have 
reached  the  -height  of  ingenuity  and  brilliancy,  yet  the 
future  will  undoubtedly  see  even  more  beautiful  and  inter 
esting  designs  in  this  form  of  advertising,  which  represents 
a  rare  combination  of  creative  imagination  and  practical 
engineering  ability  of  a  high  order. 

A  semi-spectacular  is  a  combination  of  electric  display 
with  an  illuminated  bulletin,  usually  on  the  roof  of  a  build 
ing,  and  designed  to  reach  day  and  night  circulation. 

85.  Description  of  Displays. — Ordinarily,  electric 
displays  are  built  on  staunch  skeleton  steel  frames  on  roofs, 
but  a  few  are  on  the  fagades  of  buildings.  The  lettering 


68     OUTDOOR   AND   STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING 


OUTDOOE     AND     STREET-CAR    ADVERTISING      69 

consists  of  sheet-steel  cut-out  letters,  studded  with 
incandescent  globes  and  lighted  by  flashers,  which  are 
mechanical,  clocklike  inventions  driven  by  motors  that 
automatically  turn  the  current  on  and  off.  Most  spec 
tacular  electric  displays  have  a  variety  of  colors  in 
the  globes,  and  depend  on  motion  and  action  for  their 
eye  appeal.  A  word  or  two  appears,  then  the  lights  sud 
denly  are  shut  off,  then  other  words  appear. 

Pictorial  effects  are  growing  more  intricate,  more 
real,  and  more  attractive  every  year.  We  see  borders  of 
flowers  and  fruits  in  delightful  colors,  fountains  playing, 
wheels  turning,  automobiles  rushing  by,  and  a  number  of 
other  equally  wonderful  effects.  It  has  been  demonstrated 
conclusively  that  moving  devices  will  attract  more  public 
attention  than  those  that  do  not  move.  Consequently, 
outside  the  field  of  spectacular  electric  work,  electricity 
serves  to  produce  motion  in  barber  signs,  in  store-front 
signs,  in  window  displays,  etc. 

In  Fig.  16  several  examples  of  various  electric  spec 
taculars  are  given.  These  spectaculars  may  be  seen  in 
almost  every  large  city  in  the  country.  A  simple  spec 
tacular  electric  display,  but  one  nevertheless  of  great 
beauty,  is  shown  in  black  and  white  in  Fig.  17. 

86.  How  Displays  Are  Sold. — The  consideration  and 
application  of  spectacular  electrical  displays  is  a  process 
requiring  a  technical  knowledge  of  location  values,  of  heavy 
steel  construction,  of  lighting,  wiring,  arrangement  of 
flashes,  arrangement  of  motographs,  etc.  The  displays 
are  planned  in  all  details,  blueprints  are  made  of  the  con 
struction,  the  location  and  number  of  the  globes  are  indi 
cated,  the  candlepower  is  outlined,  and  a  complete  drawing 
in  color  is  submitted  to  the  advertiser  on  a  specially 
prepared  black  cardboard  to  represent  the  dark  back 
ground  of  the  evening  sky.  Very  often  the  advertising 
agency  originates  an  idea  before  soliciting  an  advertiser, 


70     OUTDOOR  AND   STREET-CAR  ADVERTISING 

and  secures  the  contract  upon  the  cleverness  of  the  idea 
presented.  This  contract,  covering  a  certain  period  of 
years,  means  that  the  advertiser  has  an  unobstructed  dis 
play  of  great  magnitude,  something  the  public  will  talk 
about;  something  distinctive,  big,  and  rememberable,  the 
news  value  of  which  will  give  publicity  in  daily  papers 
worth  a  great  many  dollars  in  space  value. 

87.  Cost  of  Displays. — As  is  the  case  with  all  indi 
vidual  outdoor  displays,  the  price  depends  on  the  circula 
tion  value  of  the  location  and  the  character  and  size  of  the 
display.  The  cost  of  the  country's  choicest  locations 
will  not  average  more  than  20  cents  per  thousand  of  circu 
lation  per  day.  This  represents  the  total  cost  to  the 
advertiser,  such  as  rental,  construction,  and  maintenance 
of  frames,  and  the  manufacture,  fabrication,  placing,  main 
tenance,  and  nightly  inspection  of  the  spectacular  copy. 
The  displays  are  usually  sold  on  contracts  running  for  a 
number  of  years. 

Generally,  the  basic  prices  of  electric  displays  are 
subject  to  increase  when  the  design  is  complicated  or  the 
number  of  flashes  desired  in  the  action  is  very  large. 
The  increase  is  figured  at  cost  to  cover  the  additional 
necessary  expense. 

All  displays  are  lighted  from  sunset  until  midnight  at 
least.  In  many  large  cities  the  big  electrics  are  turned  off 
between  1  A.M.  and  1:30  A.M.  A  nightly  patrol  service 
is  maintained  to  insure  the  proper  illumination.  All 
spectacular  displays  must  be  erected  under  the  supervision 
of  qualified  engineers  and  must  be  regularly  inspected  to 
insure  their  safe  and  proper  maintenance. 


OUTDOOR  AND   STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING    71 


STREET-CAR  ADVERTISING 

88.  Scope  of  Car  Advertising. — Street-car  advertising 
is  regarded  usually  as  a  sort  of  specialized  form  of  outdoor 
advertising,  although  members  of  the  regular  outdoor 
advertising  trade  are  not  inclined  to  consider  it  as  having 
any  relation  to  their  industry.  While  the  street  car  has 
been  displaced  in  a  good  many  places  by  the  auto  bus,  yet 
it  is  far  from  being  in  the  discard,  especially  in  the  larger 
cities.  Contrary  to  general  belief,  more  passengers  in 
many  cities  are  being  carried  than  ever  before.  Trolley 
cars  have  been  greatly  improved  for  speed,  quietness,  and 
convenience.  They  are  coming  back  into  public  favor. 

By  far  the  greater  number  of  cars  in  operation  are 
electric  surface  cars,  the  remainder  being  elevated  and 
subway  cars,  suburban  railway  lines,  and  bus  lines  of  all 
kinds,  whether  suburban,  interurban  or  so-called  trans 
continental.  So  far  as  advertising  is  concerned,  they 
may  all  be  comprehended  in  the  general  term,  street  car. 
Many  long-distance  buses  do  not  carry  advertising, 
except  occasionally  at  the  ends  of  the  bus,  because  the 
space  above  the  seats  is  used  for  the  storage  of  baggage. 

89.  Use  of  Street  Cars. — The  number  of  people  who 
ride  in  street  cars  varies  considerably  in  different  com 
munities.  In  cities  like  New  York,  Chicago,  and  Phila 
delphia,  almost  everyone  rides,  whether  it  be  by  subway, 
elevated,  or  surface  cars  or  the  various  buses  that  have  in 
recent  years  taken  the  place  of  the  regular  street  car  on 
many  routes.  Owing  to  the  fact  that  a  large  number  of 
people  in  a  given  community  ride  on  an  average  of  two  or 
three  times  a  day,  it  is  difficult  to  get  figures  that  are 
accurate.  The  generally  accepted  average  for  passenger 
vehicles  of  all  cities  and  towns  is  500  passengers  per  car 
per  day.  It  is  estimated  that  in  the  United  States  alone 
there  are  over  70,000  cars  displaying  advertising  cards,  dis- 


72     OUTDOOR   AND   STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING 

tributed  over  3,800  cities  and  towns  located  in  every  state 
in  the  Union. 

Through  the  cars,  one  may  reach  potentially  more 
than  20,000,000  riders,  twice  a  day,  every  day  in  the 
week,  at  a  cost  of  $12,000  per  week,  or  less  than  8/1000 
cents  per  person  per  day. 

90.  Good  Points  of  Car  Advertising. — The  street  car 
offers  the  advertiser  a  day-and-night  color  display  from 
one  end  of  the  line  to  the  other.  He  can  reach  the  general 
public  quickly  and  easily.  The  cards  make  their  appeal 
when  the  passenger  is  in  a  comparatively  receptive  mood, 
since  he  is  generally  at  leisure.  Shoppers  on  their  way 
down  town  or  coming  in  from  outlying  territory  may 
easily  be  reached  by  the  local  advertiser  through  the  street 
car  medium. 

Since  cars  are  usually  of  standard  size,  none  has  any 
advantage  over  another  so  far  as  size  is  concerned.  The 
advantage  of  colors  on  the  card  is  a  very  great  one — 
products  may  be  pictured  in  an  interesting  way.  The 
advertiser  can  show  his  product  in  its  actual  shape  and 
colors — often  an  effectual  prevention  of  substitution. 
Since  the  space  occupied  by  the  card  is  limited,  its  message, 
like  that  of  the  outdoor  poster,  contains,  or  should  con 
tain,  a  brief,  effectively  displayed  selling  point. 

The  car  card,  like  the  poster,  may  be  used  either 
locally  or  nationally  on  a  particular  route,  at  any 
season,  and  is  moreover  quite  flexible  in  its  application 
in  that  it  may  be  timely,  and  may  call  attention  to  other 
advertising,  to  window  displays  or  to  any  feature  that 
the  advertiser  wishes  to  emphasize.  Macy's,  the  great 
New  York  City  department  store,  utilizes  car  cards  in 
several  different  ways.  The  two  most  important  of  these 
are  first,  to  announce  important  events,  as  special  offerings 
in  their  various  departments;  second,  to  build  prestige  for 
the  store  by  placing  unusually  colorful  and  attractive 


OUTDOOR   AND   STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING    73 

cards  before  the  car  riders,  stressing  "style  authority,  good 
taste,  and  economy"  as  features  of  their  store. 

91.  What  May  be  Advertised. — It  is  well  to  bear  in 
mind  that  the  car  card  is  in  reality  a  miniature  outdoor 
poster  and  that  substantially  the  same  suggestions  regard 
ing  amount  and  style  of  copy  apply  in  both  cases.     The 
local  financial  institution,  bakeries,  laundries,  food  makers, 
manufacturers   of   soaps,   tobaccos,   household   supplies, 
dealers  in  real  estate,  clothing  and  furnishings,  haber 
dashery,  used  cars,  and  many  other  things  that  come 
close  to  every-day  living  may  very  profitably  be  advertised 
by  means  of  the  car  card,  and  many  really  successful 
campaigns  have  been  conducted  in  this  way.     Just  as 
the  card  is  a  sort  of  outdoor  poster,  so  it  may  also  be  con 
sidered  a  miniature  show  window,  since  retail  stores  have 
had  much  success  through  this  medium.     Particularly 
is  this  the  case  with  department  and  dry  goods  stores. 

92.  Drawbacks  to  Use  of  Cards. — The  principal  draw 
backs  to  car  cards  are  the  restricted  amount  of  space,  the 
difficulty,  usually,  of  changing  copy  quickly,  and  the  fact 
that  very  little  copy  can  be  displayed  to  advantage. 
Cards  are  generally  best  used  as  an  accessory  to  other 
forms  of  advertising,  whether  newspaper,  magazine  or 
radio.     Seasonable  articles  can  usually  be  advertised  for 
a  sufficient  period  to  get  the  message  before  the  public. 
Cards  for  this  purpose  are  usually  placed  over  the  adver 
tiser's  regular  cards,  so  that  they  may  be  easily  removed 
as  soon  as  the  event  has  passed  with  which  the  advertise 
ment  has  been  associated. 

SIZES  AND  POSITIONS  OF  CAR  CARDS 

93.  Standard  Sizes. — The  standard  size  card  is  11  in. 
X21  in.     It  will  fit  all  trolley  cars  and  buses,  so  that  one 
who  advertises  nationally  can  use  one  set  of  designs. 
The  average  street  car  has  thirty-two  spaces  for  cards. 


74     OUTDOOR   AND    STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING 


fcS-8  #£ 

J=         «0     "      ^ 

yaio  gz 


/^ 


OUTDOOR   AND   STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING     75 

In  the  larger  cities  some  of  the  big  electric  cars  hold 
thirty-six  cards.  Most  elevated,  subway,  interurban, 
and  suburban  cars  have  from  four  to  six  end  spaces  in 
addition  to  space  in  the  racks,  which  make  a  total  of  from 
forty  to  fifty  spaces.  The  cards  in  elevated  trains  and 
some  suburban  coaches  are  16  in.X24  in.  Spaces  over 
the  doors  at  the  ends  of  these  cars  are  16  in.X48  in. 
Frames  of  various  sizes  are  also  installed  on  both  sides  of 
the  doors  of  some  center-door  coaches. 


FIG.  19 

94.     Positions  of  Cards. — Except  for  the  end  and  odd 

spaces  in  the  elevated  and  suburban  coaches,  there  is  no 
preferred  space  in  a  car.  Almost  all  cars,  particularly 
those  of  late  construction,  have  both  side  and  cross  seats. 
The  average  person  has  no  choice  with  regard  to  his  seat, 
especially  after  the  car  is  partly  filled,  so  he  occupies  a 
different  position  in  regard  to  the  car  cards  every  time  he 
rides.  The  avertiser  who  has  his  card  in  the  center  of  a 
car  will  miss  many  readers  who  are  seated  directly  under 
or  ahead  of  his  card,  whereas  the  card  that  appears  at  the 
very  end  of  the  rack  often  gets  added  attention  from 
those  passengers  who  get  up  just  before  their  destination 
is  reached  and  stand  just  inside  the  door.  No  particular 


76 


Best  for  luice.. salads.. and  desserts 


CASICR  TO 

SCGMCNT 


Red  Ba !  1 1SF  Oranges 


SLIPON  A  PAIR 


FOR  COMFORT 


BB  536B    3358 


GLOVES 


MOST  BAD  BREATH 
BEGINS  WITH  TEETH 
— //nproper/y  c/ecrnecf' 

*F  ^ 

Dentists  say 

COLGATE 

DENTAL  CREA! 


SWEETER  BREATH 

CLEANER  WHITER 

TEETH 


\ 


BB  5361?     3358 


FIG.  23 


p 


DEL  MONTE 

ineaDDle 


Always 
one  quality  -  ~ 

the  highest 
*  -  when  you  buy 
this  brand  ' 


Sliced  &  Crushe 


BB  53615     3358 


FIG.  24 


OUTDOOR  AND   STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING    77 

position  is  sold,  except  under  certain  special  conditions. 
The  advertiser  is  supposed  to  take  whatever  position  is 
assigned  him  by  the  man  who  places  the  cards  in  the 
street  cars.  An  effort,  however,  is  made  to  alternate 
light  and  dark  cards  so  as  to  give  variety. 

In  Figs.  18,  19,  20,  21,  and  22  are  shown  excellent 
examples  of  present-day  street-car  cards  of  the  standard 
or  regulation  size. 

Two  cards  that  were  used  at  the  ends  of  the  car  are 
shown  in  Figs.  23  and  24.  The  space  occupied  by  cards 
of  this  nature  will  vary  in  dimensions  according  to  con 
ditions  or  make  of  car.  The  cards  shown  are,  in  the  ori 
ginal,  21  in.X21J  in.,  or  practically  square,  and  were 
designed  especially  to  fit  the  space  for  which  they  were 
intended. 

An  extreme  size  of  card,  intended  to  be  displayed  over 
the  inside  entrances  to  cars  and  thus  be  conspicuous  from 
any  position  in  the  car,  is  shown  in  Figs.  25  and  26.  The 
only  size  of  card  that  can  be  depended  on  to  remain  con 
stant  is  the  regulation  size  shown  in  Figs.  18  to  22. 

All  of  these  cards,  it  will  be  noted,  have  the  utmost 
visibility  and  appeal  to  the  primal  instincts  of  the  general 
public. 

COST  OF  CAR  ADVERTISING 

95.  Basis  of  Charge. — The  unit  basis  of  cost  of  car 
advertising  space  is  so  much  per  thousand  passengers 
carried.  The  costs  in  the  car  field  vary  considerably, 
depending  on  the  number  of  cars  the  advertiser  may  use, 
the  number  of  passengers  carried,  and  so  on.  Rates  for 
cards  vary  from  city  to  city,  and  in  the  larger  cities  from 
route  to  route.  Taking  the  United  States,  as  a  whole, 
prices  range  from  30  cents  to  $2.00  per  card  per  car  per 
month.  Of  course  these  costs  are  only  averages  and  are 
subject  to  change. 

S36B— 6 


78 


OUTDOOR   AND   STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING     79 

96.  Contracts  for  Less  Than  Full  Run. — An  advertiser 
may  buy  one-half  or  even  one-fourth  of  the  cars  in  most 
cities.     Wherever  less  than  all  the  cars  are  bought,  whether 
of  the  whole  city  or  of  a  division,  a  premium  is  charged. 
Some  companies  make  contracts  for  as  short  a  time  as  one 
week,  twice  a  week,  or  even  daily,  but  these  cases  are 
rare.     The  larger  companies  make  no  shorter  contracts 
than  3  months,     and  these  only  on  special  conditions. 
The  rate  on  short-time  contracts  is  proportionately  higher. 

97.  How  Car  Advertising  Is  Sold. — Car  advertising  is 
sold  by  companies  organized   and  operated  to  handle 
this  medium.     It  is  not  sold  through  advertising  agencies. 
The  business  is  highly  systematized  and  is  controlled  by  a 
comparatively  few  companies  who  maintain  close  relations 
with  the  Street  Railways  Advertising  Company,  New  York, 
who  control  street-car  advertising  in  the  United  States, 
Canada;  and  Cuba,  and  are  said  to  be  the  largest  adver 
tising  organization  in  the  world. 

The  advertising  is  sold  by  full  showings,  half  showings, 
or  quarter  showings,  much  as  poster  advertising  is  sold. 
A  full  showing  means  a  card  in  every  car ;  a  half  showing, 
in  every  other  car,  and  so  on.  Some  advertisers  use  one 
series  of  cards  several  years,  installing  the  same  cards  during 
certain  months  each  year.  Other  advertisers  print  their 
cards  on  both  sides,  thus  saving  on  stock  and  printing. 

98.  Cost   of   Cards. — The    advertiser   pays   for   his 
cards  in  addition  to  his  space.     These  cards  are  furnished 
for  the  most  part  by  the  advertising  company  operating 
the  cars,  most  of  which  companies  maintain  idea,  copy,  and 
art  departments  for  this  line  of  work.     The  companies 
furnish  complete  car  advertising  campaigns  for  almost 
all  branches  of  local  business  and  the  cards  are  made  up  in 
advance  except  for  the  advertiser's  name.     There  is  a 
series  for  department  stores,  banks,  grocers,  haberdashers, 
tailors,  laundries,  ice  and  coal  dealers,  and  many  others. 


80     OUTDOOR   AND   STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING 

New  series  are  put  out  each  year,  so  that  a  5-year  adver 
tiser  can  always  get  new  cards.  Syndicate  stock  cards 
often  present  the  advertiser's  message  more  effectively 
than  would  his  own  cards,  and  cost  little  more  than  the 
charge  for  imprinting. 

Many  advertisers,  however,  prefer  to  prepare  their  own 
cards  or  else  have  them  made  by  outside  agents.  In  such 
cases  the  cost  of  production  depends  on  the  charge  for  the 
design,  the  number  of  colors  employed,  and  their  reproduc 
tion  by  lithography  or  ordinary  printing.  The  work 
should,  of  course,  be  done  by  a  concern  that  specializes 
in  the  designing  and  printing  of  car  cards  rather  than  by 
the  ordinary  commercial  printer. 

In  the  largest  cities  the  car-card  companies  offer  a 
merchandising  service  to  car  advertisers.  When  an 
advertiser  is  ready  to  introduce  his  goods,  the  representa 
tives  help  him  secure  local  distribution  in  the  various 
stores,  in  a  manner  similar  to  that  in  which  the  merchandis 
ing  departments  of  newspapers  function. 

PLANNING  THE  STREET-CAR  CAMPAIGN 

99.  Analysis  of  Conditions. — Most  successful  street 
car   campaigns  are  planned  far  ahead.     One   car   card 
never  made  an  advertiser.     It  takes  several  cards  changed 
frequently  to  move  the  public  mind,  especially  if  car  adver 
tising  is  the  only  medium  used.     The  advertiser  must 
have  an  object  in  mind,  a  definite  plan,  if  his  cards  are  to 
produce  results.     This  object  is  usually  to  sell  certain 
goods,  although  frequently  the  advertising  is  used  merely 
to  announce  something  of  interest,  for  an  educational 
purpose,  or  to  promote  better  ways  of  living.     It  is  impor 
tant  that  the  message  which  the  card  is  to  deliver  be  told 
in  the  most  attractive  manner. 

100.  Bearing  in  mind  the  fact  that  the  advertisement 
first  must  be  seen;  second,  read;  third,  understood;  and 


OUTDOOR   AND   STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING    81 

last,  believed,  the  card  maker  has  the  following  tools  at  his 
command  with  which  to  convey  his  message  to  his  readers : 
type,  illustrations,  colors,  and  good,  printing.  Not  all 
of  these  are  necessary  to  any  one  card.  Much  depends 
on  the  object  and  the  article  to  be  advertised.  National 
advertisers  almost  invariably  use  color  and  illustration, 
with  but  very  little  type  matter.  Their  object  is  usually 
to  introduce  or  to  keep  a  certain  package  before  the  public 
in  the  most  attractive  manner  possible,  thereby  insuring 
a  consumer  demand  that  forces  the  dealer  to  handle  their 
goods  and  prevents  substitutions. 

101.  The  local  advertiser  dealing  with  consumers 
only,  and  who  in  most  cases  is  already  well  known  to  his 
readers,  has  to  impress  upon  them  that  he  has  a  better 
store,  more  attractive  prices,  and  gives  better  service 
than  his  competitors.  If  he  is  the  only  merchant  of  his 
kind  in  a  town,  he  can  create  an  increased  demand  for 
his  goods.  All  this  can  hardly  be  expressed  except  in  con 
siderable  type  matter.  While  more  condensed  and  not 
nearly  so  descriptive  as  newspaper  copy,  the  local  car 
advertising  should  be  very  direct  and  just  as  personal  as 
newspaper  advertising. 

The  method  of  finding  the  interpreting  theme  is  as  fol 
lows:  The  prospective  advertiser's  product  is  studied 
carefully,  the  market  analyzed,  and  the  consumer  response 
evaluated.  The  purpose  is  to  discover  that  combination 
of  words  and  ideas  which  will  click  most  easily  in  the 
reader's  mind.  If  a  striking  picture  or  a  simple  phrase 
causes  him  to  think  beyond  what  he  sees  and  reads,  then 
the  car  card  has  done  its  work.  Herein  lies  the  lure  of  the 
motion  picture,  especially  the  silent  drama.  It  encourages 
the  observer  to  enlarge  mentally,  upon  what  is  presented 
on  the  screen.  He  himself  supplies  much  of  the  so-called 
"continuity"  between  separate  scenes.  In  like  manner, 
the  ideal  car  card  will  give  the  observer  just  enough  to  start 
his  mind  working  and  carry  him  beyond  the  picture.  Car 


82     OUTDOOR   AND   STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING 

cards,  particularly  those  in  color,  are  memory-jogging  and 
mind  arresting.  If  the  picture  and  wording  bring  such 
results,  then  it  can  be  said  that  the  interpreting  theme  has 
been  found. 

An  excellent  example  of  just  such  a  reaction  is  shown  in 
the  card  illustrated  in  Fig.  21. 

PREPARATION  OF  CARDS 

102.  Styles  and  Sizes  of  Type. — The  choice  of  type 
can  make  or  ruin  a  card.     The  advertisement  writer  must 
bear  in  mind  that  a  card  will  stand  only  so  much  type  if  it 
is  to  be  read,  and  must  prepare  his  copy  accordingly. 
Experience  has  shown  that  certain  styles  of  type  are  more 
readable,  especially  at  an  angle,  than  others.     Car  cards 
are  often  read  hurriedly  and  always  at  a  distance  of  some 
feet,  so  that  there  is  also  a  limit  to  the  size  of  the  type  that 
may  be  used. 

To  make  the  card  easy  to  read,  the  same  style  of  type 
should  be  used  throughout,  if  possible,  and  not  in  too  many 
different  sizes.  Lower-case  letters  are  easier  to  read  than 
upper-case,  and  the  body  matter  of  a  card  should  always 
be  set  in  lower  case.  Many  advertisers  now  use  lower 
case  not  only  for  introductory  lines  but  even  for  the  title 
and  the  firm  name. 

Proofs  for  street-car  cards  should  never  be  judged  at 
a  range  of  a  foot  or  two,  but  should  be  placed  across  the 
room  and  viewed  from  a  distance  of  6  to  10  feet. 

103.  The  average  11"X21"  card  allows  for  one  head 
ing  line,  three  or  four  body  lines,  the  firm  name,  and  an 
address  line,  and  one  small  line  at  the  bottom  of  the  card. 
A  card  should  seldom  contain  more  than  fifty  words,  and  if 
illustrations  are  used  the  number  of  words  should  be  less. 

There  is  a  reason  for  limiting  the  number  of  words  on 
a  card.  To  reach  all  the  passengers  in  a  car,  an  advertise 
ment  must  be  printed  in  type  large  enough  to  be  read 


OUTDOOR  AND   STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING    83 

easily,  not  only  by  those  directly  opposite  the  card,  but 
also  those  at  an  angle.  This  calls  for  extended  type  of 
fairly  good  size — 48-point  is  about  the  smallest  type  read 
able  at  the  usual  distance.  As  small  as  36-point  is  some 
times  used  in  the  hope  that  enough  interest  will  have  been 
aroused  by  the  main  points  of  the  card  to  cause  the  reader 
to  examine  the  card  very  closely  and  by  so  doing  read  the 
smaller  lines.  As  large  as  144-point  is  sometimes  used 
for  title  lines.  The  average  card  runs  as  follows :  72-point 
for  the  introductory  line,  48-point  to  60-point  for  the  body 
line,  84-  to  96-point  for  the  title,  and  60-point  to  72-point 
for  the  address. 

104.  If  a  space  of  1J  inches  is  allowed  at  each  end  of 
an  II"  X21"  card,  the  length  of  each  line  of  type  is  limited 
to  18  inches.  If  an  illustration  is  used,  there  is  even  less 
space.  When  only  type  is  used,  care  must  be  taken  to 
allow  plenty  of  white  space  in  order  not  to  tire  the  reader. 
A  full  line  of  144-point  (about  18  inches)  allows  for  not 
more  than  one  word  of  ten  letters ;  a  line  of  96-point,  not 
more  than  three  words  of  six  letters  each;  84-point,  about 
four  words  of  the  same  length;  72-point,  five  words,  60- 
point,  six  words;  and  48-point,  as  many  as  eight  words. 

105.  Laying  Out  the  Card. — The  car  cards  shown  in 
these  pages  have  been  reduced  from  cards  that  were  used 
in  actual  campaigns,  and  while  they  are  of  satisfactory 
size  as  subjects  for  study,  they  are  a  little  smaller  than  it 
is  practical  to  make  a  layout  for  reproduction.  A  layout 
one-third  the  actual  size  of  the  card,  or  7  inches  by  3f 
inches  for  the  standard-size  card,  is  large  enough  to  give  a 
good  idea  of  the  general  appearance  when  set  up. 

A  layout  for  a  card  in  plain  black  and  white,  to  be  used 
by  a  drug  store  is  shown  in  Fig.  27.  While  it  is  neither 
necessary  nor  desirable  to  indicate  exactly  either  the  size 
or  the  style  of  types  to  be  used,  it  is  advisable  to  give  the 
printer  or  artist  some  idea  of  the  relative  values  of  the 


84     OUTDOOR   AND    STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING 


~_ <^«&«£  <&«££ 


Lesteryaryer 


FINNIEY'S- 


CANTOflS  ORIGI/W  CUT  RATE  DWG  STORE- 
"-415  MARKET  AVE-.,NORTH- / 


FIG.  27 

display  desired,  so  that  he  may  have  a  pretty  clear  idea 
of  what  is  wanted.  Fig.  28  shows  a  reproduction  of  the 
set-up  card. 

In  certain  instances,  local  concerns  which  are  non-com 
petitive,  like  banks,  will  put  on  a  cooperative  advertising 
campaign,  with  gratifying  results.  A  layout  for  one  card 
of  a  series  is  shown  in  Fig.  29,  and  the  completed  job  in 
Fig.  30. 

Not  many  independent  ad-writers  are  called  on  to 
design  cards  in  detail;  the  advertiser  has  his  choice  of 


Say,  Yarger: 

Don't  forget  about  the  men  in  this  car. 
If  they  don't  know  by  this  time  that  we 
carry  the  best  line  of  shaving  creams,  Jolm  Svler 
razor  blades  and  lotions — tell  them  to 
come  in  and  get  acquainted/* 

Syler 


Lester  Yarger 


FINNEYS 

CANTON'S  ORIGINAL  CUT  RATE  DRUG  STORE 
—  415   MARKET  AVE..  NORTH — 


FlG.  28 


OUTDOOR   AND    STREET-CAR    ADVERTISING     85 


A  Valuable  Banking  Hint: 


Overdrawing  ou 
bank  account  - 

your  credit  and 
j  your pood '/na/n?^ 


Few  things  can  Jwm  your 
repufation  more  than,  having 
jour  checks  returned  marked 
^'Insufficient  Funds" 


FIG.  29 

using  the  stock  card  or  submitting  his  ideas  to  be  worked 
up  for  an  original  series  by  the  car  advertising  company, 
with  suggestions  as  to  colors  and  illustrations.  In  such 
cases  the  plan  of  making  a  rough  layout  gives  the  clearest 
idea  of  what  is  desired. 

106.  Purpose  of  Illustrations. — Car  cards  should  be 
illustrated  if  possible. 

An  illustration  will  add  from  25  per  cent  to  50  per  cent 
to  the  strength  of  a  card.  Pen-and-ink  drawings  repro- 


A  Valuable  Banking  Hint: 


Overdrawing  your 
bank  account 

impairs  your  credit  and 
tarnishes  your  good  name 


IT  Few  things  can  harm,  your 
||  reputation  more  than  having 
I  your  checks  returned  marked 

I  "Insufficient  Funds" 


FIG.  30 


86     OUTDOOR   AND    STREET-CAR    ADVERTISING 

duced  in  zinc,  halftones  reproduced  in  copper  and  zinc, 
water  colors  reproduced  in  zinc  or  process,  and  different 
styles  of  lithography  easily  lend  themselves  to  car  cards. 

107.  Use    of    Color. — The   national    advertiser    and 
many  local  advertisers  find  a  strong  ally  in  color  printing 
and    lithography.     Color    is    a    great    attention-getter. 
Where  considerable  type  matter  is  necessary  and  no  illus 
trations  are  used,  colored  tint  blocks,  borders,  and  bands 
add  to  the  effectiveness  of  the  card.     When  the  advertiser 
can   afford   it,    illustrations    are   usually   more   pleasing 
reproduced  in  color  than  in  black  and  white. 

It  is  often  advisable  to  show  the  exact  appearance  of 
a  package,  and  to  do  this  requires  the  use  of  color.  A  card 
lavish  in  color  needs  little  type  matter. 

108.  The  one  danger  in  using  colors  is  that  of  giving 
an  impression  of  permanency  instead  of  action.     Many 
advertisers,  especially  retail  merchants,  believe  that  too 
much  color  weakens  the  effect  of  an  announcement  designed 
for  quick  action.     Some  readers  know  that  it  takes  longer 
to  prepare  a  card  in  several  colors,  especially  if  it  contains 
pictures,  and  the  impression  gained  from  such  a  card  is 
generally  one  of  permanency.     For  that  reason  sale  cards 
and  announcements  are  printed  in  one  or  not  more  than 
three    colors,    using   type   only,    or   type    and   pen-and- 
ink   illustrations.     Most   national   advertisers,    however, 
really  wish  to  give  an  impression  of  permanency,  and  they 
may  use  colors  as  freely  as  conditions  seem  to  require. 

Color  in  car  advertising  is  something  that  must  be  used 
with  judgment.  When  a  card  is  put  through  seven  or  eight 
lithographic  printings,  the  results  are  apt  to  be  disappoint 
ing.  A  few  well-chosen  colors  will  give  the  best  results. 
Possibly  the  best  color  combinations  come  from  placing 
yellow  or  orange  against  black  or  deep  blue,  or  black  against 
orange  or  a  clear  yellow.  On  car  cards  it  is  possible  to 
use  the  dark  background  because  the  card  is  generally 


OUTDOOR    AND    STREET-CAR    ADVERTISING     87 

exposed  longer  to  view  than  is  the  case  with  other  outdoor 
media.  This  dark  background,  too,  often  presents  a 
marked  contrast  between  itself  and  adjacent  cards. 

Certain  colors,  such  as  yellow  and  blue,  are  more  easily 
remembered  by  readers  than  other  colors.  Gray  makes  a 
poor  solid  background  for  type,  but  it  is  a  pleasing  color 
in  a  border.  Red  makes  a  good  color  for  heavy  lines,  black 
is  best  for  small  lines. 

109.  Printing. — Car   cards  require   careful  printing 
Because  for  the  most  part  they  are  all  of  one  size  and  in. 
equal  position,  advertisers  vie  with  one  another  to  get  the 
best  results  with  their  space. 

The  stock  used  is  usually  six-ply,  enameled-surface 
cardboard,  which  permits  the  use  of  halftones,  wood-cuts, 
line  engravings,  and  lithography.  Only  high-grade  stock 
should  be  employed,  as  the  cheaper  grades  will  not  take 
colors  well  or  stand  up  under  the  handling  they  will  receive. 
If  but  one  side  of  the  card  is  to  be  used,  stock  coated  on 
one  side  only  is  sufficient. 

One  color  only  is  seldom  used  in  printing  car  cards. 
Two  colors  bring  out  the  important  lines  of  copy  by  con 
trast  and  allow  for  a  different-colored  border  or  for  a  two- 
color  illustration.  Three-  and  four-color  cards  are  very 
common  and  easily  executed  by  the  average  printer. 
Where  more  than  five  colors  are  used  for  any  considerable 
quantity  of  cards,  it  is  advisable  to  have  the  cards  litho 
graphed. 

A  good  card  printer  usually  has  all  the  prominent  type 
faces  in  stock,  as  well  as  an  assortment  of  borders,  bands, 
and  tint  blocks,  which  add  to  the  appearance  of  a  card  at  a 
very  little  increased  cost. 

110.  How  to  Avoid  Common  Mistakes. — One  thought 
makes  a  stronger  impression  on  the  reader  than  several, 
and  is  easier  to  remember.     For  this  reason  it  is  advisable 
to  express  but  one  thought  in  one  card;  and  the  fewest 


88     OUTDOOR  AND   STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING 

words  that  will  carry  the  idea  plainly  and  strongly  should 
be  used.  In  preparing  copy  for  a  card,  it  is  well  to  write  out 
the  thought  to  be  expressed  in  as  short  form  as  is  natural. 
Then  go  over  it  carefully  and  strike  out  the  least  important 
words,  until  the  sense  would  be  changed  if  more  were  taken 
away.  Then  be  sure  that  the  remaining  words  are  the 
best  possible  choice  for  expressing  the  thought.  The 
words  used  should  be  words  in  ordinary  use,  short  and 
simple,  so  that  persons  with  a  limited  education  will  have 
no  trouble  in  understanding  them.  Remember  that  the 
aim  of  the  car  card  is  to  reach  all  classes  of  people. 

The  same  principle  applies  to  illustrations.  They 
should  first  be  simple,  then  beautiful.  A  complex  picture, 
even  if  it  catches  the  reader's  eye,  is  likely  to  be  forgotten 
quickly. 

It  is  well  not  to  make  a  card  too  attractive.  While 
attention  value  is  the  first  point  to  remember  in  designing 
a  card,  it  is  possible  for  a  beautiful  picture  or  too  clever  a 
slogan  to  claim  so  much  of  the  reader's  attention  that  he 
does  not  see  or  remember  what  the  card  is  intended  to  sell. 

If  the  subject  to  be  illustrated  by  the  card  is  too  large 
to  be  reproduced  in  natural  size,  it  is  better  to  use  only  a 
part  of  the  figure  and  show  it  large,  rather  than  show  the 
whole  figure  small. 

111.  The  mistake  of  too  much  sameness  in  the  cards 
may  be  avoided  by  changing  not  only  the  copy  each 
month  but  the  color  schemes,  borders,  type  arrangements, 
and  type  itself. 

Cards  on  tinted  stock  give  excellent  results  when  color 
is  used  for  the  type.  A  rich  brown  ink  on  an  india-tinted 
cardboard  is  quite  distinctive. 

The  eye  always  first  strikes  the  advertisement  about 
one-third  of  the  distance  from  the  bottom  and  reads  from 
left  to  right.  The  strongest  position  on  the  card  then  is 
at  the  left,  just  above  the  bottom  of  the  card. 


OUTDOOR   AND   STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING    89 

When  an  original  illustration  is  planned  for  a  card, 
it  costs  very  little  more  for  a  hand-lettered  title  and  intro  - 
ductory  line.  If  the  lettering  is  not  too  artistic  it  is  often 
stronger  than  plain  type. 

DETAILS  OF  THE  CAMPAIGN 

112.  Series  of  Advertisements. — The  street-car  cam 
paign  differs  from  other  campaigns  only  in  the  space 
limitations  of  each  advertisement.     Where  an  advertise 
ment  in  other  mediums  may  be  spread  before  the  reader, 
and  long  stories  may  be  given  with  much  detail,  as  in  the 
newspapers  and  magazines,  the   street-car    card   must, 
as  in  the  outdoor  poster,   present  its  message  in  one 
flash.     The  advertiser  who  uses  merely  a  card  or  two 
containing  his  name  or  the  name  of  his  product  and 
perhaps  a  slogan,  will  fail  to  get  the  results  he  desires. 
His  arguments  should  be  laid  out  in  a  connected  series 
of  advertisements,  just  as  he  would  use  them  in  a  news 
paper  or  magazine   campaign,  if  he  would  sustain  the 
interest  of  car  patrons.     In  other  words,  he  must  have  a 
purpose  and  a  pretty  well-defined  program. 

113.  Scattered   Advertising. — An   advertiser   should 
not  use  different  cards  advertising  different  products  at 
the  same  time  unless  as  much  space  is  used  for  each  product 
as  if  only  one  were  advertised.     It  has  been  demonstrated 
by  department  stores  that  better  results  are  obtained  by 
advertising  one  department  vigorously  at  one  time  than 
by  dividing  the  space  among  several  departments. 

1 14.  Prices. — Prices  should  be  given  on  a  card  when 
ever  possible.     As  a  rule,  5-  and  10-cent  articles  always 
show  price. 

115.  Checking    the    Results. — The    importance    of 
checking  the  results  of  car  advertising  is  not  less  than  in 
the   case   of   other  mediums.     Advertisements  in  some 
mediums  may  be  clipped  out  and  brought  to  a  merchant's 


90     OUTDOOR   AND    STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING 

store,  but  the  card  in  the  street  car  may  send  the  reader  to 
the  store  without  mention  of  the  advertisement;  therefore, 
special  checking  methods  are  necessary. 

The  only  sure  way  to  check  results  from  car  advertising 
is  occasionally  to  advertise  a  special  article  at  a  special  price 
in  the  cars  alone.  If  the  article  advertised  is  at  all  attrac 
tive  and  seasonable,  and  other  conditions  are  natural,  the 
actual  sales  on  that  article  should  be  a  fair  check  on  the 
advertising  medium,  if  sufficient  time  is  allowed  for  all  the 
readers  in  the  territory  covered  to  see  the  advertisement. 


OUTDOOR    AND    STREET-CAR    ADVERTISING     91 


Review  Questions 

NOTE. — These  Review  Questions  ure  given  merely  that  you  may  test  your 
self  on  your  general  knowledge  of  the  points  discussed  in  this  lesson.  If  there  is 
any  question  that  you  are  unable  to  answer,  this  indicates  that  you  have  missed 
the  point  involved  and  should  read  the  text  again.  You  can  readily  find  the 
answers  to  all  of  these  questions  in  the  text. 


(1)  Compare  the  effectiveness  and  scope  of  outdoor  advertising 
with  that  of  other  forms  of  advertising. 

(2)  How  many  organizations  are  there  in  the  outdoor  industry, 
and  in  what  way  do  these  organizations  cooperate? 

(3)  What  are  the  Standards  of  Practice  observed  by  the  Outdoor 
Association? 

(4)  How  many  different  types  of  traffic  must  be  considered  in 
estimating  the  value  of  location? 

(5)  (a)  What  is  the  standard  size  of  a  poster?     (6)  What  is  the 
size  of  the  poster  panel  in  which  the  poster  is  set? 

(6)  What  is  a  poster  showing,  and  when  is  it  advisable  to  purchase 
a  "full  showing?" 

(7)  How  many  different  positions  are  available  for  placing  out 
door  advertisements  to  make  them  seen  most   readily,    and 
which  position  do  you  think  most  valuable? 

(8)  How  is  outdoor  advertising  classified  with  regard  to  scope  and 
appeal,  and  how  many  different  forms  of  outdoor  advertising 
can  you  name? 

(9)  What  is  the  advantage  of  an  illuminated  painted  display 
over  a  plain  bulletin  display? 

(10)  (a)  Why  does  a  spectacular  electric  display  in  the  larger  cities 
have  a  national  influence?     (6)  Describe  the  neon  light. 

(11)  If  you  were  planning  to  use  an  outdoor  campaign,  what  steps 
would  you  take  to  secure  data  on  showings  and  on  costs? 

12)    Name  the  different  processes  used  in  reproducing  posters  and 
mention  the  different  kinds  of  posters  available. 

(13)  (a)  Describe  the  city  and  suburban  bulletin  and  name  the 
different  types.     (6)  What  advantage  have  these   bulletins 
over  the  average  poster? 

(14)  Name  the  principal  points  in  favor  of  street-car  advertising, 
and  give  the  standard  size  of  a  street-car  card. 


92     OUTDOOR   AND   STREET-CAR   ADVERTISING 

(15)  Name  a  class  of  business  that  you  believe  not  well  adapted 
to  street-car  advertising,  and  state  the  reason. 

(16)  How  is  car  advertising  sold,  and  how  are  contracts  made? 

(17)  What  is  the  value  of  illustration  and  color  in  car  cards? 

(18)  How  many  words  can  be  used  effectively  on  a  car  card  when 
not  illustrated,  and  how  would  you  test  the  legibility  of  a  card? 

(19)  What  is  the  importance  of  the  interpreting  theme  in  street-car 
advertising,  and  how  would  this  theme  be  found? 


RADIO    BROADCAST 
ADVERTISING 

Serial  3360A  (PART   1)  Edition  1 

DEVELOPMENT   OF  RADIO 
FOREWORD 

1.  The  person  who  contemplates  association  with 
radio  broadcasting — as  a  performer,  producer,  advertis 
ing  agent,  or  sponsor — assumes  an  obligation  to  the 
public.  It  is  inherent  in  his  daily  work,  and  the  principles 
which  guide  his  activities  are  similar  to  or  parallel  with 
the  principles  that  govern  the  members  of  the  medical 
profession,  who  for  more  than  2,000  years  have  subscribed 
to  the  "Hippocratic  oath,"  first  enunciated  about  300  B.C. 
in  Greece.  This  oath  is  in  part  as  follows : 

"The  regimen  I  adopt  shall  be  for  the  benefit  of  my 
patients  according  to  my  ability  and  judgment,  and  not 
for  their  hurt  or  for  any  wrong.  I  will  give  no  deadly 
drug,  though  it  be  asked  of  me,  nor  will  I  counsel  such 
.  .  .  Whatsoever  house  I  enter,  there  will  I  go  for  the 
benefit  of  the  sick,  refraining  from  all  wrong  doing  or 
corruption  ..." 

While  the  principles  which  guide  the  activities  of  those 
connected  with  radio  broadcasting  are  not  given  the 
formality  of  an  oath,  the  obligation  must  be  recognized. 
This  is  not  abstract  moralizing,  but  the  recognizing  of 
the  practical,  business  principle  on  which  the  business  of 
radio  must  rest. 

More  than  twenty  million  families  in  this  country  own 
radio  sets.  They  are  families  of  every  kind,  and  in  every 
conceivable  circumstance.  These  families  comprise  the 
direct  audience  of  the  radio  broadcaster,  the  immediate 


536B— J 


2      RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  1 

market  of  the  radio  advertiser.  Radio  programs  enter 
those  homes  at  the  invitation  of  the  listener,  bringing 
ideas  that  influence  opinion,  providing  entertainment, 
instruction,  news. 

Collectively  these  families  control  the  destiny  of  radio. 
It  is  within  their  power  to  change  it  from  a  private  enter 
prise  to  one  controlled  entirely  by  government,  as  in  other 
countries;  it  is  within  their  power  to  make  it  a  profitable 
medium  for  the  advertiser,  or  one  in  which  he  can  but 
lose  his  money.  And  the  thing  that  decides  these  families 
in  their  use  of  this  life-or-death  power  is  the  character  of 
the  programs  they  permit  to  enter  their  homes.  Let 
programs  become  dull,  let  their  advertising  message  be 
misleading  or  fraudulent,  let  their  influence  be  degrading  or 
stained  with  bias  and  propaganda,  let  any  general  or 
protracted  deviation  from  decency  and  good  taste  intrude 
on  radio  broadcasting  and  these  twenty  million  or  more 
families  will  be  forced  to  take  action. 

The  public  has  spent  millions  of  dollars  for  radio  sets; 
thousands  of  pay  envelopes  depend  on  radio;  perhaps  as 
much  as  half  a  billion  dollars  has  been  spent  on  radio's 
physical  plant,  and  on  the  programs  it  broadcasts.  All 
this  huge  investment  depends  on  the  character  and  good 
taste  of  the  individual  human  beings  in  the  radio  business. 
Entirely  aside  from  moral  or  humanitarian  considerations, 
plain  business  common  sense  requires  that  no  man  en 
danger  the  existence  of  radio  by  giving  way  to  the  admit 
tedly  powerful  and  numerous  temptations  to  indulge  in 
dishonorable  practices. 


RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  1      3 

PHYSICAL  STRUCTURE  OF  RADIO 

2.  The    Radio    Spectrum. — Electrical    energy    sent 
through  the  air  travels  in  a  series  of  waves  of  uniform  depth 
and  length.     Each  complete  wave  is  called  a  cycle.     The 
number  of  complete  cycles  of  the  electric  impulse  con 
tained  in  one  second  is  called  the  frequency. 

This  frequency  is  subject  to  control  through  a  wide 
range.  And  the  complete  range  of  frequencies  available 
for  broadcasting  use  is  called  the  radio  spectrum.  The 
lowest  frequency  is  10,000  cycles  per  second,  or,  as  it  is 
usually  expressed,  10  kilocycles.  The  high  frequencies 
that  are  considered  potentially  available  for  broadcasting, 
range  above  60,000  kilocycles  per  second . 

This  complete  band  of  radio  frequencies  is  divided 
among  the  various  classes  of  users  who  broadcast.  The 
lower  frequencies,  up  to  550  kilocycles,  were  in  use  for 
" wireless"  communication  long  before  there  was  any  com 
mercial  radio  broadcasting  as  we  know  it.  They  are 
reserved  for  the  use  of  the  government,  for  aviation,  and 
for  ships  and  the  shore  points  with  which  they  communi 
cate. 

3.  Frequency  Band  Available  for  Advertisers. — The 

only  band  in  the  radio  spectrum  at  present  available  for 
commercial  broadcasting  in  the  United  States  and  Canada 
covers  the  span  from  550  kilocycles  to  1,500  kilocycles. 
Above  that  point  lies  another  band  for  maritime  use,  then 
a  section  for  amateurs  and  above  it  a  section  for  experi 
mental  work  in  visual  broadcasting.  All  frequencies  not 
otherwise  designated  for  specific  or  experimental  uses  are 
reserved  for  future  allocation  by  the  government. 

Therefore,  the  section  of  the  radio  spectrum  with  which 
advertisers  are  concerned  is  that  lying  between  550  kilo 
cycles  and  1,500  kilocycles.  Here  is  a  range  of  950  kilo 
cycles  into  which  must  be  fitted  all  the  commercial  broad 
casting  of  the  United  States  and  Canada.  Theoretically, 


4      RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  1 

this  would  make  950  available  wave  lengths,  and,  since 
each  wave  is  independent  of  its  neighbor,  there  would  be 
950  broadcasting  channels  available  to  the  radio  stations 
that  do  commercial  broadcasting.  However,  in  practice 
it  has  been  found  that  no  commercial  radio  set  can  be 
made  so  selective  that  it  will  eliminate  all  but  a  single 
wave  length.  Attempts  to  work  within  such  narrow  limits 
have  demonstrated  so  great  an  interference  from  neighbor 
ing  wave  lengths  as  to  make  broadcasting  on  this  basis 
impossible.  It  has  been  found  that  interference  is  not 
eliminated  until  ten  wave  lengths  have  been  allowed  to  a 
single  broadcasting  channel.  Thus  the  available  channels 
are  reduced  to  ninety-six,  since  both  ends  of  the  com 
mercial  broadcast  band  are  included. 

Commercial  broadcasting  in  the  United  States  and 
Canada,  therefore  is  confined  to  the  use  of  ninety-six 
channels.  Six  of  these  have  been  assigned  entirely  to 
Canada.  This  reduces  the  number  used  in  the  United 
State  to  ninety,  and  eleven  of  these  ninety  are  shared  with 
Canada. 

ALLOCATION  OF  STATIONS,  FREQUENCIES 
AND  POWER 

4.  Federal  Communications  Commission. — Natu 
rally,  a  very  close  control  must  be  maintained  over  the 
allocation  of  the  right  to  use  these  radio  channels  which 
have  been  described.  In  1927,  this  control  was  vested  in 
the  Federal  Radio  Commission,  which  later  was  absorbed 
into  the  Federal  Communications  Commission  which 
today  regulates  broadcasting. 

At  the  time  the  Federal  Radio  Commission  was  formed 
there  were  more  than  700  broadcasting  stations  in  the 
United  States,  and  the  designation  of  frequencies  and 
power  followed  no  centralized  control  or  planned  pat 
tern.  Interference  between  stations  was  common,  result- 


RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  1      5 

ing  in  overlapping  of  programs  or  whistling  which  made 
satisfactory  reception  a  rare,  rather  than  a  customary, 
phenomenon. 

The  Federal  Radio  Commission  divided  the  country 
into  five  general  regions  as  follows : 


ZONE  1 

ZONE  2 

ZONE  3 

New  York 

Pennsylvania 

Texas 

Massachusetts 

Ohio 

North  Carolina 

New  Jersey 

Michigan 

Georgia 

Maryland 

Kentucky 

Alabama 

Connecticut 

Virginia 

Tennessee 

Porto  Rico 

West  Virginia 

Oklahoma 

Maine 

Louisiana 

Rhode  Island 

Mississippi 

District  of  Columbia 

Arkansas 

New  Hampshire 

South  Carolina 

Vermont 

Florida 

Delaware 

Virgin  Islands 

ZONE  4 

Illinois 

Missouri 

Indiana 

Wisconsin 

Minnesota 

Iowa 

Kansas 

Nebraska 

South  Dakota 

North  Dakota 


ZONE  5 

California 

Washington 

Colorado 

Oregon 

Montana 

Utah 

Idaho 

Arizona 

New  Mexico 

Hawaii 

Wyoming 

Nevada 

Alaska 


5.  Purpose  of  Commission. — The  Act  under  which  the 
Federal  Radio  Commission  was  formed  had  as  its  declared 
purpose,  "That  the  people  of  all  the  zones  are  entitled  to 
equality  of  radio  broadcasting  service  both  of  trans 
mission  and  reception." 


6      RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  1 

The  Federal  Radio  Commission  proceeded  to  act  along 
the  lines  that  the  law  prescribed.  These  methods  are  as 
follows : 

1.  The  licensing  authority  shall,  as  nearly  as  possible, 
make  and  maintain  an  equal  allocation  of  broadcasting 
licenses,  of  bands  of  frequency  or  wave  lengths,  of 
periods  of  time  for  operation,  and  of  station  power  to 
each  of  said  zones  when  and  in  so  far  as  there  are  appli 
cations  therefor;  and 

2.  Shall  make  a  fair  and  equitable  allocation  of  licenses, 
wave  lengths,  time  for  operation,  and  station  power  to 
each  of  the  States,  the  District  of  Columbia,  the  Terri 
tories,  and  possessions  of  the  United  States  within  each 
zone,  according  to  population. 


6.     Method  of  Allocation  of  Broadcasting  Licenses. 

The  story  of  the  manner  in  which  the  present  broadcasting 
structure  was  worked  out  and  the  allocations  were  made 
is  given  in  the  annual  report  of  the  Federal  Radio  Com 
mission  for  1928  as  follows : 

During  the  months  of  July  and  August,  1928,  the 
commission,  with  the  assistance  of  its  engineering  divi 
sion,  was  endeavoring  to  work  out  an  allocation  of 
broadcasting  stations  with  respect  to  frequency,  power, 
and  hours  of  operation.  The  best  engineering  advice 
in  the  country  was  sought  and  received.  Several  dif 
ferent  plans  were  crystallized  complete  in  every  detail 
only  to  fail  to  meet  the  approval  of  the  requisite 
majority  of  the  commission.  Finally,  however,  an 
allocation  was  achieved  which  met  with  approval. 

The  first  step  toward  putting  the  new  allocation  into 
effect  was  the  issuance  of  General  Order  No.  40,  the 
terms  of  which  were  agreed  upon  only  after  a  majority 
of  the  commission  had  found  themselves  in  agreement 
on  the  application  of  its  terms  to  the  existing  stations. 
This  order  was  issued  on  August  30,  1928.  It  repre 
sented  a  combination  of  the  plans  which  had  been 
suggested  to  the  commission  from  time  to  time,  to 
gether  with  certain  concessions  which  had  to  be  made 
to  the  practical  necessities  of  the  situation  because  of 
the  existing  number  and  character  of  the  broadcasting 
stations.  Forty  channels  were  set  apart  for  stations  of 
sufficient  power  on  cleared  channels  to  give  good  service 


RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  1       7 

to  rural  and  remote  listeners.  These  channels  were 
allocated  equally,  eight  to  each  zone.  This  type  of 
service  corresponds  to  the  type  which  was  called 
"national"  in  the  plans  submitted  to  the  commission  by 
expert  engineers  in  April.  Thirty-five  channels  were 
set  aside  for  stations  of  power  not  to  exceed  1,000  watts, 
to  be  allocated  equally  among  the  zones,  each  channel 
to  be  used — with  certain  exceptions — by  not  less  than 
two  nor  more  than  three  stations.  Six  channels  were 
set  aside  for  use  in  all  five  zones  by  stations  of  100 
watts  or  more;  five  channels  were  set  aside  for  use  in  all 
five  zones  by  stations  having  not  to  exceed  1,000  watts; 
four  channels  were  set  aside  for  use  by  stations  of  5  kilo 
watts  in  two  or  more  zones.  By  a  supplementary 
General  Order  No.  42  the  power  of  stations  on  the 
forty  cleared  channels  was  limited  to  25  kilowatts, 
with  provision  for  the  use  of  50  kilowatts  during  the 
next  license  period  in  order  to  determine  what  interfer 
ence,  if  any,  would  result. 

A  majority  of  the  commission  believes  that  this  plan  is 
the  best  which  could  be  devised  with  due  regard  to  exist 
ing  conditions.  It  provides,  or  at  least  makes  possible, 
excellent  radio  reception  on  80  per  cent  of  the  channels. 
The  few  other  channels  will  suffer  from  overlapping  or 
heterodyne*  interference  except  in  a  small  area  close 
to  each  station. 

The  general  principles  laid  down  in  this  basic  alloca 
tion  of  frequencies  and  power  have  been  maintained  ever 
since,  subject,  of  course,  to  modifications  made  possible  by 
improvement  in  broadcasting  equipment  and  in  receiving 
sets. 

Examples  of  how  these  principles  work  out  in  practice 
are  shown  by  the  following  samples  of  each  type  of  alloca 
tion. 


7.  Cleared  National  Channels. — In  all  cases  where  a 
cleared  national  channel  is  allotted  to  a  station,  no  other 
station  in  the  United  States  or  Canada  may  broadcast  on 


*Heterodyning  is  the  type  of  interference  causing  a  whistle  or 
buzzing  sound  resulting  when  frequencies  are  too  close  together. 


8      RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  1 

the  same  frequencies.  Examples  of  stations  to  which 
cleared  national  channels  have  been  allocated  are  the 
following : 

650  kilocycles  (WSM)  Nashville,  Tennessee,  50,000  watts 
720  kilocycles  (WGN)  Chicago,  Illinois,  50,000  watts 
1170  kilocycles  (WCAU)  Philadelphia,  Pa.,  50,000  watts 

8.  Regional   Channels. — In  many  cases,   the  same 
frequencies  and  powers  are  allotted  to  a  number  of  sta 
tions.     In  such  cases,  however,  the  geographical  locations 
of  the  stations  are  widely  separated.     The  locations  of 
the  following  four  stations  all  of  which  broadcast  on  fre 
quencies  of  590  kilocycles  are  examples: 

Massachusetts— Boston  (WEEI)    1000  watts 

Michigan— Kalamazoo  (WKZO) 1000  watts 

Nebraska— Omaha  (WOW)   1000  watts 

Washington — Spokane  (KHQ)  .  .  Night    .  .  1000  watts 

Day 2000  watts 

9.  Local  Channels. — To  local  channels  are  assigned 
stations  of  limited  range  and  low  power  which  will  give 
ample  coverage  of  the  immediate  community  in  which  they 
are  located,  but  which  will  not  cause  the  signal  to  go  so  far 
as  to  interfere  with  other  stations  assigned  the  same  fre 
quency.     An  example  of  such  assignments  of  local  stations 
to  a  single  frequency  is  found  at  the  1310  kilocycle  channel. 
Forty-five  stations  are  broadcasting  on  this  one  channel, 
though  not  all   of  them  broadcast  simultaneously.     In 
cases  where  there  are  two  stations  in  one   city,   each 
assigned  the  same  frequency,  the  broadcasting  time  is 
shared  between  the  two  stations.     This  sharing  is  worked 
out  on  an  equitable  basis  so  that  each  station  will  have 
certain  hours  when  it  is  on  the  air  every  day,  and  certain 
other  hours  which  the  two  use  on  alternating  days. 

10.  Day  and  Night  Power. — In  the  following  list  of 
stations  it  will  be  noticed  that  many  stations  have  more 
power  in  the  day  than  at  night.     This  adjustment  is  made 


RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  1       9 

where  it  is  found  that  the  night  signal,  with  the  daytime 
power,  carries  so  far  as  to  interfere  with  one  or  more  other 
stations  broadcasting  on  the  same  frequency.  In  such 
cases,  the  solution  lies  in  cutting  down  the  allowed  power 
at  night. 

The  following  are  the  stations  assigned  to  the  1310 
channel : 

WATTS 

Alabama— Birmingham  (WSGN)— Days 250 

Nights 100 

Arizona — Jerome  (KCRJ) 100 

California — Sacramento  (KFBK)    100 

District  of  Columbia — Washington  (WOL)    100 

Florida— Tallahassee  (WTAL) 100 

Illinois— Joliet  (WCLS) 100 

Indiana— Elkhart  (WRTC)— Days 100 

Nights 50 

Indiana — Muncie  (WLBC)   50 

Indiana— Terre  Haute  (WBOW) 100 

Iowa— Boone  (KFGQ) 100 

Kentucky— Ashland  (WMCI) 100 

Louisiana — Shreveport  (KRMD)     100 

Massachusetts — New  Bedford  (WNBH) — Days  . .  250 

Nights    100 

Michigan— Flint  (WFDF) 100 

Michigan — Marquette  (WBEO) 100 

Missouri— Springfield  (KGBX)    100 

Montana — Kalispell  (KDEZ) 100 

Montana— Wolf  Point  (KGCX)— Days 250 

Nights 100 

Nebraska— Kearney  (KGFW) 100 

New  Hampshire— Laconia  (WLNH) 100 

New  Mexico — Santa  Fe  (KIUJ)    100 

New  York— Auburn  (WMBO) 100 

New  York — Buffalo  (WEBR) — Days 250 

Nights 100 

New  York— Plattsburg  (WMFF)    100 

North  Carolina— Winston  Salem  (WSJS) 100 

Oklahoma— Oklahoma  City  (KFXB)— Days    250 

Nights    .  .  100 

Oregon— Medford  (KMED)— Days    250 

Nights 100 

Pennsylvania— Altoona  (WFBG) 100 

Pennsylvania— Grove  City  (WSAJ)    100 

Pennsylvania — Johnstown  (WJAC) 100 

Pennsylvania— Philadelphia  (WHAT)    100 


10    RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  I 

Pennsylvania— Reading  (WRAW) 100 

Pennsylvania— Wilkes-Barre  (WERE)  100 

Tennessee— Jackson  (WTJS)— Days 250 

Nights  100 

Tennessee— Knoxville  (WROL)— Days 250 

Nights 100 

Texas— Dublin  (KFPL) 100 

Texas— El  Paso  (KTSM)  100 

Texas— El  Paso  (WDAH) 100 

Texas— Houston  (KTLC)  100 

Texas — Lubbock  (KFYO) — Days 250 

Nights 100 

Virginia— Newport  News  (WGH)— Days 250 

Nights  100 

Washington— Aberdeen  (KXRO)  100 

Washington— Yakima  (KIT)— Days 250 

Nights  100 

Alaska— Juneau  (KINY)  100 

11.  Wide  Service  Achieved. — The  general  principles 
established  by  the  Federal  Radio  Commission  for  the 
allocation  of  frequencies  have  permitted  a  wide  degree  of 
flexibility  in  the  granting  of  licenses  for  broadcasting  and 
the  determining  of  the  amount  of  power  these  stations 
may  use.  As  a  consequence,  the  ends  sought  by  the 
original  legislation,  requiring  regular  and  ample  broad 
casting  service  to  all  parts  of  the  country,  have  been 
achieved.  For  several  years  the  number  of  broadcasting 
stations  in  the  United  States  has  not  varied  to  any  great 
extent,  remaining  close  to  600,  about  400  of  which  are 
licensed  to  sell  time  on  the  air. 


THE  DEVELOPMENT  OF  NETWORKS 

12.  Evolution  of  Radio. — Radio  broadcasting  has 
passed  through  many  of  the  stages  of  evolution  common  to 
other  human  activities.  When  the  movies  were  invented 
the  public  flocked  to  see  a  moving  picture  of  anything 
— pictures  of  people  walking,  of  horses  and  carriages  in 
motion,  of  trees  waving — anything,  so  long  as  it  moved 
and  demonstrated  this  new  wonder  of  photography. 


RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  1     11 

The  first  automobiles  had  a  very  similar  beginning. 
The  fact  that  they  ran  at  all  was  regarded  as  close  to  a 
miracle,  and  people  rode  in  an  automobile  just  to  be  able 
to  say  they'd  ridden  in  one,  with  no  particular  idea  of  going 
anywhere.  More  recently  the  airplane  has  duplicated  the 
evolution  of  the  automobile  very  closely. 

When  the  broadcasting  of  sounds,  rather  than  mere 
dots  and  dashes,  first  emerged,  the  fact  alone  that  it 
could  be  done  was  a  source  of  eager  wonder.  We  passed 
through  the  exciting  period  when  use  was  made  of  every 
sort  of  a  home-made  device  ingenious  youngsters  or  earn 
est  oldsters  could  contrive  to  act  as  a  receiver.  Broad 
casting  equipment,  also,  was  nearly  as  primitive  and 
unpredictable. 

After  the  first  wonder  caused  by  radio,  when  almost 
any  sound  that  could  be  identified  was  welcomed  with 
ecstasy  by  straining  ear-phone  listeners,  three  develop 
ments  got  under  way  simultaneously.  One  was  the  natural 
improvement  of  broadcasting  equipment.  Another  was 
the  rapid  designing,  manufacturing  and  selling  of  radio 
sets,  first  the  battery  operated  sets  and  later  those  that 
used  house  current.  The  third  was  the  development  of 
radio  programs. 

For  a  time  anybody  would  gladly  broadcast  upon  invi 
tation,  without  thought  of  asking  pay.  But  this  couldn't 
last  long,  and  suddently  the  operators  of  radio  stations, 
already  troubled  over  the  fact  that  it  cost  money  to  run  a 
station  which  had  no  earning  power,  found  in  addition  it 
would  be  necessary  to  pay  for  the  programs  they  broadcast. 

13.    Beginning   of   Radio   Advertising. — Out   of   the 

situation  just  described  came  the  idea  of  selling  radio 
time  to  advertisers  for  the  presentation  of  programs  that 
would  attract  an  audience  to  which  the  advertiser  might 
address  his  sales  message.  Naturally  there  was  no  basis 
for  estimating  the  size  of  the  audience,  so  charges  were 


12    RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  1 

based  on  the  station  owners'  estimate  of  what  the  adver 
tiser  was  willing  to  pay. 

The  first  broadcasts  that  advertisers  sponsored  were 
often  straight  "good- will"  programs.  The  response  to 
them  was  heart-warming  and  gave  conclusive  evidence 
that  a  great  new  advertising  medium  had  been  created. 

14.  Securing  of  Talent  Costly. — Radio  stations  began 
operating  on  a  continuous  basis  from  early  morning  until 
late  at  night,  to  provide  broadcasting  hours  to  sell.     This 
brought  about  a  need  for  a  great  deal  of  radio  talent  to 
keep  the  program  continuous,  whether  the  time  was  paid 
for  by  advertisers  or  not.     And,  with  the  exception  of  a 
few  of  the  largest  metropolitan  centers,  this  condition  soon 
disclosed  that  there  was  nowhere  near  enough  worth- 
listening-to-talent  to  supply  all  the  stations  all  the  time. 
Phonograph  records  were  tried  for  a  time,  but  they  never 
were  popular  and  soon  a  station  that  broadcast  a  great 
many  periods  of  phonograph  records  lost  caste  in  its  com 
munity.     As  a  consequence,  there  was  a  strong  induce 
ment  for  stations  to  get  together  with  other  stations  in 
other  cities  to  share  each  other's  broadcasting  talent. 

At  the  same  time,  advertisers  who  had  used  radio 
successfully  wanted  to  expand  their  broadcasting  activities. 
At  first  this  required  originating  a  program  on  each  station 
used,  which  was  costly  and  produced  an  unsatisfactory 
difference  in  quality  of  the  broadcasting.  There  was, 
therefore,  every  reason  for  the  advertiser  to  wish  to  have 
stations  linked  together  for  the  simultaneous  broadcasting 
of  their  programs  from  a  single  originating  source. 

15.  National    Broadcasting    System. — Out    of    the 
condition  described  grew  commercial  chain  broadcasting. 
The  first  permanent  network  was  established  in  1926,  after 
a  two-year  experimental  period,  and  named  the  National 
Broadcasting  Company.     It  was  formed  by  three  of  the 
largest  radio  manufacturers  and  merchandisers  in  the 


RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  1     13 


world,  the  General  Electric  Company,  the  Westinghouse 
Electric  and  Manufacturing  Company,  and  the  Radio 
Corporation  of  America.  Nine  years  later,  the  networks, 
basic  and  supplementary,  of  the  National  Broadcasting 
Company,  were  as  follows: 

NATIONAL   BROADCASTING   COMPANY  SYSTEM 


BASIC  RED  NETWORK 

New  York  (WEAF) 
Boston  (WEEI) 
Hartford  (WTCI) 
Providence  (WJAR) 
Worcester  (WTAG) 
Portland  (WCSH) 
Philadelphia  (KYW) 
Baltimore  (WFBR) 
Washington  (WRC) 
Schenectady  (WGY) 
Buffalo  (WBEN) 
Pittsburgh  (WCAE) 
Cleveland  (WTAM) 
Detroit  (WWJ) 
Dayton  (WHIG) 
Cincinnati  (WSAI) 
Chicago  (WMAQ) 
St.  Louis  (KSD) 
Des  Moines  (WHO) 
Omaha  (WOW) 
Kansas  City  (WDAF) 


BASIC  BLUE  NETWORK 
New  York  (WJZ) 
Boston  (WBZ) 
Springfield  (WBZA) 
Philadelphia(WFIL) 
Baltimore  (WBAL) 
Washington  (WMAL) 
Syracuse  (WSYR) 
Rochester  (WHAM) 
Pittsburgh  (KDKA) 
Cleveland  (WGAR) 
Detroit  (WXYZ) 
Cincinnati  (WCKY) 
Chicago  (WENR-WLS) 
St.  Louis  (KWK) 
Cedar  Rapids— Waterloo  (WMT) 
Des  Moines  (KSO) 
Omaha— Council  Bluffs  (KOIL) 
Kansas  City  (WREN) 


SUPPLEMENTARY   GROUPS 


CANADIAN  GROUP 
Toronto  (CRCT) 
Montreal  (CFCF) 

SOUTHEASTERN  GROUP 
Richmond  (WRVA) 
Norfolk  (WTAR) 
Raleigh  (WPTF) 
Charlotte  (WSOC) 
Asheville  (WWNC) 
Columbia  (WIS) 
Jacksonville  (WJAX) 
Tampa  (WFLA-WSUN) 
Miami  (WIOD) 


SOUTHWESTERN  GROUP 
Tulsa  (KVOO) 
Oklahoma  City  (WKY) 
Dallas-Fort  Worth  (WFAA-WBAP) 
Houston  (KPRC) 
San  Antonio  (WOAI) 
Shreveport  (KTBS) 
Hot  Springs  (KTHS) 

NORTHWESTERN  GROUP 
Milwaukee  (WTMJ) 
Madison  (WIBA) 
Minneapolis-St,  Paul  (KSTP) 
Duluth-Superior  (WEBC) 
Fargo  (WDAY) 
Bismarck  (KFYR) 


14    RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  1 

SUPPLEMENTARY   GROUPS 

(Continued) 

SOUTHCENTRAL    GROUP  MOUNTAIN    GROUP 

Louisville  (WAVE)          Denver  (KOA) 

Nashville  (WSM)  Salt  Lake  City  (KDYL) 

Memphis  (WMC) 

Atlanta  (WSB) 

Birmingham  (WAPI) 

Jackson  (WJDX) 

New  Orleans  (WSMB) 


PACIFIC   COAST   NETWORK   AND 
SUPPLEMENTARY   GROUPS 

BASIC  PACIFIC  COAST  PACIFIC  SUPPLEMENTARY 

NETWORK  GROUP 

San  Francisco  (KPO)  San  Diego  (KFSD) 

Los  Angeles  (KFI)  Phoenix  (KTAR) 
Portland  (KGW) 

Seattle  (KOMO)  NORTH  MOUNTAIN  GROUP 

Spokane  (KHQ)  Butte  (KGIR) 

Billings  (KGHL) 

SPECIAL  HAWAIIAN  SERVICE 
Honolulu  (KGU) 


16.  Columbia  Broadcasting  System. — In  the  fall  of 
1927  the  Columbia  Broadcasting  System  established  a 
network  directly  competitive  with  the  two  networks  of 
the  National  Broadcasting  Company.  It  grew  very 
rapidly,  for  by  that  time  the  advantages  of  chain  broad 
casting  were  apparent  to  advertisers  and  stations  alike, 
there  was  a  need  for  a  greater  amount  of  desirable  network 
time,  and  stations  not  on  the  National  Broadcasting 
Company's  networks  felt  a  need  for  better  programs  on  'a 
continuous  basis.  After  nine  years,  the  basic  and  supple 
mentary  networks  of  the  Columbia  Broadcasting  System 
were  as  follows: 


RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  1     15 


COLUMBIA   BROADCASTING   SYSTEM 

SOUTHEASTERN 
GROUP 


BASIC  NETWORK 

Akron  (WADC) 
Albany  (WOKO) 
Baltimore  (WCAO) 
Boston  (WNAC) 
Buffalo  (WGR-WKBW) 
Chicago  (WBBM) 
Cincinnati  (WKRC) 
Cleveland  (WHK) 
Des  Moines  (KRNT) 
Detroit-Windsor  (CKLW) 
Hartford  (WDRC) 
Indianapolis  (WFBM) 
Kansas  City  (KMBC) 
Louisville  (WHAS) 
New  York  (WABC) 
Omaha-Lincoln  (KFAB) 
Philadelphia  (WCAU) 
Pittsburgh  (WJAS) 
Providence  (WEAN) 
St.  Louis  (KMOX) 
Syracuse  (WFBL) 
Toledo  (WSPD) 
Washington  (WJSV) 

BASIC  SUPPLEMENTARY 
GROUP 

Atlantic  City  (WPG) 
Bangor  (WJBZ) 
Bridgeport  (WICC) 
Columbus  (WBNS) 
Dayton  (WSMK) 
Elmira  (WESG) 
Fort  Wayne  (WO WO) 
Harrisburg  (WHP) 
Manchester  (WFEA) 
Peoria  (WMBD) 
Rochester  (WHEC) 
South  Bend  (WSBT) 
Springfield  (WMAS) 
Utica  (WIBX) 
Wheeling  (WWVA) 
Worcester  (WORC) 
Youngstown  (WKBN) 


Charlotte  (WBT) 
Durham  (WDNC) 
Greensboro  (WBIG) 
Richmond  (WMGB) 
Roanoke  (WDRJ) 
Savannah  (WTOC) 
Winston- Salem  (WSJS) 

FLORIDA  GROUP 

Jacksonville  (WMBR) 
Miami  (WGAM) 
Orlando  (WDBO) 
Tampa  (WDAE) 


NORTHWESTERN 
GROUP 

Davenport  (WOO) 

Milwaukee  (WISN) 
Minneapolis  (WCCO) 
Sioux  City  (KSCJ) 
Yankton  (WNAX) 


CANADIAN  GROUP 

Montreal  (CKAC) 
Toronto  (CFRB) 


SOUTHWESTERN 
GROUP 

Dallas  (KRLD) 
Houston  (KTRH) 
Little  Rock  (KLRA) 
Oklahoma  City  (KOMA) 
San  Antonio  (KTSA) 
Shreveport  (KWKH) 
Topeka  (WIBW) 
Tulsa  (KTUL) 
WACO  (WACO) 
Wichita  (KFH) 
Wichita  Falls  (KGKO) 


16    RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  1 

COLUMBIA  BROADCASTING  SYSTEM 

(Continued) 

SOUTHCENTKAL  MOUNTAIN    GROUP 

GROUP  Colorado  Springs  (KVOR) 

Atlanta  (WGST)  ReTfKOH^ 

Birmingham  (WBRC)  J™°T  V    £,     n-^r  ^ 

Chattanooga  (WOOD)  Salt  Lake  Clt^  (KSL) 

Knoxville  (WNOX) 

Memphis  (WREC)  PACIFIC  COAST  GROUP 

Mobile  (WALA)  Los  Angeles  (KHJ) 

Montgomery  (WSFA)  Portland  (KOIN) 

Nashville  (WLAC)  San  Diego  (KGB) 

New  Orleans  (WDSU)  San  Francisco  (KFRC) 

Pensacola  (WCOA)  Seattle-Tacoma  (KOL- 

KVI) 
Spokane  (KFPY) 

HONOLULU,  HAWAII  (KGMB) 


17.  Additional  Networks. — A  number  of  attempts 
have  been  made,  since  the  formation  of  the  Columbia 
Broadcasting  System,  to  form  an  additional  network  of 
national  dimensions  independent  of  the  National  and  the 
Columbia  systems.  These  have  not  been  very  successful 
to  date,  though  the  nucleus  for  another  such  network  is 
in  existence  in  the  form  of  the  Mutual  Network  composed 
of  WOR,  Newark;  WLW,  Cincinnati;  WGN,  Chicago; 
and  CKLW,  Windsor.  Mutual  plans  to  add  many  stations. 

The  Mutual  Broadcasting  System,  as  this  group  of 
stations  is  called,  operates  on  a  much  less  formal  basis 
than  the  others,  so  far  as  chain  broadcasting  is  concerned. 
Where  each  basic  group  of  the  National  and  Columbia 
network  is  a  unit,  the  Mutual  system  actually  comprises 
four  individual  stations,  operating  independently,  drawing 
on  each  other  for  sustaining  programs,  and  selling  time 
independently.  When  the  same  time  is  clear  on  all  sta 
tions,  it  may  be  sold  on  a  chain  basis.  Mutual  is  now  going 
National,  absorbing  Don  Lee  system  and  other  stations. 


RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING.  PART  1     17 

In  addition  to  these  major  groups  of  a  national  charac 
ter  there  are  many  regional  groups  which  offer  the  same 
advantages  of  network  broadcasting  to  the  manufacturer 
whose  distribution  is  concentrated  within  a  designated 
region.  Some  of  these  regional  groups  are  affiliated  with 
the  national  networks,  others  are  independent.  Follow 
ing  are  examples  of  both  kinds : 

Don  Lee  Broadcasting  System 
Michigan  Radio  Network 
Southwest  Broadcasting  System 
Yankee  Network 

Of  all  the  commercial  broadcasting  stations  in  the 
United  States,  about  two-thirds  are  affiliated  with  chains 
in  one  way  or  another.  That  is,  they  are  owned  by  chains, 
are  regular  members  of  basic  groups,  members  of  supple 
mentary  groups,  or  affiliated  with  a  group  on  an  occasional 
basis.  The  other  commercial  stations  are  individual  units. 
Chains  are  constantly  adding  and  changing  stations. 


THE  RADIO  AUDIENCE 

18.  Size  of  Audience. — The  radio  audience  to  which 
the  advertiser's  message  is  addressed  numbers  upward  of 
tens  of  millions.  Yet  the  radio  program,  and  the  advertis 
ing  message  it  contains,  should  be  directed  specifically  at 
the  three  or  four  people,  grouped  around  the  set  in  their 
living  room,  who  comprise  the  average  American  family. 

The  human  mind  has  a  singular  inability  to  visualize 
the  significance  of  large  figures.  In  normal  conversation 
we  talk  of  millions  but  really  we  have  no  conception  of 
what  an  enormous  figure  a  million  is.  Think  of  it  this  way. 
A  good  sized  moving  picture  theater  seats  two  thousand 
people;  five  hundred  of  these  theaters  would  be  needed  to 
seat  an  audience  of  a  million  people.  But  to  accommo 
date  the  available  radio  audience  more  than  forty  thousand 
such  theaters  would  be  needed. 


5.%B-8 


POPULATION  AND  RADIO  OWNERSHIP  IN  THE 
UNITED  STATES 


Population 

Families 

Radio 
Homes 

Per  Cent,  of 
Families 
Owning 
Radios 

Alabama  
Arizona  ..... 

2,710,000 
457,000 

602,200 
111,500 

216,979 
53,518 

36.0 

48.0 

Arkansas  

1,876,000 

446,700 

122,989 

27.5 

California 
Colorado 

6,158,000 
1,056,000 

1,759,400 

270,800 

1,369,365 
186,598 

77.8 
68.9 

Connecticut 
Delaware  
District  of  Columbia 
Florida    
Georgia  
Idaho   
Illinois 

1,655,000 
242,000 
497,000 
1,575,000 
2,911,000 
448,000 
7,876,000 

403,700 
60,500 
127,400 
403,800 
661,600 
109,300 
2,019,500 

339,845 
45,898 
121,787 
200,674 
260,011 
74,284 
1,647,283 

84.2 
75.9 
95.6 
49.7 
39.3 
68.0 
81.6 

Indiana  
Iowa 

3,304,000 
2,485,000 

869,500 
637,200 

597,696 

459,988 

68.7 
72.2 

Kansas  
Kentucky  
Louisiana  
Maine  

1,905,000 
2,657,000 
2,166,000 
804,000 

488,500 
617,900 
503,700 
201,000 

319,714 
300,877 
258,420 
136,840 

65.4 
48.7 
51.3 
68.1 

Maryland  
Massachusetts  .  .  . 
Michigan  

1,671,000 
4,335,000 
5,093,000 

397,900 
1,057,300 
1,242,200 

318,877 
903,467 
919,946 

80.1 
85.5 
74.1 

Minnesota  

2,602,000 

619,500 

441,164 

71.2 

Mississippi 

2,057  000 

478,400 

113,989 

23.8 

Missouri 

3,678  000 

943,300 

649,040 

68.8 

M^ontana 

538  000 

137,900 

86,011 

62.4 

Nebraska 

1,395,000 

348,700 

244,503 

70.1 

Nevada 

94000 

26,900 

16,370 

60.9 

New  Hampshire  .  .  . 
New  Jersey  .... 
New  Mexico  .... 
New  York  
North  Carolina  .  .  . 
North  Dakota  .  .  . 
Ohio  

470,000 
4,231,000 
437,000 
13,059,000 
3,301,000 
688,000 
6,836,000 

120,500 
1,032,000 
101,600 
3,264,700 
673,700 
146,400 
1,752,800 

94,186 
895,884 
43,394 
2,928,870 
266.924 
84,138 
1,336,547 

78.2 
86.8 
42.7 
89.7 
39.6 
57.5 
763 

Oklahoma  
Oregon  
Pennsylvania  .... 
Rhode  Island  .... 
South  Carolina  .  .  . 
South  Dakota  .  .  . 
Tennessee  
Texas  
Utah  
Vermont  

2,475,000 
990,000 
9,826,000 
705,000 
1,750,000 
705,000 
2,676,000 
6,073,000 
520,000 
361,000 

589,300 
275,000 
2,285,100 
171,900 
372,300 
164,000 
622,300 
1,445,900 
118,200 
90,300 

291,595 
211,103 
1,913,349 
148,961 
142,706 
103,342 
312,491 
733,128 
84,293 
61,274 

49.5 
76.8 
83.7 
86.7 
38.3 
63.0 
50.2 
50.7 
71.3 
67.9 

Virginia  
Washington  .... 
West  Virginia  .  .  . 
Wisconsin  
Wyoming  

2,446,000 
1,608,000 
1,786,000 
3,005,000 
232,000 

531,700 
434,600 
388,300 
732,900 
59,500 

301,894 
333,236 
239,227 
489,602 
33,522 

56.8 
76.7 
61.6 
66.8 
56.3 

Total  

126,425,000 

30,919,300 

21,455,799 

69.4 

18 


RADIO  BKOADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  1     19 

There  is  no  way  to  determine  exactly  how  many 
people  in  this  country  can  or  do  listen  to  radio  broadcast 
ing,  but  the  figure  80,000,000  is  a  reasonable  estimate, 
arrived  at  by  the  simple  expedient  of  multiplying  the 
number  of  homes  equipped  with  radio  sets  by  the  size  of 
the  average  American  family.  That  gives  us  twenty 
million  times  four,  in  round  figures.  The  most  accurate 
data  obtainable  on  set  ownership  now  places  the  number  of 
radio  homes  at  21,455,799. 

That  figure  represents  almost  three  quarters  of  all 
the  homes  in  the  United  States,  and  probably  almost  one 
hundred  per  cent  of  the  homes  where  circumstances  permit 
ownership  and  use  of  radio  sets.  The  air  contains  too 
much  of  interest  for  any  one  who  could  have  a  radio  set  to 
ignore  it,  and  it  may  be  expected  that  set  ownership  will 
increase  in  close  relation  to  population  increase. 

19.  Location  of  Audience. — The  figure  of  total 
families  owning  radio  sets  is  impressive,  but  it  is  of  only 
incidental  importance  to  the  broadcast  advertiser.  He 
wants  to  know  how  many  of  these  potential  listeners  are 
contained  within  his  area  of  distribution.  Therefore,  the 
individual  figures  in  the  accompanying  tabulation  of 
Population  and  Radio  Ownership  are  much  more  useful 
than  the  grand  totals  at  the  bottom.  The  figures  were 
compiled  by  McGraw-Hill  and  Columbia  Broadcasting 
System. 

To  be  completely  useful  to  the  advertiser  these  figures 
need  to  be  broken  down  still  further — into  county  units. 
Family  ownership  of  sets,  by  counties,  is  readily  available 
to  any  broadcaster  upon  application  to  his  advertising 
agency,  his  radio  station,  or  any  of  the  networks.  The 
figures  are  not  given  here,  for  there  are  more  than  three 
thousand  counties  in  the  United  States,  but  typical 
counties  will  be  referred  to  later,  sufficiently  comprehen 
sive  for  the  purpose  of  this  text. 


20    RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  1 

20.  Measuring  the  Audience. — Data  obtained  in  the 
manner  described  gives  the  physical  size  of  the  potential 
audience  in  practically  any  way  the  advertiser  wants  to 
measure  it.     He  can  measure  the  audience  by  complete 
national   networks  with  all  supplementary  stations  in 
cluded,  or  by  individual  stations.     He  can  measure  it  by 
political  boundaries  such  as  state  and  county  lines,  or  by 
sales  territories.     However,  if  he  measures  it  in  accor 
dance  with  his  distribution,  he  is  able  to  relate  his  broad 
casting  costs  to  his  sales  volume,  and  with  some  accuracy 
relate  changes  in  his  sales  volume  to  his  complete  adver 
tising  program  even  when  it  includes  radio. 

But  its  size  and  location  are  only  two  interesting 
things  about  the  available  radio  audience.  Most  impor 
tant  to  the  broadcaster  is  its  character.  Obviously,  no 
group  of  Americans  as  large  as  this  could  fail  to  include 
rich  and  poor,  thrifty  and  careless,  wise  and  foolish. 
Generalizing  about  them  is  dangerous,  yet  they  have 
revealed  certain  characteristics  that  deserve  consideration. 

21.  Response  of  Radio  Audience. — The  income  of 
the  average  radio  family  is  higher  than  that  of  the  average 
for  all  families.     Many  surveys  agree  on  these  findings. 

These  families  show  a  high  degree  of  responsiveness 
to  radio  advertising.  The  possession  of  radio-advertised 
merchandise  in  radio  homes  is  much  greater  than  in  non- 
radio  homes  of  similar  income  levels.  If  a  parallel  cover 
age  of  both  types  of  homes  by  other  mediums  used  by  the 
advertiser  is  assumed,  the  difference  in  sales  volume  to 
radio  homes  must  be  credited  to  the  influence  of  radio 
advertising.  So  it  is  found  that  the  radio  audience  is 
composed  of  persons  who  respond  to  advertising  and  have 
a  higher-than-average  purchasing  power.  This  very 
responsiveness  of  the  radio  audience  is  a  quality  that 
should  be  treated  with  the  greatest  respect  and  kept  in 
mind  at  all  times  in  developing  commercial  broadcasts. 


RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  1     21 

22.  Appeal  to  Emotions. — The  basic  appeal  of  radio 
is  to  the  emotions.     Its  programs  bring  laughter,  excite 
ment,  pathos,  songs  and  stories  of  love  and  longing  into  the 
living   room.     The    effectiveness    of   its    appeal   to    the 
emotions  is  enhanced  by  the  fact  that  the  listener  is  at 
home,  freed  of  the  emotional  restraints  of  public  contact. 
Now  this  emotionalism  can  work  two  ways,  and  has  at 
many  times. 

For  example,  one  Sunday  evening  Alexander  Woolcott 
described  the  work  of  the  Seeing  Eye — that  devoted  group 
which  trains  German  shepherd  dogs  to  act  as  guides  for 
blind  people.  Gently,  understandingly,  skilfully  he  gave 
the  radio  audience  a  picture  of  what  these  dogs  did,  and 
how  wonderfully  they  bring  mobility  and  security  into 
the  lives  of  the  blind.  He  explained  that  the  organiza 
tion  needed  funds  to  continue  its  work,  and  asked  those 
who  felt  like  contributing  to  do  so.  As  a  result,  thousands 
of  dollars  poured  in  and  the  Seeing  Eye  was  helped  tre 
mendously  in  its  fine  work. 

This  is  but  one  of  almost  innumerable  instances  that 
might  be  cited  of  the  quick  and  generous  response  of  the 
radio  audience.  The  point  is  this.  In  the  main,  people 
are  kind  and  helpful.  And  they  recognize  and  appreciate 
the  same  quality  in  others. 

23.  When   Audience   Disapproves. — The   appeal   to 
the  emotions  may  also  work  in  a  direction  opposite  to 
that  just  described.     An  audience  is  quick  to  detect  and 
resent  what  it  considers  selfishness;  and  it  reacts  to  that 
with  emotions  thoroughly  aroused. 

Many  broadcasters  have  exceeded  the  bounds  of  good 
taste  and  good  judgment  in  the  programs  they  have  offered 
for  children.  In  the  eyes  of  the  radio  audience,  their 
eagerness  to  win  child  listeners  and  child  supporters  has 
led  them  to  use  program  material  of  an  undesirable 
character.  That  has  been  interpreted,  and  rightly,  as 


22    RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  1 

selfishness.  And  the  kind  of  selfishness  that  takes  advan 
tage  of  little  children  is  the  meanest  of  all.  A  wave  of 
public  resentment  swept  across  the  country.  As  in  so 
many  cases  where  emotions  are  aroused,  it  headed  toward 
emotional  excesses.  Reasonable  measures  did  not  con 
tain  the  punitive  element  angry  parents  desired.  And 
tremendous  impetus  was  given  to  movements  to  change  the 
whole  broadcasting  structure  from  a  private,  commercial 
endeavor,  to  a  public,  government  service. 

That  is  not  the  American  way  of  doing  things,  and 
probably  even  those  who  fomented  government  ownership 
would  regret  it  after  they  got  it,  because  of  the  devitaliz 
ing  effect  it  would  have  on  programs,  once  their  competi 
tive  character  was  removed.  Fortunately  for  all  con 
cerned,  advertisers  themselves  realized  that  their  methods 
were  destroying  their  medium,  and  in  general  changed 
their  tactics,  and  thus  removed  the  emotional  stimulus 
that  was  behind  the  movement  for  government  ownership 
and  censorship. 

In  another  way  the  radio  audience  has  shown  its  dis 
approval  of  what  it  conceives  to  be  selfishness  on  the  part 
of  the  broadcast  sponsor.  That  is  its  protest  against  long 
commercial  announcements.  In  a  spirit  of  fairness,  the 
radio  audience  is  willing  to  listen  with  interest  and  belief 
to  commercial  announcements  in  radio  programs,  so  long 
as  these  announcements  are  truthful,  well  mannered,  and 
of  a  reasonable  length.  But  it  resents  the  high  pressure  of 
bombastic  exhortations,  the  bad  sportsmanship  of  an 
nouncements  whose  lengths  indicate  that  the  sponsor 
regards  the  listener  as  his  prey  to  whom  he  may  talk  as 
long  and  as  dully  as  he  pleases. 

This  matter  of  announcements  has  been  a  source  of 
much  public  antagonism,  and  has  encouraged  those  who 
wish  government  censorship  or  government  ownership 
of  radio. 


RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  1     23 

24.  Judging  the  Audience. — The  mistakes  that  radio 
has  made  are  caused  by  a  misunderstanding  of  conditions 
by  broadcasters.  Too  often  the  broadcaster  conceives 
his  audience  to  be  a  vast  number  of  people  quite  like  the 
crowd  in  a  theater.  So  he  addresses  his  advertising  mes 
sage  as  though  it  were  directed  to  a  crowd.  In  reality  his 
audience  is  composed  of  one  typical  American  family, 
multiplied  many  times.  That  family  is  in  the  privacy 
of  its  home,  surrounded  by  all  those  personal  things  that 
mean  home.  It  is  relaxed.  It  is  free  of  the  self-conscious 
ness  people  have  in  public.  It  is,  most  emphatically,  itself, 
without  pretense,  front  or  sham. 

The  privilege  of  talking  to  these  people  in  these  sur 
roundings  and  in  this  frame  of  mind  is  a  great  one.  But 
it  must  be  used  with  the  utmost  taste  and  delicacy  of 
handling.  When  it  is  abused,  the  advertiser  defeats  his 
own  ends.  What  are  these  ends?  Eventually,  of  course, 
the  sale  of  his  product  or  service.  But  his  immediate 
objective  must  be  that  of  creating  a  feeling  of  friendliness  in 
the  family  toward  himself,  and  an  understanding  of  the 
function  and  merit  of  his  product  as  it  contributes  to  their 
happiness  and  welfare.  He  should  make  the  family  he  is 
addressing  feel  that  he  has  come  before  it,  through 
the  medium  of  radio,  in  the  spirit  of  helpfulness  and  service. 
When  he  does  that  his  audience  responds  and  his  broad 
casting  can  be  profitable.  When,  however,  this  family  is 
forced  to  put  on  its  mask  of  defense  against  the  outside 
world;  when  its  intelligence  is  belittled  by  misleading 
statements;  when  its  patience  is  taxed  by  lengthy  dullness, 
when,  in  short,  the  sponsor  forgets  the  obligations  of  a 
guest  to  his  host,  then  his  broadcasting  is  not  only  doomed 
to  failure,  but  it  heaps  ill-will  upon  him. 

The  radio  audience  is  wonderfully  responsive.  But  it 
lives  on  a  two-way  street  and  it  can  go  in  either  direction. 


24    RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  1 

RADIO— AN  ADVERTISING  MEDIUM 

25.    Relation  of  Radio  to  Other  Advertising  Mediums. 

Where  does  radio  fit  in  the  advertising  scheme?  This 
question  has  been  the  cause  of  much  acrimonious  and  ill- 
informed  debate.  Is  it  comparable  to  the  newspaper? 
Or  to  magazines?  Or  both  combined?  Can  it  take  the 
place  of  either  satisfactorily?  Is  it  effective,  used  by  itself, 
or  should  its  use  be  in  combination  with  other  forms  of 
advertising?  All  sorts  of  questions  of  this  kind  have  been 
raised,  argued,  even  fought  over.  But  the  answer  to  most 
of  them  is,  "That  depends." 

Naturally  the  older  mediums  of  advertising  did  not 
welcome  the  intrusion  of  radio  into  the  advertising  field. 
They  considered  it  a  competitor  which  would  cut  into  their 
volume.  As  a  result  there  existed  during  the  first  ten 
years  of  broadcast  advertising  a  general  unfriendliness 
toward  radio  in  many  quarters. 

In  fact,  the  entrance  of  radio  on  the  public  scene  caused 
alarm  and  antagonism  in  many  fields.  The  movies  re 
garded  it  with  an  unfriendly  eye,  seeing  in  radio  an  induce 
ment  to  stay  home  and  be  entertained  without  cost.  And 
the  stage  quickly  joined  the  movies  in  pained  protest 
when  the  practice  of  admitting  persons  to  radio  programs 
proved  so  popular  that  whole  theaters  were  employed  for 
this  purpose.  On  top  of  the  blow  already  given  the  stage 
by  the  movies,  this  seemed  likely  to  be  a  knock-out.  Many 
baseball  and  football  teams  refused  to  permit  broadcasting 
of  their  games,  fearing  it  would  keep  their  patrons  at  home 
and  they  would  play  to  empty  stands. 

Altogether,  radio  found  itself  a  most  unwelcome  new 
comer  among  long-established  enterprises.  But,  as  is 
always  the  case  in  our  country,  the  general  public  had  the 
last  word.  Newspapers  which  refused  to  list  radio  pro 
grams  were  overwhelmed  by  angry  protests  from  sub 
scribers.  The  lists  were  reinstated. 


RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  1    25 

Many  magazines  put  their  feelings  aside  and  looked  at 
radio  advertising  as  a  possible  help  to  their  standing  and 
circulation,  and,  to  the  considerable  distress  of  others  in 
their  field,  used  it  successfully. 

The  screen  has  benefited  by  radio's  marvelous  technical 
developments — and  motion  picture  theaters  have  been 
crowded  by  audiences  that  came  to  see  on  the  screen  their 
favorite  radio  performers. 

Sports  broadcasts  may  have  kept  some  persons  at 
home,  but  they  stimulated  the  interest  of  fully  as  many 
others  to  go  to  the  games  and  see  all  these  exciting  things 
they  had  hitherto  obtained  second  hand  through  the  radio. 

So  it  is  conceivable  that  radio,  rather  than  taking  away 
from  others,  has  not  only  gained  a  place  for  itself  but  has 
contributed  to  the  welfare  of  those  who  regarded  it  as  a 
potential  or  actual  source  of  danger  to  their  welfare. 

26.  Study  of  Radio  as  a  Medium. — As  soon  as  radio 
demonstrated  its  fitness  to  be  used  as  an  advertising 
medium  it  became  the  subject  of  careful  study  by  advertis 
ing  men.  Probably  no  form  of  advertising  ever  underwent 
such  sudden  and  searching  scrutiny.  It  was  surveyed 
from  almost  every  conceivable  standpoint.  Even  the 
federal  government  considered  it,  and  made  a  great  con 
tribution  to  the  general  knowledge  of  the  subject.  For 
in  1930,  when  the  census  was  taken,  it  made  a  count  of  set 
ownership  in  every  county  in  the  United  States.  That 
census  formed  the  basis  from  which  much  of  later  data  has 
been  derived. 

All  this  searching  and  questioning  added  to  our  knowl 
edge  of  radio,  but  it  also  resulted  in  the  discovery  that  facts 
were  hard  to  find.  We  could  learn  how  many  people 
owned  radios,  but  we  couldn't  learn  when  they  used  them, 
who  listened,  and  to  whose  program.  So  more  surveys, 
even  more  far  reaching  and  detailed  in  character,  were 
undertaken;  and  while  the  evidence  they  have  produced 


OS  T-I  CO  CO  OS  CO 
rH(McO  OSrt4  Cl 
TH  OS-^H  00 


rHCO<MOCb-cO< 
rHrHOOrHb-b- 

co~     T-T         orT 


COCOrH 
CO        CO 


»O  <N  r£ 
T-H  10 


<N  rH        b-        rH  rj<  iO  rH 
CO        CO        rH  rH 


COrHOOCOOSb-COr-  i  i—  1        iO  b-  b-        b-  *O  CO 

00  rH  00  rH  b-  00  CO  O  00    CO  00  rH    IO  rH  »O 
rHOOOSCOrHCOGOCOrH    O  b-  CO    b-  CO  rH 


CO  IO  rH  GO  b- CO  rH  b-  GO          b-  CO  CO          rH  O  CO 
b-  O  00  CO  GO  GO  rH  T^  CO  rHCOlO          CO  ^O  rH 

b-COrHCOrHO5COb-  rH          OS  rH  CO 


CO  b-  OS  rH 

rH  rH  b-  rH 
rH  rH  rH  rH 


TH  CO  CO 
00  CO  «O 


OiO 
CO»O 


rHrHCO*OCO 
iOCOb-OSCO 
OcOOOrHOs 


TH  iO  rH  iO 


OscOrH        (M(NOCiO 
t^OST-n        t^.T-HOSrH 


GO  OS  OJ  iO  b-  OS  OS  OS  00   O  rH  OS   rH  rH  O  CO      00 
rH  b- O  O  CO  OS  CO  GO  rH   OCOOO   rH»OiOOS 
CO   OS  rH  CO  OS  CO  rH     rH   *O     rH  rH  iO 


CO  CO 

OSOO 


T^  COCO'*  COOCt^l^  O 
-HOiC<lTjHOicOl^(MOi 
O  C^  (N  T-H  O  (M  O5  C^  CO 


OOOt^ 
^fCOiO 
^  CD  GO 


LQU7COrHt^O          t^O 

TtHOiCO(N>OO^cO        CO  to 

(NCO  COOl  OOrH 


lOCOCOCO 

CO          Tt^TH 


I  CO^CO^iO^ 
i  OS^OrH 


rH  CO 
O 


£f!Cl°l  ^1?. 

co'b-'r-i'io'os"co'co'b-"b-"     lo'co'co"     b-'co"b^oT  b^T-T 

GO  b- b-  »O  O  OS  IO  00    OS  rH  OO    CO  GO  CO  Q  rHCO 
CO  CO  iO  CO 


O  <M 
O  00 


O  O5  OS  O 
T-I  CO  »O  I> 
TfH(NCOTH 


rH  rH  O  CO  rH  CO  rH 

^T-H^O  O^b-^CO  rH^CO 

IS 1111s 

co          co  <-T>o~ 


CO  OS  GO 
CO  OCO 

os'^»o" 

CO  CO  OS 


l  CO 

»O 

i—  i  O 


O5  C^        GO  00  C^  00 

t^O5  Oi<M<Mr-  1 

COCO       O  <N  O5  CO 


Ot^OOf 
T-H  1>  O2 


Tfi  <N  OS  Tfi  (M  t^  CO  CO 
O  O  t^  00  CO  l^  t^  CO 

t^  iO  T-H  OS  iO  CO  T-H  OS 


C^l  (M  CO 

CO  l>  Tfi 


t^  CO  T^  (M 
Tft  <N  iO  CO 
OS  CO  O  b- 


rH  CO  rH 

OOCOCO 
iO        OS 


CO  O 

rHrH 
rH  b- 

co~ 


<N  CO 
t^  OS 

CO  00 


r 
^f 
O 


CO 
CO 


>rHOb-rHCOb-cOOO 
irHCOGOcOiOrHb-rH 

IrHOb-rHlOrHT^b- 


O  CO  OS 

GO  OS  b- 
»O  iO  CO 


•^  MH  00  CO  Ol^  iO 

CQCOI>CSCO 


*O  00  O  GO  CO 
CO  •*  O  l>  ^ 
T-I  T-I  IO  rf  (N 


O 
OS 


00  -* 


iO  CO 
OOOS 

rH  CO 


00  O    OS  GO  b-  CO 
>OiO   »-OrHOOrtH 

(N  rH          b-  00  rH  CO 


CO  rH 

<N<N 


CO  IO          O  rH  rH  CO 

rH        OS        b-  <M 


fl 

J| 

i 


il 


26 


RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  1     27 

may  not  be  regarded  as  establishing  facts  with  unerring 
exactness,  it  has  helped  to  compose  a  general  picture  of 
definite  value. 

27.  Determining  Sales  Results. — Sales  results  from 
broadcast  advertising  have  been  difficult  to  determine. 
So  many  variables  act  simultaneously  in  most  instances 
that  it  is  difficult  to  form  conclusions;  and  the  reluctance 
of  manufacturers  to  make  public  their  confidential  sales 
figures  has  made  it  necessary  to  seek  a  general  rather  than 
a  specific  result. 

Nevertheless,  by  a  method  called  the  coincidental 
telephone  survey,  it  has  been  possible  to  obtain  specific 
and  reliable  information  as  to  when  people  listen,  how 
many  listen,  and  what  they  prefer.  The  accompanying 
table  of  Gross  Expenditures  for  Network  Radio  by 
Industries  shows  the  dollar  expenditure  for  radio  adver 
tisers  over  a  period  of  years,  and  furnishes  evidence  of 
the  conviction  of  advertisers  that  radio  broadcasting  is  an 
effective  and  paying  medium. 

The  coincidental  telephone  survey  is  made  by  having 
trained  telephone  operators  call  residence  numbers  at 
specified  times  during  the  day.  A  sufficient  number  of 
calls  is  made  to  give  a  reliable  sample  of  the  community, 
and  from  the  answers  obtained  figures  for  the  entire 
community  may  be  projected.  These  coincidental  surveys 
are  made  in  all  the  cities  served  by  the  three  major  net 
works,  and  are  therefore  reliable  indicators  of  audience 
data. 

The  telephone  operator  calls  a  home,  and,  upon  receiv 
ing  an  answer,  asks  whether  there  is  a  radio  in  the  home, 
whether  it  is  turned  on,  and  what  program  is  being 
received.  A  variation  of  this  last  question  is  to  ask  what 
station  is  being  listened  to,  or  who  is  the  sponsor  of  the 
program  turned  on.  It  will  readily  be  seen  that  tactf  ulness 
is  needed  to  get  any  degree  of  accuracy. 


28    RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  1 

One  of  the  organizations  doing  this  kind  of  survey  work 
is  Clark-Hooper  Incorporated.  Data  collected  by  this 
organization  from  more  than  four  hundred  thousand  tele 
phone  calls  are  plotted  on  the  curve  shown  in  Fig.  1, 
which  indicates  the  size  of  the  listening  audience  by  thirty- 
minute  intervals,  throughout  the  broadcasting  day  from 
eight  in  the  morning  until  eleven-thirty  at  night.  The 


100 


40- 

20- 


Percentage  o!  total  sets  turned  on 
8a.m.  •  11.30  p.m. 


800  |  9:00  1 10:00 1 11:00 1 12:00 1  1:00  I  2:00  |  3:00  |  4:00  |  5:00  |  6:00  |  7:00  I  8:00  |  9:00  1 10:00  1 11:00 
8:30    9:30    10:30    11:30    12:30    1:30     2:30     3:30     4:30    5:30     6:30     7:30     8:30    9:30    10:30   11:30 


FIG.  1 


results  are,  general  averages,  as  there  are  variations  to  a 
considerable  extent  in  one  day  as  compared  to  another, 
where  special  circumstances  enter.  If,  for  example,  the 
President  of  the  United  States  made  an  important  address 
on  a  vital  topic  at  any  time  of  day  or  night,  the  audience 
percentage  at  that  time  would  shoot  up  to  60,  70  and  even 
above  80. 

Other  events,  primarily  of  national  news  interest,  have 
a  similar  tendency  to  raise  the  audience  level  far  above 
normal.  But,  aside  from  these  unusual  occasions,  the 
chart  may  be  considered  an  indication  of  the  number  of 
people  who  listen  at  various  times  in  the  day. 

Local  conditions  often  tend  to  distort  this  general 
picture  also.  For  example,  in  the  middle  west  the  broad- 


RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  1     29 

casting  of  market  reports  and  weather  forecasts  during  the 
farmer's  mid-day  meal  time  would  show  a  relatively  high 
audience  percentage  compared  to  the  general  figure.  On 
the  other  hand,  the  demands  of  farming  which  call  for 
early  rising  and  therefore  early  bed-times,  would  show  a 
lower  figure  in  the  late  evening  hours.  Any  data  and 
figures  here  given  are  necessarily  of  a  national  or  sectional 
character,  and  the  broadcaster  who  is  considering  a  limited 
territory  or  a  single  town  must  modify  the  conclusions  he 
reaches  from  these  data,  in  order  to  take  into  account 
any  local  conditions  with  which  he  must  familiarize 
himself. 

Statistics  showing  how  many  people  are  listening  to 
their  radio  sets  give  only  part  of  the  information  the 
advertiser  needs  if  he  is  to  plan  his  effort  intelligently.  In 
most  communities  the  listener  has  the  choice  of  three  sta 
tions  to  which  he  may  listen  at  any  given  time,  and  in 
many  places  he  may  have  his  choice  of  ten  or  more.  This 
raises  the  question  of  station  popularity,  and  program 
popularity.  The  Clark-Hooper  survey,  covering  as  it  did 
a  six-months  period,  went  carefully  into  this  subject. 
It  revealed  that  the  average  number  of  sets  tuned  to  any 
one  station  or  network  was  9.1  per  cent  of  all  the  sets  con 
tained  within  the  area  surveyed. 

A  device  for  mechanically  measuring  station  coverage 
has  been  tested  in  Boston.  This  clock-like  instrument 
when  attached  directly  to  the  radio  receiving  apparatus 
makes  a  continuous  record  of  the  times  the  radio  is  turned 
on,  when  it  is  turned  on,  and  the  stations  tuned  in.  So 
far  the  use  of  this  apparatus  is  experimental,  but  the 
information  derived  from  it  will  be  of  great  value  if 
permission  for  its  installation  can  be  obtained  from  enough 
owners  of  radios  to  enable  the  placing  of  a  sufficient 
number  of  the  instruments  in  a  given  territory  to  furnish  a 
representative  sample  of  likes  of  the  radio  owners  of  that 
territory. 


30    RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  1 


28.  Radio  Compared  With  Other  Mediums.  —  May 
9.1  per  cent  be  considered  satisfactory  coverage,  and  a 
satisfactory  and  effective  delivery  of  the  advertiser's 
message,  as  compared  with  the  actual  performance,  not 
the  potential  performance,  of  other  advertising  mediums? 
The  best  answer  to  that  question  is  the  record  of  what 


180 
140 

100 
80 
60 
40 


\ 


A 


19Z7  1928  I9Z9  1930  1931   I93Z  1933  1934 
Years 

FIG.  2 

broadcast  advertisers  have  done  after  surveying  results. 
And  it  should  be  kept  in  mind  that  advertisers  do  not 
ordinarily  tell  in  public  what  the  results  were,  even  though 
they  may  have  been  so  satisfactory  as  to  exceed  their  most 
optimistic  hopes.  In  the  chart  shown  in  Fig.  2,  the 
Radio  curve  shows  what  has  been  invested  for  time  and 
talent  in  radio  advertising  during  the  period  1927-193Z 
two  years  of  prosperity  and  five  years  of  depression. 


RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  1     31 

Other  curves  on  the  chart,  show  expenditures  for  adver 
tising  in  other  mediums  during  the  same  period,  and  these 
curves  indicate  that  the  advertiser,  looking  over  his  results, 
has  been  convinced  that  radio  advertising  is  an  effective 
and  economical  medium. 

It  should  be  mentioned  that  the  declining  figures  for 
magazines  and  newspapers  represent  no  loss  in  confidence 
in  these  mediums  on  the  part  of  the  advertiser.  They 
disclose  only  the  extent  to  which  advertisers  were  forced 
to  reduce  advertising  budgets  because  of  the  times.  The 
really  significant  lines  are  those  for  the  year  1933-34,  when 
the  curves  for  magazines,  newspapers  and  radio  all  turn 
upward  together,  on  a  course  that  is  nearly  parallel. 

This  indicates  that  the  advertiser  has  concluded  that 
radio  has  taken  its  place  among  primary  advertising  media, 
that  the  coverage  is  satisfactory  for  the  expenditure,  and 
that  the  effectiveness  of  the  coverage,  in  sales  results, 
presents  a  return  per  dollar  comparable  to  that  of  the 
older  forms  of  advertising. 

29.  Radio  as  Sole  Medium. — Can  radio  be  used  in 
place  of  newspapers  or  magazines?  There  are  about  as 
many  answers  to  that  question  as  there  are  advertisers. 
Each  has  his  own  area  of  distribution  to  consider,  his 
methods  of  selling,  his  competitive  quality  and  price;  and, 
on  top  of  that,  the  character  of  his  merchandise  and  his 
market. 

Individual  examples  of  all  kinds  may  be  used  to  prove 
almost  anything.  For  example,  take  the  case  of  the  manu 
facturer  of  a  drug  product  who  tried  magazines  without 
results.  He  turned  to  newspapers,  again  without  results. 
He  tried  radio,  and  sales  shot  up.  Can  credit  for  that  be 
laid  to  radio  as  an  advertising  medium,  or  to  a  brilliant 
program  that  caught  the  listeners'  fancy,  in  contrast  with 
newspaper  and  magazine  copy  that  didn't  click  or  that 
merely  put  him  in  a  class  with  others? 


32    RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  1 

We  can  consider  the  manufacturer  of  cosmetics  who 
never  used  anything  but  radio,  but  nevertheless  has  made 
a  spectacular  success.  Again,  others  have  been  equally 
successful  who  have  never  used  radio  at  all.  Then  how 
can  we  tell  that  the  first  manufacturer  might  not  have 
been  even  more  successful  with  the  same  appropriation 
devoted  to  mediums  other  than  radio?  How  do  we  know 
that  those  who  have  never  used  radio  wouldn't  have  pro 
gressed  faster  if  they  had  done  so?  To  all  those  questions 
we  can  only  answer  "We  don't  know."  Nobody  knows,  and 
there  isn't  any  way  to  find  out.  All  we  can  say  is  that  the 
success  advertisers  have  had  in  using  any  medium  intelli 
gently  indicates  they  have  invested  their  dollars  to  the 
benefit  of  their  business. 

There  is  no  way  to  eliminate  from  advertising  the 
uncertainty  of  judgment  and  the  element  of  chance. 
Experience  and  trial  can  reduce  them.  Available  facts 
may  prove  guides.  But  absolute  certainty  in  advertising, 
regardless  of  the  medium  used,  is  as  unattainable  as  per 
petual  motion. 

It  is  impossible  to  lay  down  any  rules  on  when  to  use 
and  when  not  to  use  radio  broadcasting.  A  glance  at  the 
products  and  services  successfully  advertised  on  the  air 
shows  that  they  cover  approximately  the  same  range  as 
advertising  in  publications.  The  same  broadcasters  who 
use  the  networks  in  a  spectacular  way  also  use  magazines 
and  newspapers  as  primary  mediums. 

An  extreme  example  of  successful  use  of  radio,  where  it 
might  be  expected  that  the  printed  word  would  be  used 
exclusively,  is  found  in  the  case  of  a  manufacturer  of 
office  equipment  and  cost  systems.  It  would  hardly  seem 
feasible  to  sell  filing  cases,  adding  machines,  typewriters 
and  such  functional  equipment  through  a  medium  whose 
primary  appeal  is  emotional.  Yet  it  has  been  successfully 
done;  and  it  is  not  difficult  to  find  a  satisfactory  reason 
for  this  being  true. 


RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  1     33 

Rarely  does  an  advertisement  make  a  direct  sale,  no 
matter  what  the  medium  employed,  except  in  the  case  of 
the  retail  advertising  of  local  stores  in  a  community.  The 
opinions  that  lead  to  an  action  are  not  formed  that  way. 
They  build  up  gradually,  being  formed  within  a  person's 
mind  by  accepting  or  rejecting  ideas  from  the  mass  of 
opinion  that  surrounds  each  of  us.  The  old  slogan 
"Nothing  succeeds  like  success"  epitomizes  this  thought. 
For  when  everybody  else  acknowledges  success,  who  are 
you  to  question  or  deny  it?  By  accepting  common  opin 
ion  your  opinion  conforms,  and  the  actions  you  take  are 
then  expressions  of  your  opinion. 

The  testimonial,  an  old  but  one  of  the  most  effective 
types  of  advertisements,  is  merely  a  demonstration  of 
success  and  the  impressing  of  someone  else's  opinion  on 
your  mind. 

30.  Creating  Public  Opinion. — Radio  broadcasting 
helps  to  create  opinions  in  many  minds,  not  necessarily 
concrete  and  exact  opinions,  but  general  ideas.  Good 
broadcasting  implants  favorable  ideas.  Perhaps  most 
persons  who  have  these  ideas  have  no  occasion  to  purchase 
office  equipment.  Only  a  few  do.  But  these  few  are 
surrounded  in  their  daily  lives  by  the  opinions  of  all  with 
whom  they  come  in  contact.  A  casual  remark  here,  a 
favorable  comment  there,  comes  within  the  possible 
purchaser's  hearing.  It  happens  frequently,  day  after 
day,  and  gradually  the  actual  purchaser  of  office  equipment 
has,  arrived  at  a  favorable  opinion  himself.  The  effective 
ness  of  radio,  in  this  case,  is  exactly  the  effectiveness  of 
any  other  advertising  medium — it  stimulates  conversa 
tion  and  helps  to  mold  opinion. 

Often  radio  can  influence  opinion  when  used  by  itself; 
but  in  the  process  of  influencing  the  mind  of  a  prospect, 
it  is  conceivable  that  the  task  will  be  performed  more 
quickly  and  surely  when  additional  forms  of  advertising 


536B— 9 


34    RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  1 

are  used.  Similarly,  the  job  may  be  done  by  publications 
— in  time;  but  it  may  be  done  more  certainly  with  the 
addition  of  radio  to  the  effort. 

Radio  broadcasting  may  therefore  be  considered  as 
having  taken  its  place  as  a  primary  advertising  medium, 
capable  often  of  carrying  the  entire  advertising  burden. 
But  many  times,  its  effectiveness  may  be  enhanced  by 
the  additional  use  of  the  written  word. 

31.  Use  Based  on  Appropriation. — Where  the  appro 
priation  does  not  permit  the  use  of  more  than  one  primary 
medium,  then  the  advertiser  must  make  his  choice.  This 
calls  for  a  careful  study  of  markets,  distribution,  competi 
tion  and  all  the  other  factors  that  advertising  must  con 
sider. 

The  bare  figures  disclosed  by  such  a  survey  may  indi 
cate  which  medium  to  use.  If  they  do  not,  a  study  of  the 
territory  to  be  covered  may  indicate  the  answer.  If,  for 
example,  it  contains  strong  newspapers  and  second-rate 
radio  stations,  then,  surely,  newspapers  deserve  first  consid 
eration.  If  the  appropriation  permits  the  use  of  newspaper 
space  of  size  and  frequency  believed  capable  of  doing  the 
job,  then  obviously  the  money  should  be  spent  that  way. 
If  it  will  not,  and  the  experience  of  broadcasters  shows 
they  have  used  broadcasting  effectively,  even  on  second- 
rate  stations  in  that  community,  then  the  appropriation 
should  be  measured  against  the  cost  of  broadcasting,  to 
determine  whether  the  job  can  be  done  by  that  means. 

Just  as  skilful  use  of  small  space  in  a  newspaper  may 
attract  more  readers  than  bungling  use  of  large  space, 
so  may  an  interesting  radio  broadcast,  packed  into  a  small 
time  unit,  be  more  productive  than  an  ordinary  effort  over 
a  longer  period.  A  question  that  can  be  answered  only 
by  judgment  and  experience  then  comes  up.  With  limited 
appropriation,  can  the  message  be  presented  more  effec 
tively  by  the  use  of  type  and  illustration,  or  by  the  use 


RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  1     35 

of  the  human  voice  and  the  intimate  emotional  medium  of 
sound?  There  is  no  hard  and  fast  answer — experience 
must  decide. 

And  the  problem  of  a  community  or  a  limited  territory 
differs  only  in  degree  from  that  of  a  section  of  the  country 
or  the  whole  country  itself,  except  that  in  larger  areas 
you  are  certain  that  whether  you  use  newspapers,  maga 
zines  or  radio,  you  have  available  strong  advertising 
mediums. 

32.  Distribution  Controls  Use. — Distribution  may 
rule  out  one  type  of  medium,  and  then  the  choice  rests 
between  the  other  two.  Comparison  of  the  costs  of  using 
each,  either  for  an  ideal  program  or  a  medium  program, 
may  indicate  which  to  choose.  But  here  again,  the  final 
selection  must  rest  on  someone's  judgment  and  experience. 
In  using  radio,  just  as  in  using  any  other  advertising 
mediums,  judgment  and  experience  are  indispenable ; 
and  these  must  be  the  result  of  intelligent  study. 


COVERAGE 

33.  Meaning  of  Coverage. — Coverage  may  be  defined 
as  the  area  in  which  people  can  and  do  listen  to  programs 
broadcast  from  a  designated  station.  This  area  varies 
considerably  even  for  stations  of  the  same  power.  It 
also  varies  for  daytime  and  nighttime  broadcasting.  And 
there  is  a  wide  variation  of  signal  strength  within  the 
coverage  area  itself. 

For  several  years,  coverage  was  a  mystery  to  every 
body  who  had  anything  to  do  with  radio.  All  the  myster 
ies  have  not  been  removed  yet — may  never  be.  But  there 
are  now  standards  for  measuring  coverage  which  at  least 
furnish  a  guide. 

The  first  attempt  to  indicate  the  geographical  coverage 
of  a  radio  station  was  so  simple  that,  if  it  had  been  accu- 


36    RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  1 

rate,  it  would  have  saved  many  years  of  hard  work  and 
many  thousands  of  dollars  to  the  country's  radio  stations. 
It  consisted  of  drawing  a  circle  with  a  radius  of  100  miles 
around  the  station.  And  that  was  the  coverage  map. 
Unfortunately  this  was  not  a  true  picture,  and  another 
method  of  determining  coverage  had  to  be  devised. 

34.  Coverage  Indicated  by  Mail  Response. — From 
the  very  start  of  broadcasting,  mail  poured  into  the  sta 
tions  from  listeners.  Obviously  this  proved  that  the  writer 
had  heard  the  station.  So  maps  were  spotted  to  show 
where  the  mail  came  from  and  the  closeness  of  the  spots 
indicated  the  degree  of  coverage  intensity.  For  example, 
in  the  area  immediately  surrounding  the  station,  the  dots 
would  be  so  numerous  and  so  close  together  that  they 
presented  a  practically  uniform  surface.  As  the  distance 
from  the  station  increased,  these  dots  became  more  widely 
separated.  This  graduation  indicated  that  there  was  a 
need  to  differentiate  between  types  of  coverage,  so  the 
practice  was  started  of  designating  primary,  secondary  and 
even  lower  grades  of  coverage  areas,  according  to  the 
density  of  dots. 

This  was  undoubtedly  a  real  advance  in  studying  sta 
tion  coverage,  but  there  was  one  variable  factor  that  made 
accurate  calculation  of  a  station's  value  practically  impos 
sible.  The  standard  which  determined  the  primary  area 
of  one  station  might  be,  and  usually  was,  entirely  different 
from  the  standard  used  by  another.  Where  two  stations 
of  comparable  power  were  located  in  the  same  community, 
it  is  obvious  that  there  was  every  inducement  to  make  the 
standard  denning  primary  area  increasingly  liberal  for 
competitive  purposes.  So  in  many  cases  the  mail-response 
method  of  determining  coverage  provided  information  no 
more  valuable  than  the  hundred-mile  circles.  Neverthe 
less,  mail  response,  intelligently  and  conscientiously 
evaluated,  is  still  employed  as  a  method  of  determining 


RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  1     37 

station  coverage,  or  of  supplementing  other  methods  of 
determining  coverage. 

35.  Signal   Strength   Measurements. — The   Federal 
Radio   Commission  investigated  the   coverage  question 
from  an  engineering  standpoint.     With  the  average  per 
formance  of  commercial  receiving  sets  known,  the  Com 
mission  measured  the  amount  of  energy  at  the  point  of 
reception  necessary  to  give  satisfactory  service.     In  the 
course  of  these  experiments  it  found  that  the  noise-level 
of  the  point  of  reception  had  a  distinct  influence  on  the 
amount  of  energy  required  to  produce  a  satisfactory  signal 
for   regular   listening.     This   led   to   the   establishing   of 
general  strength  standards  related  to  the  average  noise 
level  of  urban,  suburban  and  rural  communities.     These 
standards  called,  respectively,  for  10,  2,  and  .5  millivolts- 
per-meter,  which  was  the  measuring  unit  employed. 

Several  engineering  firms  started  making  these  signal 
strength  measurements  with  portable  equipment  in  auto 
mobiles.  The  results  obtained  were  the  most  specific 
indications  of  coverage  yet  revealed,  and  furnished  a 
stable  basis  for  all  stations  to  use.  As  a  consequence,  the 
signal-strength  method  of  measuring  coverage  soon  became 
general  practice,  and  most  stations  have  employed  it. 

The  signal  strength  must  be  measured  for  daytime 
coverage  and  nighttime  coverage,  as  there  is  a  distinct 
difference  in  the  two.  And  it  must  be  taken  over  a  period 
of  time  sufficiently  extended  to  show  an  average  for  any 
given  listening  point,  to  determine  the  regularity  or  irregu 
larity  of  reception. 

36.  Primary   and   Secondary   Coverage. — The   area 
where  a  station  may  always  be  heard,  regardless  of  varia 
tions,  with  complete  satisfaction  to  the  listener,  is  the 
primary  coverage  or  primary  service  area.     The  area  where 
the  station  may  be  heard  regularly,  but  with  varying 


38    RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  1 

intensity  that  might  make  reception,  upon  infrequent 
occasions,  less  than  completely  satisfactory,  is  the  secon 
dary  coverage  or  service  area. 

These  two  areas  may  be  considered  to  include  the 
broadcaster's  available  audience,  where  his  advertising 
message  may  be  delivered  clearly,  regularly  and  effectively 
to  persons  who  listen  to  the  station  habitually.  The 
primary  and  secondary  coverage  areas  for  Station  WABC 
are  illustrated  in  the  map,  Fig.  3.  This  map  is  typical  of 
those  used  for  other  cities. 

37.  Station  Popularity. — Coverage  is  not  the  whole 
story,  so  far  as  the  advertiser  is  concerned.  He  is  also 
interested  vitally  in  the  standing  of  the  station  with  the 
listeners  within  its  area.  For  that,  to  a  considerable 
extent,  determines  the  circulation  his  message  will  receive. 
When  he  knows  the  relative  standing  of  several  stations 
serving  a  given  community,  he  is  in  a  position  to  select 
the  one  that  serves  his  purpose  best.  Unfortunately 
there  is  no  engineering  method,  such  as  the  signal-strength 
test,  to  determine  a  station's  popularity.  We  are  again 
forced  back  to  judgment  and  opinions. 

The  popularity  of  any  station  is  controlled  by  the 
programs  it  broadcasts.  Listeners  quickly  develop  the 
habit  of  turning  to  certain  stations  and  avoiding  other 
stations,  according  to  their  liking  of  the  programs  offered. 
In  practice,  this  tends  to  direct  listener  preference  to  chain 
stations,  because  these  stations  carry  the  fine  programs 
sponsored  by  national  advertisers  and  because  time  not 
sold  for  commercial  use  can  be  filled  by  sustaining  programs 
of  real  merit  originated  at  a  point  where  first-class  talent 
of  a  wide  variety  is  always  available. 

But  this  does  not  mean  that  the  independent  station, 
without  chain  connections,  must  lose  out  in  competition 
for  the  audience.  With  ingenuity,  initiative,  and  imagina 
tion,  the  program  director  of  an  independent  station  can 


RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  1     39 

broadcast  so  much  of  real  local  interest  and  timeliness, 
combined  with  musical  and  other  entertainment  derived 
from  electrical  transcription  services  which  use  the  same 
artists  as  the  networks  use,  that  he  can  build  a  loyal  and 
regular  following  for  his  station  just  as  large  and  just  as 
valuable  to  the  advertiser  as  the  following  of  the  larger 
stations.  He  makes  up  with  brains  and  energy  what  he 
lacks  in  money  and  abundance  of  entertainment  resources. 

38.  Telephone  Survey. — There  are  several  ways  of 
arriving  at  a  reasonably  accurate  estimate  of  the  relative 
popularity  of  various  stations  in  a  community.  One  is 
the  coincidental  telephone  survey,  conducted  over  a  period 
of  several  days  in  order  that  program  schedules  may  aver 
age  out.  Another  is  to  obtain  the  opinion  of  many  people 
living  in  the  community.  A  manufacturer,  for  example, 
may  write  to  all  his  retail  outlets  within  the  area,  asking 
their  preferences  in  stations.  But  the  results  must  always 
be  judged  with  the  knowledge  that  a  retailer  is  likely  to 
consider  the  biggest  the  best.  On  the  other  hand,  much 
of  the  value  of  advertising  lies  in  the  enthusiasm  it  stimu 
lates  in  dealers,  and  use  of  the  station  elected  by  a  poll  of 
dealers  may  sometimes  prove  to  be  the  best. 

Certainly  the  program  schedules  of  all  stations  under 
consideration  should  be  carefully  studied;  for,  regardless 
of  power,  frequency  or  any  other  factor,  it  is  program 
character  that  determines  the  audience  within  a  station's 
coverage  area.  Careful  attention  to  this  item  will  often 
enable  the  advertiser  to  broadcast  effectively  at  a  great 
saving  in  cost.  He  may  find,  for  example,  that  in  a  city 
containing  a  50,000-watt  station  and  a  500-watt  station, 
the  latter  is  the  more  popular.  There  are  such  cases. 
If  the  coverage  area  of  the  500-watt  station  includes  the 
territory  in  which  he  wishes  to  advertise,  obviously  he  can 
save  a  very  considerable  sum  by  using  it.  Many  adver 
tisers  are  finding  local,  or  spot  broadcasting  profitable. 


40 


RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  1 


I 


g 


I! 


s~s? 


8 


RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  1     41 

On  the  other  hand,  take  the  case  of  an  organization 
that  sells  within  an  arbitrary  political  boundary,  such  as  a 
city  limit.  Assume  that  all  sales  are  concentrated  within 
that  area,  and  coverage  outside  the  area  is  valueless  to  the 
advertiser.  This  circumstance  by  no  means  indicates  the 
use  of  a  low  powered  station.  The  audience  for  the  high- 
powered  station  within  the  geographical  limits  may  be  so 
many  times  larger  than  the  audience  of  the  low  powered 
station  that  the  large  station  gives  a  greater  dollar  value 
regardless  of  waste  circulation. 

Conditions  like  these  indicate  the  importance  of  study 
ing  the  relative  standing  of  stations  in  the  territory  under 
consideration.  Specific  examples  cannot  be  given  because 
these  standings  are  continually  changing. 

39.  Coverage  Data  Available.— Radio  stations  now 
furnish  to  advertisers  much  information  about  their 
coverage  and  the  character  of  the  area  they  serve.  Cover 
age  is  usually  shown  in  terms  of  counties  and  maps  are 
furnished  on  which  counties  within  the  primary  area  are 
shown  in  one  color,  and  those  in  the  secondary  area  another 
color. 

Data  on  set  ownership,  automobiles,  incomes,  tele 
phones  and  other  factors  is  tabulated  for  the  use  of  the 
advertiser  to  help  him  select  his  broadcasting  points,  and 
the  station  to  use,  and  to  give  him  a  basis  of  deciding 
whether  to  use  newspapers  instead  of  radio,  or  vice  versa, 
where  the  appropriation  does  not  permit  the  use  of  both. 
A  typical  radio  station  data  tabulation  is  given  in  Fig.  4. 


RADIO    BROADCAST    ADVERTISING 

Serial  3360A  (PART  1)  Edition  1 

Review  Questions 

NOTE These  Review  Questions  are  given  merely  that  you  may  test  yourself 

on  your  general  knowledge  cf  the  points  discussed  in  this  lesson.  If  there  is  any 
question  that  you  are  unable  to  answer,  this  indicates  that  you  have  missed  the 
point  involved  and  should  read  the  text  again.  You  can  readily  find  the  answers 
to  all  of  these  questions  in  the  text. 

(1)  Why  must  radio  broadcast  advertising  be  of  an 
essentially  high  order? 

(2)  About    how    many    radio-owning    families    are 
there  in  the  United  States? 

(3)  What  is  the  range  in  kilocycles  of  the  broadcast 
band   available   for   advertisers   in   the   United 
States    and    Canada?     And   how   many    actual 
channels  does  this  permit? 

(4)  Describe  the  difference  between  a  cleared  channel 
and  a  regular  or  local  channel. 

(5)  What  led  to  the  development  of  chain  networks 
and  what  are  the  three  main  networks? 

(6)  What  led  to  the  use  of  radio  for  advertising  and 
why  must  the  commercial  side  of  broadcasting  be 
subordinated  to  the  programs  given? 

(7)  Describe  several  methods  of  measuring  the  radio 
audience. 

(8)  Tell  why  you  consider  that  radio  has  taken  its 
place  as  an  advertising  medium. 

(9)  What  are  some  of  the  methods  used  to  estimate 
radio  coverage? 

(10)    How  can  advertisers  secure  data  concerning  radio 
coverage? 


RADIO    BROADCAST 
ADVERTISING 

Serial  3360B  (PART  2)  Edition  1 

PUTTING  RADIO   TO   WORK 

SPOT  BROADCASTING 

1.  Use  of  Spot  Broadcasting. — The  commercial 
sponsorship  of  programs  broadcast  independently  over 
individual  stations  is  called  spot  broadcasting.  Spot 
broadcasting  is,  in  effect,  as  old  as  commercial  broadcast 
ing  itself,  but  its  use  over  recent  years  is  attracting  keen 
interest  on  the  part  of  national  advertisers.  Some  hold 
spot  broadcasting  to  be  synonymous  solely  with  the  use 
of  electrical  transcriptions.  These  are  much  used,  but, 
spot  broadcasting  also  frequently  calls  for  live  talent.  A 
comparison  is  sometimes  drawn  between  radio  and  printed 
advertising  to  show  the  relation  of  spot  to  network  broad 
casting.  Network  broadcasting  is  described  as  being 
comparable  to  the  functions  of  magazine  advertising,  and 
spot  broadcasting  to  newspaper  advertising.  This  is  not 
a  sound  comparison.  Either  spot  or  network  broadcasting 
can  be,  and  is  used  for  purposes  similar  to  the  functions  of 
both  types  of  printed  advertising. 

Which  of  the  two  forms  of  radio  an  advertiser  should 
use  will  depend  upon  his  objective,  how  he  wishes  to  gain 
it  and  whether  it  will  be  most  economically  gained  by  the 
use  of  network,  or  chain,  broadcasting.  He  may,  as  some 
advertisers  do,  wish  to  use  both.  He  may,  as  has  been 
done,  start  out  with  one  method  and  eventually  change 
to  the  other.  He  may  later  conclude  that  spot  broadcast 
ing  will  be  valuable  as  a  supplement  to  his  network 
activities.  He  may  wish  to  use  electrical  transcriptions 

COPYRIGHTED    BY    INTERNATIONAL    TEXTBOOK    COMPANY.       ALL    RIGHTS    RESERVED 


2      RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  2 

much  as  he  would  newspaper  mats  in  supporting  his  dealers 
with  local  advertising  that  is  paid  for  entirely  by  the 
advertiser,  or  in  cooperation  with  his  dealers. 

An  important  point  for  the  advertiser  to  bear  in  mind 
is  that  spot  broadcasting  is  a  distinct  and  separate  form  of 
advertising  which  definitely  has  its  own  place  in  the  field 
of  advertising  mediums  and  has  its  own  particular  advan 
tages. 

2  Spot  Broadcasting  by  Merchants. — Spot  broadcast 
ing,  in  addition  to  its  use  by  national  advertisers,  also 
is  the  form  of  broadcasting  used  by  local  merchants  who 
buy  time  on  a  station  in  their  own  communities.  It 
particularly  recommends  itself  to  an  advertiser  who  wishes 
to  confine  his  advertising  activities  to  specific  markets 
which  are  determined  by  his  individual  distribution  prob 
lem.  If  these  markets  are  few  in  number  he  may  find  the 
networks,  as  they  sometimes  are,  reluctant  to  take  a  small 
hook-up.  Then  spot  broadcasting  particularly  fits  itself 
into  his  plans.  It  also  recommends  itself  to  an  advertiser 
who  insists  upon  his  program  being  broadcast  at  a  uniform 
time,  regardless  of  time  zones  or  daylight  saving. 

Whether  the  list  of  markets  that  an  advertiser  wishes  to 
reach  over  the  air  is  large  or  small,  he  can  make  his  own 
list  and  have  availablo  a  wider  choice  of  stations  in  those 
markets  where  he  contemplates  the  use  of  non-network 
stations  as  well  as  network. 

Method  of  use,  ways  of  contracting  for  time  and  the 
question  of  cost  also  serve  to  make  the  two  forms,  network 
and  spot,  entirely  distinctive.  The  sponsor  has  un 
limited  choice  of  talent  personality  when  he  uses  transcrip 
tions  and  if  he  buys  his  time  cautiously,  may  secure  very 
favorable  hours  on  the  stations  he  prefers  to  use. 

Perhaps  conditions  are  not  ripe  for  an  advertiser  to  go 
on  the  air  in  a  number  of  markets.  He  may  want  merely 
to  cover  a  segment  or  to  reach  markets  of  a  certain  size  or 


RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  2      3 

type.     With  spot  broadcasting  he  can  cut  his  cloth  to 
suit  his  garment. 

From  these  variables  it  can  be  seen  that  the  advertiser 
should  study  the  purchase  as  well  as  the  use  of  spot  broad 
casting.  He  must  evaluate  its  advantages  and  determine 
whether  these  will  best  serve  his  purpose,  or  whether  he 
should  make  use  of  networks,  or  whether  he  should  employ 
both. 

3.  Details  of  Spot  Broadcasting. — The  following 
questions  and  their  answers  will  serve  to  make  plain  some 
of  the  important  details  connected  with  spot  broadcasting. 

7s  spot  broadcasting  new?  No,  it  is  one  of  the  earliest, 
if  not  the  first,  type  of  commercial  sponsorship.  Com 
mercial  broadcasting  predates  the  formation  of  radio 
networks  and  the  subsequent  sponsorship  of  programs 
emanating  from  a  central  studio  and  immediately  trans 
mitted  over  a  number  of  stations. 

How  many  types  of  spot  programs  are  there?  There  are 
five  distinct  types  of  programs: 

1.  "Live"  talent. 

2.  Sponsorship  of  service  reports,  such  as  time,  weather, 
sports,  market  quotations  and  news. 

3.  Cooperative  participation  in  cooking  schools,  home 
economic  hours,   and  similar  features  sponsored  by 
independent  stations. 

4.  Brief  commercial  announcements. 

5.  Electrical  transcriptions. 

Can  these  types  be  combined?  Yes.  Live  talent  can  be 
used  together  with  electrical  transcription.  Entertain 
ment  may  be  all  transcription  and  the  commercial  an 
nouncements  may  be  read  by  the  station  announcer.  Or, 
the  commercial  credit  can  be  incorporated  in  the  electrical 
transcription  and  used  in  conjunction  with  entertainment 
provided  by  live  talent. 


4      RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  2 

What  is  "live  talent"?  By  live  talent  is  meant  the 
artists  or  speakers  who  broadcast  in  person  before  the 
station  microphone.  Live  talent  is  made  use  of  in  two 
ways.  An  advertiser  can  arrange  for  his  own  casting  from 
local  talent,  or  he  may  sponsor  a  sustaining  program  of 
live  talent  for  which  an  audience  following  already  has 
been  built. 

What  is  electrical  transcription? — Electrical  transcrip 
tion  is  a  special  method  of  recording  on  discs  designed  for 
broadcasting  use.  Because  transcriptions  are  very  largely 
used  in  spot  broadcasting,  a  misconception  exists  among 
many  persons,  who  think  that  spot  broadcasting  covers 
electrical  transcription  only. 

Where  are  transcriptions  made? — Transcriptions  are 
made  in  the  recording  studios  of  companies  equipped  to 
render  this  specialized  service.  These  companies  main 
tain  studios  which  in  appearance  and  set-up  are  very  like 
the  studios  of  broadcasting  stations.  Some  transcrip 
tions  are  made  direct  from  studios  in  advertising  agencies 
through  special  wire  hook-ups  to  the  recording  companies. 

How  are  transcriptions  made? — A  program  is  staged,  but 
instead  of  going  out  over  the  air,  it  is  transmitted  over  the 
recording  apparatus  to  a  large  turntable  on  which  thick 
wax  discs  revolve.  Transcriptions  also  are  made  for  net 
work  advertisers  who  desire  records  of  their  broadcasts 
either  for  permanent  reference  or  for  spot  transmission 
over  other  stations.  Such  records  are  made  by  arranging 
to  have  a  recording  studio  pick  up  the  network  studio  per 
formance.  If  the  purpose  of  the  record  is  for  file,  the 
recordings  usually  are  made  on  aluminum  discs. 

In  making  recordings  for  broadcast,  usually  two  discs 
are  made  of  each  program.  Every  detail  of  their  record 
ing  is  carefully  timed  down  to  the  fraction  of  a  second. 
One  disc  is  used  in  an  immediate  "play-back"  to  check  up 
on  the  performance  and  its  recording  and  to  detect  imper- 


RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  2   5 

fections.  Sometimes  a  performance  must  be  gone  through 
several  times  before  the  work  of  the  artists  is  pronounced 
satisfactory  in  timing,  vocal  inflection  or  musical  scoring. 
Duplicate  records  are  made  of  each  recording  until  the 
performance  is  satisfactory.  After  approval,  the  second 
wax  disc  of  a  satisfactory  performance  is  electroplated 
so  as  to  give  a  copper  negative.  This  negative  becomes  the 
master  plate  from  which  are  also  made  two  test  pressings, 
one  of  which  is  played  to  secure  confirming  approval. 

The  next  step  is  to  electroplate  the  master  plate  so 
as  to  preserve  from  wear  the  only  existing  record  of  the 
program.  This  plating  yields  what  is  known  in  the  trade 
as  the  ' 'Mother/'  a  positive.  This,  too,  is  plated  to  get  a 
negative,  resulting  in  what  is  called  the  stamper,  from 
which  are  made  the  necessary  number  of  positive  or  play 
ing  discs  of  a  composition  material.  These  final  discs 
are  furnished  to  the  stations  which  are  to  broadcast  the 
program. 

How  are  transcriptions  broadcast? — Transcriptions  are 
placed  on  the  turntables  in  the  station  studio  and  their 
playing  is  supervised  by  skilled  operators.  The  transcrip 
tion,  which  is  usually  received  about  a  week  in  advance 
of  broadcasting  use,  has  already  been  rehearsed  and  timed 
to  determine  the  length  of  time  required  for  broadcasting 
it.  The  pick-up  attached  to  the  tone  arm  directly  picks 
up  the  sound-wave  recordings  from  the  disc  as  it  revolves 
and  transmits  them  over  the  air.  Nothing  is  heard  in  the 
studio  as  the  program  is  played.  In  the  control  room  the 
engineers  do  their  work  in  regulating  volume  just  as  they 
would  a  live-talent  broadcast. 

When  the  time  comes  for  station  announcement  on  the 
longer  broadcasts,  the  director  signals  and  the  announce 
ment  is  made.  Then  the  announcer  steps  away  from  his 
microphone  and  the  program  continues  from  the  turn 
tables.  While  nothing  of  the  program  is  being  heard  in 
the  studio,  people  listening  in  to  the  broadcast  hear  every- 

536B— 10 


6      RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  2 

thing  exactly  as  they  would  had  the  performance  been 
broadcast  immediately  as  it  was  performed  in  the  recording 
studio. 

So  marked  have  been  the  refinements  in  recording  and 
transcribing  technique  that  on  modern  equipment  it  is 
impossible  for  listeners -in  to  distinguish  between  broad 
casts  by  electrical  transcription  and  live  talent. 

Why  must  stations  announce  "electrical  transcription"? 
In  the  earlier  days  of  broadcasting,  stations  which  found 
themselves  unable,  economically,  to  finance  live-talent 
presentations  turned  to  the  playing  of  phonograph  records 
as  a  source  of  entertainment  material.  These  records, 
however,  were  easily  recognized  for  what  they  were.  They 
were  not  popular  with  listeners,  who  felt  that  if  they 
wanted  to  hear  phonograph  records,  they  could  do  so  by 
playing  them  on  their  own  machines. 

Some  time  later,  as  sound  reproduction  processes  im 
proved  under  the  impetus  of  radio  development,  a  method 
was  worked  out  for  the  making  of  records  solely  for 
broadcast  use.  The  first  sponsorship  of  this  type  of 
broadcast,  so  the  story  goes,  involved  a  program  for 
Maytag  washers. 

This  method  of  broadcast,  with  the  Maytag  campaign 
under  way,  came  up  before  the  Federal  Radio  Commis 
sion  now  called  The  Federal  Communications  Commis 
sion,  for  a  ruling.  To  avoid  any  element  of  deception,  the 
Commission  ruled  that  at  the  beginning  of  each  transcrip 
tion  program  the  station  should  announce:  "The  next 
program  comes  to  you  by  electrical  transcription  made 
exclusively  for  broadcast  purposes." 

It  also  was  required  that  at  the  close  of  the  program  an 
announcement  be  made  that  "This  program  has  come  to 
you  by  electrical  transcription  made  exclusively  for  broad 
cast  purposes." 


RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  2      7 

When  broadcast  recording  equipment  had  been  even 
further  perfected,  a  delegation  of  representatives  of  this 
phase  of  the  business  asked  the  Federal  Radio  Commis 
sion  for  a  new  ruling.  The  result  was  that  it  is  now  neces 
sary  only  to  state  once  during  a  short  program  that  it  is 
one  of  electrical  transcription.  The  announcement  must 
be  made  once  every  fifteen  minutes  on  a  longer  program. 
No  announcement  is  required  on  programs  of  two  minutes 
or  less  or  on  transcriptions  that  are  used  for  sound  effects 
only. 

No  prescribed  wording  is  compulsory.  The  require 
ment  is  that  the  words  used  must  be  such  as  to  give  the 
public  an  understanding  of  the  source  of  the  program  to 
which  it  is  listening.  Beech-Nut,  in  its  Chandu  program, 
capitalized  this  ruling  to  advantage.  In  effect,  its 
announcements  stated  that  "Chandu  is  available  to  you 
only  by  means  of  electrical  transcription." 

Can  more  than  one  advertiser  sponsor  the  same  transcrip 
tion  program  f — Already  prepared  transcriptions  can  be 
bought  in  several  ways.  They  may  be  purchased  from 
companies  that  make  them,  and  that  sell  them  individually 
to  stations  or  advertisers  for  use  on  one  station  or  for  use 
in  certain  sections.  The  buyer  has  exclusive  rights  in  the 
territory  contracted  for. 

A  station  may  use  the  transcription  as  a  sustaining 
program,  building  up  an  audience  following  for  it.  Later 
the  station  may  get  a  local  or  national  advertiser  to  sponsor 
that  program.  The  Chandu  series  is  an  instance  of  the 
use  of  ready-made  programs.  This  was  sponsored  in 
the  West  by  three  or  four  advertisers  at  different  times. 
Beech-Nut,  in  its  sponsorship,  had  exclusive  rights  east 
of  the  Mississippi  River. 

The  transcriptions  are  shipped  from  the  producers 
direct  to  the  stations.  The  signature  music  fades  in  and 
out  and  in  the  elapsing  time  the  commercial  announce 
ments  are  made.  These  are  usually  "live"  commercials. 


8       RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  2 

4.  Interesting  Dealers  in  the   Broadcast   Program. 
Much  impetus  is  given  to  the  success  of  a  program  by  the 
plans  devised  for  supplemental  or  primary  advertising  and 
the  plans  for  encouraging  dealer  tie-in  and  merchandising 
of  the  program  at  the  point  of  sale. 

While  variance  in  time  and  day  does  not  permit  the 
specific  mention  that  is  made  possible  for  network  adver 
tisers  in  their  national  copy,  spot  broadcasting  can  be  as 
effectively  advertised  in  newspaper  space  as  can  chain 
programs.  All  that  is  necessary  is  to  supply  a  plate, 
which  can  be  dropped  into  the  space  allowed  in  newspaper 
copy,  for  calling  the  public's  attention  to  the  broadcast 
scheduled  in  its  local  territory. 

One  advertiser,  his  program  about  to  go  on  the  air, 
sent  out  to  dealers  12,000  broadsides  featuring  the  event. 
In  addition,  three  types  of  letters  were  sent  to  as  many 
classes  of  dealers  outlining  the  broadcast  and  urging  them 
to  tie  in.  Stations  were  invited  to  send  in  lists  of  dealers 
in  their  territories  in  order  that  these  dealers  could  be 
written  to  and  made  conscious  of  the  significance  of  the 
local  advertising  to  them. 

5.  Salesmen    Influenced    by    Broadcasting. — It    is 

important  to  create  and  keep  alive  the  enthusiasm  of  sales 
men  in  the  broadcast  campaign.  If  they  are  alert  and  on 
the  job,  they  will  see  to  it  that  their  dealers  keep  the 
product  on  display  so  that  it  will  serve  as  a  reminder 
message  when  the  customer  who  has  listened  to  the  pro 
gram  enters  the  store. 

6.  Methods  of  Advertising  a  Program. — Some  of  the 
various  ways  to  advertise  and  merchandise  a  program 
are  given  in  the  following  list. 

Newspaper  advertising  of  a  local  broadcast. 

Business-paper  advertising  of  a  broadcast  series,  which 
can  list  the  type  of  program  and  the  number  and  names 
of  stations. 


RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  2      9 

Letters  to  jobbers,  salesmen,  dealers  and,  on  occasion, 
listeners. 

Broadsides. 

Booklets,  for  distribution  through  the  trade  to  con 
sumers. 

Postcards. 

Blotters,   to  feature   the  program   or  for  announce 
ment  and  reminder  messages. 

House  magazines. 
Novelties. 

Enlarged  telegrams  and  radiograms. 
Counter  displays 
Samples. 

Window  displays. 

Stickers  and  inserts  for  use  with  regular  mail  or  ship 
ments  of  goods. 

Letterheads,  when  specially  designed  to  list  the  stations 
being  used  in  a  campaign. 

Car  cards. 

7.  Use  of  Premium  Offers. — The  experience  of  a  food 
advertiser  with  premium  offers  has  convinced  him  that 
such  offers  are  not  imperative  at  any  time.  Circum 
stances,  however,  may  make  an  offer  desirable  as  a  supple 
mentary  help  for  any  of  the  following  purposes : 

To  draw  mail  in  order  to  gauge  program  popularity; 

to  get  names  of  prospects;  to  determine  average  type 

of  listener. 

To  test  scope  of  station  coverage. 

To  pull  actual  sales  results. 

To  force  distribution  by  heading  people  into  dealers' 

stores. 

It  is  the  experience  of  another  spot  advertiser,  in  the 
cosmetic  field,  that  offers  on  the  air  which  involve  enclo 
sure  of  money  do  not  pull  so  well  as  similar  offers  in 
periodical  copy.  At  the  same  time,  it  is  his  belief  that 
the  doubling  of  coupon  inquiries  from  his  magazine 
advertising  is  due  to  his  inclusion  of  spot  broadcasting. 


10     RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  2 

Women  who  would  not  take  the  time  to  write  after  a 
broadcast,  later  see  the  published  coupon  offer  and  are 
reminded  again  to  make  the  request — when  it  is  easier  to  do 
so. 

8.  Guaranteeing  the  Broadcast. — Each  station,  upon 
request,  will  submit  an  affidavit  as  to  the  time  the  pro 
gram  went  on,  the  time  it  went  off,  name  of  the  announcer 
and,  sometimes,  name  of  the  engineer.     This  affidavit  is 
a  transcript  from  the  station  log.     Also,  a  sponsor's  sales 
men  or  distributors  can  be  instructed  to  check  up  and  see 
whether  a  broadcast  goes  through  as  planned.     In  addi 
tion,  there  are  checking  bureaus  which  have  people  in  every 
territory  to  report  on  program  broadcasts. 

One  advertiser  who  checks  up  his  broadcasts  with  his 
distributors  has  found  out  that  good  dealers  in  certain 
locations  did  not  get  the  full  benefit  of  radio  programs  from 
stations  that  were  supposed  to  give  those  particular  towns 
good  coverage.  With  information  derived  by  careful 
checking  it  is  possible  to  strengthen  the  campaign  either  by 
a  change  in  stations  or  the  addition  of  stations  to  blanket 
the  weak  spots. 

9.  Preparation  of  a  Broadcast. — The  steps  in  prepar 
ing  a  series  of  spot  broadcasts  are  as  follows : 

1.  Creation  of  the  idea. 

2.  Tie-in  with  other  merchandising  activities. 

3.  Development  of  the  program. 

4.  Release  to  the  public. 

The  idea  may  originate  with  the  advertising  agency, 
the  advertiser,  or  it  may  come  from  some  outside  source. 
From  conception  to  the  broadcast  show,  the  following  has 
to  be  done : 

A  list  must  be  made  of  the  markets  to  be  covered  by  the 
contemplated  broadcasts.  Distribution  set-up  may  deter 
mine  what  these  markets  will  be  or  they  may  be  dictated 


RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  2     11 

by  a  particular  distribution  problem  (perhaps  competitive) 
existing  in  one  or  a  number  of  markets. 

The  building-up  of  the  program  involves  the  writing 
of  script,  the  selection  of  musical  numbers,  the  casting  of 
talent,  the  direction  of  rehearsals  and  every  detail  that 
enters  into  the  making  of  a  finished  continuity,  or  scenario. 

The  buying  of  time  usually  is  done  by  the  agency  which 
also  selects  the  stations  which  best  fit  into  the  plan  in  the 
territories  to  be  covered.  Purchase  of  time  can  be  made 
through  stations  direct,  through  station  representatives, 
through  time-brokers  or  the  local  (spot)  broadcasting 
subsidiaries  or  departments  of  the  networks. 

In  advance  of  broadcasts,  plans  should  be  worked  out 
for  merchandising  the  series  to  salesmen  and  the  trade,  and 
for  advertising  the  feature  to  the  public. 

The  guides  to  the  selection  of  spot  broadcasting  sta 
tions  are  as  follows : 

(a)    Wave  length  and  frequency. 

(6)    Coverage  as  determined  by  signal  strength  tests  and 
audience  surveys. 

(c)  Popularity  and  general  acceptance  of  station. 

(d)  Program  structure  in  comparison  with  other  stations 
in  community. 

(e)  Time  available. 

(/)    Previous  results  with  a  station. 

(gr)    If  electrical  transcriptions  are  used,  the  facilities  and 
ability  for  excellence  in  their  handling. 

(h)    If  a  live-talent  program  is  used,  availability  and  quality 
of  talent. 

(i)    Ownership  and  its  influence  on  management  of  station, 
(j)    Merchandising  service  cooperation. 
(k)    Facility  for  giving  program  publicity. 

10.  Handling  the  Commercial  Credit. — In  connec 
tion  with  broadcasting,  the  term  commercial  credit  (some 
times  shortened  to  commercial)  is  applied  to  that  part  of 


12     RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  2 

the  broadcast  which  contains  the  advertising  message 
by  which  the  sponsor  and  his  business  is  connected  with 
the  broadcast  as  a  whole,  and  thus  obtains  credit  for 
furnishing  the  entertainment.  Most  advertisers  prefer 
to  have  their  commercial  credits  delivered  by  electrical 
transcription.  This  assures  uniformity.  As  one  adver 
tiser  who  uses  seventy-eight  stations  points  out,  he  does 
not  want  a  half -hundred  or  more  varying  interpretations 
of  his  carefully  worked  out  advertising  message.  Empha 
sis,  inflection,  pause  or  the  personality  of  an  announcer,  as 
conveyed  by  his  voice,  may  greatly  change  the  import 
of  an  announcement. 

There  are  instances,  however,  where  it  is  desirable  to 
localize  the  commercial  credit.  It  may  be  that  an  adver 
tiser  wants  to  test  a  premium  offer,  he  may  want  to  men 
tion  local  distributors,  to  read  testimonials  of  local 
customers,  to  mention  a  price  which  varies  with  certain 
territories.  The  flexibility  that  comes  with  commercial 
credits  handled  by  station  announcers  is  especially  advan 
tageous  in  handling  such  special  problems. 

11.  Desirable  Length  for  Commercial  Credit. — Inge 
nuity  and  common  sense  are  the  best  guides  in  deter 
mining  the  length  and  the  nature  of  the  commercial 
credit.  A  very  brief  message  can  be  distasteful  if  it  is 
blatant.  Again,  if  strategy  is  used,  the  advertiser  can  keep 
his  name  or  that  of  his  product  before  the  public  nat 
urally  and  without  offense.  Even  on  so  brief  a  broadcast 
as  a  time  announcement,  Bulova  Watch  gets  its  name 
over  in  a  logical  tie-in. 

Sometimes  the  selling  point  of  a  product  can  be  enter 
tainingly  put  over  by  the  talent.  For  example,  De  Soto 
in  a  five-minute  transcription  employed  the  aid  of  the 
master  of  ceremonies  and  an  orchestra  conductor  to 
portray  graphically  how  much  difference  there  is  between 
a  De  Soto  and  other  cars.  The  leader  directed  only  a 


RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  2     13 

part  of  the  orchestra,  then  added  four  more  pieces,  making 
a  complete  orchestra.  The  leader  then  drove  home  the 
comparison. 

In  the  matter  of  commercial  credits  the  same  factors 
must  be  weighed  for  spot  broadcasting  as  in  the  case  of 
chain  broadcasting.  No  set  standards  can  be  prescribed. 
Everything  depends  upon  the  way  the  commercial  credit 
is  written,  spoken  and  placed  in  the  program.  When 
ever  the  question  of  length  is  raised  by  clients  of  one 
station  executive,  he  answers,  "As  long  as  you  would  be 
willing  to  listen  to  over  your  own  radio,  provided  the 
message  was  not  your  own." 

12.  Frequency  of  Broadcasts. — Obviously,  broadcasts 
should  be  as  frequent  as  the  advertiser  thinks  is  necessary 
to  do  a  good  job,  with  due  consideration  of  the  amount 
of  money  he  is  prepared  to  spend.       There  seems  to  be  a 
general  opinion  that  as  broadcasts  decrease  in  length  of 
time,  they  should  be  given  more  frequently.     Hour  and 
half-hour  schedules  can  go  on  weekly,  but  many  quarter- 
hour  broadcasts  go  on  more  than  once  a  week.     Similarly 
five-minute  broadcasts  generally  should  be  used  several 
times  a  week  so  as  not  to  have  too  long  a  break  between 
broadcasts. 

The  records  of  85  stations  showed  that  22  advertisers 
used  spot  announcements  five  times  per  month;  13,  ten 
times;  13,  fifteen  times;  5,  twenty  times;  22,  thirty  times; 
3,  fifty  times;  and  7,  one  hundred  times.  The  number  of 
monthly  spot  announcements  over  one  station  has  run  as 
high  as  581  for  the  Curtis  Candy  Company. 

13.  Best  Day  for  Announcements. — People  do  not 
turn  on  their  radios  merely  because  it  happens  to  be 
Tuesday    or    Friday.     Nevertheless,    some    advertisers 
advance  reasons  for  the  preference  of  one  day  over  another. 
One,  for  example,  aims  to  select  a  night  which  he  thinks 


14  RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  2 

attracts  a  larger  radio  following  because  of  the  major 
programs  that  are  regularly  broadcast  on  that  evening. 
Another  advertiser  studies  local  customs  and  endeavors  to 
buy  time  on  the  night  which  is  customarily  the  maid's 
night  out.  He  also  watches  to  see  that  no  regularly 
scheduled  community  event  will  take  people  out  of  their 
homes  at  the  time  he  is  trying  to  reach  them. 

The  two  factors  given  most  important  consideration  are 
those  of  community  custom,  and  the  article  or  service  the 
program  is  trying  to  sell.  For  example,  if  the  sponsor  is 
a  wearing-apparel  advertiser  whose  product  appeals  to  the 
greater  number  of  housewives  who  do  their  own  house 
work,  then,  in  the  opinion  of  one  advertiser,  Monday 
(universal  washday)  would  be  one  of  the  poorest  days  of 
the  week  to  broadcast,  and  Tuesday  about  the  best. 

14.  The  Best  Time. — The  most  desirable  time  for  an 
announcement  depends  largely  on  the  type  of  audience 
to  be  reached.  A  good  illustration  is  furnished  by  the 
Caterpillar  Tractor  Company,  which  broadcast  very  early 
in  the  morning  so  as  to  reach  the  farmer  while  he  was  at 
breakfast.  A  fifteen-minute  live-talent  program  was 
offered  and  it  included  experience  stories  of  Caterpillar 
tractor  users  in  the  immediate  territory  of  the  station 
from  which  the  broadcast  was  made. 

The  advertising  manager  of  Dunn  &  McCarthy,  Inc., 
has  found  that  advertising  for  Enna  Jettick  shoes, 
addressed  to  women,  gets  its  largest  audience  in  cities, 
from  8:45  a.m.,  to  9:15  a.m. 

Banks,  which  presumably  aim  to  reach  the  head  of 
the  house  when  he  is  home  or  which  choose  to  address  the 
family  as  a  unit,  show  a  strong  preference  for  evening 
broadcasts.  A  survey  of  the  hours  selected  by  banking 
institutions  shows  that  among  fifty-one,  all  but  eight 
broadcast  in  the  evening.  Five  of  the  eight  use  morning 
hours,  the  remaining  three  broadcast  in  the  afternoon. 


RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  2     15 

While  it  is  conceded  that  the  daytime  affords  a  large 
feminine  audience,  its  character  changes  considerably 
between  morning  and  afternoon.  During  the  morning, 
the  average  woman  listener  is  most  likely  to  be  a  house 
wife,  occupied  with  the  domestic  plans  of  the  day,  with 
cooking  and  cleaning.  Her  interest  then  is  in  things  that 
have  to  do  with  the  home  and  the  family.  In  the  after 
noon,  however,  she  is  much  more  herself,  interested  in  her 
own  person,  a  social  being.  Then  she  is  more  receptive  to 
messages  that  have  more  to  do  with  her  person. 

One  spot  broadcaster,  as  the  mid-summer  season 
approaches,  has  found  it  desirable  to  shift  the  time  to 
later  hours,  in  the  belief  that  many  people  do  not  turn  on 
their  radios  until  after  dark. 

The  value  of  time  placement,  in  the  opinion  of  many 
advertising  executives,  is  greatly  influenced  by  the 
popularity  of  the  sponsored  or  sustaining  program  imme 
diately  preceding. 

The  most  desirable  time,  from  the  standpoint  of  size 
of  audience,  is  during  the  evening  hours.  In  addition,  late 
afternoon  hours  in  the  far  west  are  popular  because  of  the 
earlier  (on  local  time)  reception  of  outstanding  network 
programs  that  are  being  broadcast  on  eastern  standard 
time. 

15.  Some  Spot  Experience. — Following  are  given  brief 
descriptions  of  broadcasting  methods  that  have  been  used 
successfully  by  well  known  advertisers.  These  experiences 
furnish  information  that  should  be  of  value  to  all  who 
contemplate  the  use  of  radio  in  their  business. 

Richard  Hudnut,  New  York,  at  one  time  broadcast  a 
series  of  fifteen-minute  programs  over  four  stations,  five 
times  a  week.  A  lipstick  and  eyebrow  combination, 
specially  prepared  for  this  series,  was  offered  free  on  receipt 
of  the  white  protective  seal  that  covers  the  package  of 
Hudnut  face  powder.  Listeners  were  asked  to  send  their 


16    RADIO  BKOADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  2 

requests  to  the  station  to  which  they  had  been  listening, 
and  this  station  forwarded  the  requests  to  the  Hudnut 
office. 

Benjamin  Moore  &  Company,  New  York,  makers  of 
Muresco  wall  finish  and  paint,  provide  an  instance  illus 
trating  how  spot  broadcasting  may  be  used  to  supplement 
a  network  program.  On  the  network,  the  company  fea 
tured  a  radio  character,  a  woman  who  talks  on  home 
decoration.  In  several  cities,  including  Rochester;  Char 
lotte,  N.  C.;  Minneapolis-St.  Paul;  Richmond,  Va.;  Des 
Moines  and  Kansas  City,  Mo.,  this  advertiser  used  live 
talent  in  spot  broadcasts  of  programs  employing  the  same 
material  and  continuity  as  the  chain  broadcast.  The 
company  also  supplied  its  fifteen  salesmen  with  portable 
receiving  sets  and  instructed  each  salesman  to  be  in  a 
dealer's  store  at  broadcasting  time,  plug  in  the  set,  and 
bring  the  program  to  the  dealer.  Thus  they  made  sure 
that  the  salesman  would  hear  the  broadcasts,  and  that  the 
dealers'  interest  in  them  would  be  stimulated. 

Another  advertiser  is  emphatic  in  his  declaration  that  the 
program  is  second  in  importance  to  getting  the  right  time. 
His  company's  program  appears  over  nearly  100  stations 
and  brings  varying  results,  although  the  factor  of  the 
entertainment  is  a  fixed  quantity.  He  feels  that  nothing 
offered  the  public  as  an  inducement  to  buy  a  product 
promotes  that  product  so  well  as  a  sample.  The  next  best 
offer,  from  the  manufacturer's  point  of  advantage,  he 
believes,  is  a  sample  of  some  other  product  in  the  line. 
Every  sample  offer  made  in  this  advertiser's  broadcasts 
has  been  and  will  continue  to  be  a  product  made  by  the 
company. 

The  B  or  den  Company,  Cheese  Division,  New  York, 
developed  a  high-class  program  of  live  talent  for  a  thirteen- 
week  series  of  broadcasts  in  Washington,  D.  C.  The 
purpose  of  the  campaign  was  to  obtain  better  distribution. 


RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  2     17 

In  advance  of  the  first  broadcast,  an  advertising  executive 
of  the  company  and  a  representative  of  its  advertising 
agency  went  to  Washington  and  met  with  dealers  and 
wholesalers  to  whom  the  plans  were  outlined.  Merchan 
dising  of  the  program  was  accomplished  by  use  of  window 
and  counter  displays  and  painted  signs  on  trucks.  The 
program  also  was  advertised  in  newspapers.  The  Com 
pany  is  reported  to  have  gained  a  marked  improvement  in 
distribution  through  retail  outlets. 

The  Bulova  Watch  Company,  New  York,  veteran  spot 
advertiser,  at  one  time  used  close  to  200  stations,  sponsor 
ing  more  than  300  time  signals  daily.  Its  purchase  of 
time  on  stations  varied  from  about  ten  seconds  to  one 
minute.  The  length  of  the  announcement  varies  from 
fifteen  words,  for  example,  "9  P.  M.,  Bulova,  B-U-L-0-V-A, 
watch  time,"  through  other  fractional  periods  of  a  minute, 
up  to  100  words  in  a  one-minute  announcement. 

Obviously,  even  in  the  longest  announcement,  the 
company  cannot  talk  about  its  many  models  of  watches. 
It  will  feature  one  watch  at  a  time,  usualty  changing  copy 
every  two  weeks.  In  this  way,  perhaps  six  watches  will 
be  featured  through  the  year.  To  tie  in  with  the  broad 
casts,  jewelers  are  furnished  with  newspaper  mats,  three 
and  four-color  postcards,  folders  and  window  displays  for 
use  in  featuring  these  watches. 

The  Reo  Motor  Car  Company,  Lansing,  Mich.,  in  intro 
ducing  its  new  Self-shifter  automobile  found  spot  broad 
casting  effective.  In  the  preparation  of  the  series,  the 
Company  had  the  following  objectives: 

1.  To  cover  the  territories  where  it  knew  Reo  business 
was  available,  at  the  least  possible  expenditure. 

2.  To  select  time  on  stations  which  it  knew  would  be 
listened  to  by  a  good  following. 

3.  To  select  enough  stations  to  give  overlapping  cov 
erage. 


18    RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  2 

Use  of  Rotating  Principle. — One  company  makes  use  of 
the  rotating  principle  in  spot  broadcasting.  It  employs  a 
staff  of  trained  experts  who  travel  from  city  to  city.  Each 
woman  spends  about  a  month  in  a  city,  during  which  time 
she  is  featured  on  five-minute  programs  over  the  local 
broadcasting  station.  At  the  conclusion  of  the  broadcasts, 
people  are  invited  to  send  in  to  the  station  questions  about 
problems  they  might  have.  The  speaker  also  announces 
that  after  the  broadcast,  which  is  usually  around  nine  in 
the  morning,  she  will  be  available  in  one  of  the  retail  stores 
in  the  city,  from  10  A.  M.  to  4  P.  M. 

A  company  salesman  makes  his  headquarters  in  the 
city  in  which  the  broadcasts  are  being  held  and  works  his 
territory  from  that  point  during  the  month.  Both  he  and 
the  speaker  then  move  on  to  the  next  point  from  which 
the  monthly  program  is  to  be  conducted.  With  this  type 
of  program,  this  advertiser  personalizes  his  sales  promotion 
workers.  Newspaper  advertising  is  used  to  advertise 
both  the  product  and  the  radio  program. 

Another  adaptation  of  the  rotating  principle  is  the 
campaign  conducted  several  years  ago  by  an  advertiser 
who  employed  a  combination  of  live  talent  and  electrical 
transcription.  The  program  was  featured  as  a  series  of 
six  broadcasts.  It  included  six  talks  by  women  who  were 
authorities  on  home  furnishing,  cooking,  cosmetics,  home 
budgeting  and  kindred  subjects  of  interest  to  women. 
Entertainment  was  by  electrical  transcription,  which 
preceded  and  followed  the  personal  talk  from  the  studio. 
Each  broadcast  prepared  the  way  for  the  next. 

The  Beech-Nut  Packing  Company,  Canajoharie,  N,  F., 
broadcasting  the  Chandu  program  is  one  of  the  outstand 
ing  successful  users  of  electrical  transcription.  Its  total 
mail  inquiries  over  a  twelve-month  period  are  reported  to 
have  exceeded  700,000  requests  for  the  magic  premiums 
which  were  offered  on  receipt  of  the  required  evidence  of 


RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  2     19 

purchase  of  Beech-Nut  products.  The  purpose  behind 
these  premium  offers  is  not  to  gauge  the  scope  of  the  listen 
ing  audience,  although  the  number  of  requests  does  serve 
as  a  casual  guide.  Premiums  are  employed  as  a  wedge  to 
get  distribution  and  to  offset  any  attempts  on  the  part  of 
dealers  to  substitute  or  discontinue  the  company's  pro 
ducts. 

The  success  of  the  Chandu  program  is  credited  to  its 
being  a  program  that  had  a  basic  appeal  to  children. 
Because  it  combined  serial,  mystery,  romance,  travel  and 
foreign  lure,  it  had  a  definite  appeal  to  adults  as  well. 
Equally  important  in  making  the  program  effective  in 
promoting  sales,  it  is  stated,  the  merchandising  work  done 
by  the  Beech-Nut  sales  organization  in  developing  and 
keeping  alive  the  enthusiasm  of  the  trade  for  the  program. 
With  the  discontinuance  of  the  Chandu  program,  the  com 
pany  started  another  broadcast  featuring  the  character, 
Red  Davis.  This  series  dealt  with  the  doings  of  an  adoles 
cent  boy.  Both  network  and  spot  broadcasting  were  used. 

In  preparing  these  programs,  a  performance  is  held 
about  two  weeks  before  each  chain  broadcast.  Electrical 
transcriptions  are  made  of  this  so  that  the  records  can  be 
delivered  to  the  stations  on  the  spot  list  in  time  for  them 
to  go  on  the  air  the  same  day  as  the  chain  broadcast  per 
formance.  It  is  reasoned  that  in  the  area  where  networks 
are  used,  time  on  the  desired  stations  can  be  bought  more 
economically  than  would  be  the  case  if  time  were  pur 
chased  individually  from  each  station.  Conversely,  in 
the  area  where  spot  broadcasting  is  done,  the  time  on  the 
stations  used,  because  of  the  long  distance  between  points 
and  the  toll  charges  involved,  can  be  bought  more  eco 
nomically  by  selecting  the  stations  individually  to  give 
the  company  the  coverage  needed. 

The  Great  Atlantic  &  Pacific  Tea  Company  operates 
under  executive  divisions,  determined  geographically. 
These  are  further  sub-divided  into  territorial  units.  Any 


20    RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  2 

of  the  units  wishing  to  add  spot-broadcasting  to  their  list 
of  mediums  can  do  so  without  bothering  to  ask  organiza 
tion  headquarters. 

The  lodent  Chemical  Company,  Detroit,  before  going  on 
the  air  with  a  spot  broadcasting  campaign  which  was  to 
include  a  large  list  of  stations,  first  tested  its  program  in 
four  widely  separated  markets.  These  were  New  York, 
St.  Paul,  Cincinnati  and  Kansas  City,  Mo.  It  was  felt 
that  a  study  of  the  response  would  provide  a  fairly  accurate 
guide  to  the  reception  which  the  program  would  get. 
After  the  campaign  was  under  way,  other  stations  were 
added,  and  then  a  jump  was  made  over  the  Far  West  to 
the  Pacific  Coast  which  was  covered  by  the  addition  of 
more  stations.  By  such  means  advertisers  may  take 
advantage  of  the  flexibility  of  spot  broadcasting  to  extend 
their  campaigns  into  selected  sales  markets. 

Chevrolet,  at  one  time,  conducted  a  spot  campaign  that 
aroused  considerable  comment  because  of  its  use  of  167 
stations.  Dealers  cooperated  in  the  expense.  At  first, 
135  stations  were  selected,  radio  coverage  being  plotted 
much  as  a  newspaper  campaign  over  the  same  area  would 
have  been  plotted.  It  was  decided  that  if  any  group  of 
dealers  wanted  a  station  added  to  the  list,  it  would  be 
added  without  question,  provided  the  station  was  ade 
quately  equipped  to  handle  electrical  transcriptions. 
After  nine  months  of  an  open  minded  policy  on  additional 
stations,  only  thirty-two  additions  were  made  at  the 
request  of  dealers.  All  but  two  of  the  total  number  of 
stations  broadcast  in  the  evening  and  these  two  exceptions 
were  in  agricultural  communities  where  they  were  timed 
to  reach  farmers  at  their  noonday  dinner. 

G.  P.  A.  Radiator  Glycerine,  as  advertised  in  spot 
announcements  by  Glycerine  Producers  Association,  New 
York,  furnishes  an  excellent  example  of  what  can  be 
accomplished  in  timing  copy  so  that  each  announcement 


RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  2    21 

will  fit  in  with  weather  conditions  at  the  time  of  broadcast. 
The  cast  of  characters  in  this  one-minute  radio  show  has 
been  described  as  an  automobile  horn,  a  voice,  and  the 
weather. 

The  series  was  broadcast  over  seventy-five  stations 
from  one  to  three  times  daily.  The  script  covered  a 
weather  report,  the  blast  of  an  auto  horn,  and  fifty  words 
of  commercial.  To  get  a  standardized  horn  blast  that 
would  be  uniform  in  sound  throughout  the  country,  an 
electrical  transcription  was  made  with  sixteen  sets  of 
grooves  to  take  care  of  wear  and  tear  so  that  when  one  set 
wore  out,  another  standardized  "blast"  would  be  immedi 
ately  available.  A  script  book  was  sent  to  each  station. 
This  contained  eighteen  different  announcements,  together 
with  detailed  instructions  as  to  their  use.  Tabs  divided 
the  book  as  follows:  "How  to  select  announcements"; 
classifications  of  the  eighteen  announcements  under 
Before  First  Freeze,  First  Freeze  Forecast,  Between  First 
and  Second  Freeze,  All  Other  Freezes,  Warm  spells 
Between  Freezes,  and  Extreme  cold. 

After  receiving  the  day's  weather  report  and  forecast 
from  its  local  weather  bureau  or  newspaper  report,  the 
station  determined  which  of  the  six  weather  groups  suited 
that  day's  weather.  It  then  selected  an  announcement 
from  that  group.  If  there  were  five  announcements  in 
one  group,  they  were  used  in  order  and  the  process  was 
repeated  as  many  times  as  required  by  local  weather  con 
ditions. 

The  Greyhound  Management  Co.,  Cleveland,  Ohio,  bus 
transportation,  used  spot  announcements  to  sell  definite 
holiday  or  other  excursions  where  special  fares  were 
announced  over  the  air. 

The  Loose-Wiles  Biscuit  Company,  Long  Island  City, 
N.  Y.,  used  nineteen  stations  in  selected  territories  with 
programs  of  interest  to  children.  Sunshine  Biscuits, 
particularly  Sunshine  Krispy  Crackers,  were  advertised. 

S36B— 11 


22    RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  2 

These  programs  were  particularly  well  merchandized  to  the 
trade.  Store  cards  on  which  the  broadcasts  were  featured 
were  offered  to  dealers.  In  addition,  a  four-page  tabloid 
newspaper,  Sunshine  Radio  News,  was  distributed  to 
dealers  in  100,000  lots.  This  newspaper  announced  the 
fact  that  Loose- Wiles  was  going  on  the  air,  contained 
pictures  from  the  program,  and  included  details  of  the 
Sunshine  Discoverers'  Club. 

Buick  Motors — "Walk  into  any  Buick  salesroom  and 
learn  of  the  extraordinary  allowance  that  will  be  made  on 
your  car."  This  was  the  substance  of  three  one-minute 
spot  announcements  that  were  used  in  a  campaign  by 
Buick  Motors  some  time  ago.  The  announcements  were 
made  daily,  twice  during  the  day  and  once  at  night,  over 
ninety-six  stations.  The  campaign  aimed  to  move  dealers7 
stocks  when  the  now  discontinued  Marquette  line  was 
being  liquidated.  It  is  an  example  of  the  timely  use  of 
spot  news.  Results,  it  is  stated,  brought  20,000  people 
into  dealers'  showrooms  and,  during  the  first  week,  stepped 
up  sales  from  400  a  week  to  more  than  1,200. 

The  Vick  Chemical  Company,  Greensboro,  N.  C.,  used 
one-minute  spot  announcements  in  the  introductory  cam 
paign  for  Voratone,  and  again  in  a  seasonal  news  tie-up 
explaining  the  use  of  its  products  in  guarding  against  colds. 
On  one  occasion,  seventy-two  stations  were  used  with  two 
broadcasts  during  the  day  and  one  in  the  evening.  On 
another,  sixty-six,  stations  were  used  with  one  announce 
ment  daily  in  the  daytime  and  one  in  the  evening.  The 
two  series  were  run  intermittently,  being  dropped  for  a 
week  or  so  now  and  then  and  renewed.  Under  these  cir 
cumstances  the  placing  of  the  spot  was  left  to  the  stations. 
The  announcements  were  in  the  nature  of  semi-news 
matters,  and  tied  in  with  local  conditions  wherever  possible. 

The  commercials,  read  by  station  announcers,  for 
example,  would  state  that  there  were  rumors  of  increasing 
"flu"  cases  in  the  territory  and  that  the  public  health 


RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  2    23 

authorities  were  recommending  precautionary  methods. 
People  were  told  not  to  be  alarmed  and  that  one  way  of 
warding  off  colds  was  the  use  of  Vick's  Nose  Drops. 

The  Rumford  Company,  Rumford,  R.  I.,  using  electrical 
transcriptions  on  about  fifty  stations,  is  an  outstanding 
spot  advertiser.  Its  early  use  of  broadcasting  was 
limited  to  participation  in  cooking-school  programs. 
Eventually,  the  decision  was  made  to  expand  its  radio 
activities  and  since  that  time  the  company  has  been 
sponsoring  its  own  cooking  school  programs. 

Fifteen-minute  programs  are  broadcast  twice  a  week. 
Introductory  talks  vary.  They  may  cover  general  dis 
cussions  about  products  in  the  home  and,  at  other  times, 
talk  about  Rumford  baking  products.  Listeners  are 
invited  to  write  in  for  recipes  mentioned  during  the  pro 
gram,  or  for  booklets  offered.  Such  offers  are  natural  tie- 
ins  with  the  merchandising  activities  of  the  company  and 
are  not  artificially  pushed  as  a  gauge  to  determine  the  size 
of  the  audience  or  the  pulling  power  of  any  one  broadcast. 

Over  the  course  of  several  years,  little  consideration  has 
been  given  to  changing  the  type  of  program,  so  satisfied 
is  the  sponsor  with  its  success.  In  one  instance  where  the 
desirability  of  a  change  came  up,  local  announcers  were 
given  instructions  to  ask  whether  a  different  type  of  pro 
gram  was  wanted.  The  percentage  of  listeners  that 
favored  a  change  was  so  small  that  the  investigation  never 
went  any  further. 

Rumford  has  made  extensive  use  of  imitation  theater 
tickets  in  merchandising  its  broadcast  series  through 
grocery  retailers.  These  tickets,  inviting  people  to  A-l 
seats,  are  distributed  by  salesmen  in  lots  of  50  and  100. 
A  hanger  display,  in  the  shape  of  a  microphone,  also  is 
distributed.  Each  one  carries  the  call  letters  of  the  sta 
tions  in  the  territory  where  it  is  to  be  used.  Salesmen 
take  care  of  the  work  of  putting  up  these  hangers  and 
checking  to  keep  them  on  display. 


24    RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  2 


16.  Checking-Points  on  Spot  Broadcasting. — In  mak 
ing  a  decision  as  to  the  advisability  of  using  spot  broadcast 
ing,  the  following  points  should  be  considered  in  order 
that  advantage  may  be  taken  of  the  conditions  that  are 
the  most  favorable  in  each  case. 

Flexibility.  This  covers  more  than  the  picking 
of  individual  markets,  or  stations.  It  enables  certain 
changes  either  in  program,  or  the  commercial  credit 
that  may  seem  advisable  because  of  differences  in 
markets  or  time  zones.  Also  it  makes  possible  gradual 
or  wide  extension  of  the  campaign  to  include  additional 
stations. 

Adjustment  of  weight  or  intensity  (circulation)  with 
cost  that  is  commensurate  with  distribution,  market 
and  competition. 

Ability  to  state  local  retail  prices  where  price  men 
tion  is  permitted.  For  example,  automobile  adver 
tisers  may  be  able  to  mention  delivered  price. 

Adaptation  of  commercial  credits  to  local  conditions. 
Often  dealers'  names  can  be  mentioned  or  testimonials 
of  local  users  read. 

Possibilities  afforded  by  recordings.  Personal 
appearance  of  talent  at  time  of  broadcast  unnecessary. 
Several  programs  recorded  at  one  time  result  in 
economy  and  continuity. 

Possibility  of  picking  stations  on  individual 
merits. 

Possibility  of  Weighing  the  cost  of  spot  rates  and 
recordings  or  local  talent  charges,  against  chain  rates 
and  toll  charges.  Combination  of  chain  in  some  sec 
tions  and  spot  in  others  may  sometimes  be  preferable  to 
either  chain  or  spot  exclusively. 

Possibility  of  staggering  time  of  broadcast  over 
several  stations  so  as  to  duplicate  coverage  over  inter- 
lapping  areas  and  give  parts  of  audience  several  times  to 
catch  program. 

In  order  to  avoid  possible  difficulties  in  spot  broadcast 
ing,  careful  attention  should  be  given  to  the  following 
matters : 

If  live  talent  is  used,  the  sponsor  should  give 
detailed  instructions  as  to  direction,  so  that  the  broad 
casts  over  various  stations  will  achieve  as  much  uni- 


RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  2    25 

formity  as  possible.  Such  instructions  also  are  impor 
tant  in  regard  to  the  commercial  credits  to  be  delivered 
by  station  announcers. 

If  the  program  has  been  a  sustaining  one  or  one 
previously  sponsored  by  other  advertisers,  capitalize 
immediately  the  audience  following  of  that  program. 

If  broadcasting  is  done  from  spots  at  different 
times  on  different  days  for  certain  reasons,  these  reasons 
should  be  weighed  against  the  added  difficulties  in  mer 
chandising  the  program. 

In  judging  claims  of  coverage  or  influence  of  sta 
tions,  check  not  only  figures,  but  the  basis  on  which 
the  figures  are  arrived  at  because  there  is  still  lack  of 
uniformity  in  methods  of  determining  coverage. 

Where  transcriptions  are  used,  not  only  is  good 
recording  essential,  but  the  quality  of  reproduction  of 
that  recording  at  the  broadcasting  stations  is  of  para 
mount  importance.  Check  carefully  the  station's 
ability  to  handle  transcriptions. 

See  to  it  that  transcriptions  are  forwarded  in  ample 
time  to  allow  for  possible  delay  or  damage  in  transit. 

CHAIN  OR  NETWORK  BROADCASTING 

17.  The  Network  Broadcast. — A  spot  broadcast  is  a 
program  broadcast  only  by  the  station  where  it  originates. 
When  this  program  is  conveyed  by  wires  to  other  stations, 
and  all  stations  so  connected  broadcast  the  same  program 
simultaneously,  the  result  is  a  network  broadcast.  The 
maps,  Figs.  1  and  2,  show  how  the  various  stations  associ 
ated  with  a  network  are  linked  by  wire. 

There  is  practically  no  limit  to  the  size  to  which  a  net 
work  can  be  built,  and  it  is  a  common  occurrence  for  broad 
casters  to  use  anywhere  from  fifty  to  more  than  a  hundred 
stations,  located  throughout  the  country  in  such  a  way  as 
to  make  the  program  available  to  practically  every  radio 
home  in  the  United  States. 

The  principal  national  and  sectional  networks  have 
already  been  enumerated,  and  here  consideration  will  be 
restricted  to  the  networks  of  the  National  Broadcasting 
Company,  and  the  Columbia  Broadcasting  System. 


26    RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  2 

18.  Basic  Networks. — Each  of  the  networks  men 
tioned  is  composed  of  a  basic  group,  which  is  the  usual 
sales  unit,  and  supplementary  groups  which  may  be  added 
as  units  at  the  advertiser's  wish,  in  order  to  cover  the  areas 
in  his  distribution. 

The  basic  networks  cover  the  northeast  quarter  of  the 
United  States  where  population  is  concentrated.  The 
cities  in  which  their  stations  are  located  are  the  key  trad 
ing  centres  of  practically  any  national  advertiser's  dis 
tribution. 

The  power  of  the  stations  in  different  cities  varies 
greatly,  ranging  from  500  watts  to  50,000  and  one  station 
WLW  uses  500,000  watts.  But  the  combined  coverage 
of  all  the  stations  on  any  of  these  three  basic  networks 
provides  primary  service  to  almost  all  parts  of  the  north 
east  quarter  of  the  country.  Similarly,  the  supplementary 
networks  provide  coverage  of  other  sections  of  the  country, 
though  not  with  the  same  degree  of  intensity. 

The  networks  of  the  National  Broadcasting  Company 
and  the  Columbia  Broadcasting  System  furnish  to  adver 
tisers  elaborate  and  costly  books  containing  large  coverage 
maps  of  the  whole  country  built  on  a  plan  similar  to  the 
WABC  map  shown  in  Fig.  3  of  Radio  Broadcasting, 
Part  1,  but  extending  over  the  United  States  and  Canada. 
Special  maps  are  provided  showing  day  time  and  evening 
listening  areas. 

These  maps  are  not  suitable  for  reproduction  in  a  text 
of  this  size,  but  the  student  who  becomes  associated  with 
any  large  general  advertiser  or  connected  with  a  nationally 
recognized  agency  can  secure,  or  at  least  examine,  such 
maps. 

The  individual  stations  composing  a  network  are  not 
all  owned  by  the  network;  in  fact,  most  of  them  are  not. 
But  all  work  on  a  uniform  basis  and  are  as  closely  associ 
ated  with  each  other  in  their  network  operation  as  if  they 
had  a  common  ownership. 


RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  2    27 

Wires  connect  these  stations  with  each  other,  so  that 
all  may  broadcast  the  same  programs.  Theoretically  it  is 
possible  to  originate  a  broadcast  on  any  station  in  the  net 
work  and  provide  it  to  all  the  others.  Actual  practice, 
however,  has  indicated  the  desirability  of  originating  pro 
grams  at  a  few  key  points,  and  therefore  each  network 
has  what  it  calls  key  stations.  For  the  N.  B.  C.  Blue 
network  the  key  station  is  WJZ,  New  York.  For  the 
N.  B.  C.  Red  network  it  is  WEAF,  New  York.  For 
Columbia,  the  key  station  is  WABC,  New  York. 

Programs  are  originated  at  other  stations  regularly, 
also  notably  in  Chicago  and  Los  Angeles,  but  the  resources, 
quality  and  variety  of  radio  talent  are  so  much  greater 
in  New  York  than  elsewhere,  that  New  York  has  become 
the  focal  point  for  radio  in  the  United  States. 

19.  The  Split  Network. — There  are  many  extensive 
organizations,  doing  a  large  volume  of  business,  which  are 
of  a  sectional  rather  than  a  national  character.  The  gaso 
line  and  oil  companies  provide  an  excellent  example  of 
this  type  of  company.  To  serve  their  broadcasting  needs 
on  a  network  basis,  the  chains  have,  upon  occasion,  split 
their  networks  to  conform  to  the  advertiser's  distribution. 
But  a  split  network  contract  always  contains  a  recapture 
clause,  enabling  the  chain  to  cancel  the  contract  before  its 
expiration  should  the  split  network  time  be  purchased  by 
an  advertiser  who  will  use  the  entire  network. 

There  are  now  so  many  broadcasters  using  the  com 
plete  basic  chains,  or  who  desire  time  on  them  and  cannot 
get  it,  that  the  split  network  arrangement  is  becoming 
continually  more  precarious  for  the  broadcaster,  and  the 
opportunity  to  purchase  a  split  network  is  diminishing  to 
the  vanishing  point.  It  is  this  circumstance,  this  excess 
of  demand  over  facilities,  that  indicates  the  approach  of  a 
time  when  another  major  network  of  national  standing 
will  be  formed. 


28    RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  2 

20.  Time  Zones  and  Rebroadcasts. — Coast-to-coast 
networks  cover  the  four  time  zones  of  the  United  States, 
and  this  must  be  taken  into  consideration  in  planning  a 
nationwide  program.  Ten  o'clock,  standard  time  in 
New  York,  is  seven  o'clock  in  Los  Angeles  and  San  Fran 
cisco,  eight  o'clock  in  Denever,  nine  o'clock  in  St.  Louis 
and  the  middle  west.  Chicago  at  present  is  on  Eastern 
standard  time. 

With  most  of  the  larger  commercial  broadcasts  originat 
ing  in  New  York,  and  planned  to  reach  radio  audiences  in 
the  eastern  and  central  time  zones  at  the  most  popular 
time,  namely,  between  seven  and  ten  thirty,  it  is  evident 
that  programs  sent  to  the  Pacific  Coast  at  the  same  time 
might  arrive  at  most  inappropriate  hours.  There  is  no 
point,  for  example,  in  having  a  program  of  primary  inter 
est  to  men  reach  Los  Angeles  at  four  or  five  o'clock  in  the 
afternoon  when  most  men  are  working  and  are  not  able 
to  hear  the  broadcast. 

Because  of  this  condition,  many  sponsors  broadcast 
the  same  program  twice  in  an  evening — once  for  eastern 
and  central  time-zone  audiences,  and  later  for  mountain 
and  Pacific  audiences. 

With  a  good  receiving  set  it  is  possible  to  hear  both 
broadcasts  on  a  night  when  the  reception  is  good.  For 
instance,  if  you  miss  Amos  'n'  Andy  at  seven,  and  you  live 
in  the  eastern  time  zone,  you  can  pick  up  the  program  at 
eleven  o'clock  from  a  far  western  station  such  as  Denver 
or  Los  Angeles.  The  two  programs,  of  course,  are 
identical. 

Rebroadcasts,  as  these  are  called,  increase  the  cost  of 
producing  the  program.  But  every  dollar  spent  for  radio 
advertising,  just  as  in  other  advertising,  is  invested  with 
the  expectation  of  obtaining  a  profitable  result.  The  extra 
dollars  required  for  a  rebroadcast  are  an  investment  in  a 
larger  and  more  responsive  audience  than  would  otherwise 
be  reached.  The  advertiser  must  balance  his  investment 


RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  2    29 

against  the  market  potentialities,  and  if  he  is  convinced 
that  he  will  get  his  money's  worth,  then  rebroadcasting  is 
desirable. 

21.  Sustaining  Programs. — At  least  one  program, 
usually  two  programs,  and  sometimes  three  or  four  are 
produced  every  operating  minute  of  the  broadcasting  day 
by  each  of  the  national  networks.  Time  not  sold  to  spon 
sors,  either  by  the  network  as  a  whole  or  by  individual  sta 
tions,  must  be  filled.  Radio  stations  are  not  permitted  to 
have  blank  spots  in  the  schedules,  and  even  if  they  were 
they  wouldn't  have  them  because  they  would  soon  lose 
their  audience.  The  American  listener  expects  to  hear 
something  when  he  turns  his  dial  to  a  given  point,  whether 
the  station  has  sold  the  time  or  not.  And  he  expects  what 
he  hears  to  be  something  he  can  enjoy.  Consequently, 
network  time  not  purchased  by  sponsors  is  filled  with  pro 
grams  furnished  at  the  expense  of  the  network.  These 
are  called  sustaining  programs. 

In  cases  where  the  complete  network  is  not  used,  the 
stations  not  employed  must  be  provided  with  sustaining 
programs.  This  results,  in  practice,  in  producing  several 
programs  simultaneously  in  the  key  studios  of  the  net 
works.  Each  station  on  a  network  pays  a  stipulated 
amount  to  the  network  for  this  sustaining  service,  and 
receives  from  the  network  a  payment  for  all  sponsored  time 
the  network  uses  on  the  station. 

From  the  standpoint  of  the  individual  station  there 
are  advantages  and  disadvantages  in  this  arrangement, 
but  the  former  outweigh  the  latter.  The  cost  of  the 
sustaining  service  is  much  less  than  the  expenditure  the 
station  would  have  to  make  in  originating  its  own  sustain 
ing  programs  for  all  unsold  periods,  and  the  quality  and 
variety  of  the  programs  is  much  superior  to  what  most 
communities  could  produce.  This  builds  audiences,  and 
it  is  audiences  that  stations  really  are  selling  to  broadcast 
advertisers. 


30    RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  2 

The  disadvantages  are  that  the  network  pays  the  sta 
tion  less  for  sponsored  time  than  the  station  would  receive 
from  a  local  sponsor;  the  most  desirable  time  on  the 
schedule  is  taken  by  the  network  and  is  therefore  not 
available  to  local  sponsors;  and  all  time  sold  to  local 
sponsors  is  subject  to  clearance  for  chain  programs  upon 
brief  notice,  making  the  position  of  the  local  broadcaster 
insecure.  He  may  be  moved  at  any  time,  and  several 
times — and  audiences  do  not  follow  these  moves  quickly. 
This  condition  creates  a  difficult  problem  for  chain  stations 
that  require  income  from  local  broadcasters  to  cover 
operating  expenses.  A  recently  established  chain  practice 
of  setting  aside  certain  periods  during  the  broadcasting 
day  when  individual  stations  may  sell  spot  broadcasting 
on  a  guaranteed-time  basis,  may  help  to  ease  this  situation. 

22.  Choice  of  Radio  Talent. — Since  the  chains  are 
required  to  provide  sustaining  programs,  they  use  these 
programs  for  the  testing  and  exhibiting  of  the  talent  under 
contract  to  their  talent  bureaus.  All  the  artists  must  be 
meritorious,  of  course,  for  the  network's  first  obligation  is 
to  provide  good  programs.  But  beyond  merit,  there  enters 
the  element  of  personality — personality  conveyed  by  the 
medium  of  sound  alone. 

Early  in  broadcasting  it  was  demonstrated  that  pleas 
ing  personalities  attract  audiences — even  though  those 
audiences  cannot  see  the  artist.  This  led  inevitably  to  the 
star  system,  just  as  it  has  in  motion  pictures,  with  salaries 
running  into  high  figures  proportioned  to  the  sponsor's 
estimate  of  the  performer's  popularity. 

Most  of  these  "star"  or  "name"  artists  have  come  to 
radio  from  other  fields.  From  the  stage,  the  movies, 
variety  houses,  from  the  newspaper  world,  and  other 
sources.  Relatively  few  have  risen  to  stardom  through 
radio  alone.  But  ability  to  project  one's  personality  arcoss 
the  footlights  or  from  the  motion  picture  screen  does  not 


RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  2    31 

by  any  means  imply  a  similar  ability  to  do  so  through  the 
microphone.  Many  dismal  and  expensive  disappoint 
ments  attest  this  truth.  Only  broadcasting,  and  the 
response  of  the  radio  audience,  determine  whether  the 
family  in  its  home  is  stirred  by  the  artist's  personality,  or 
is  not. 

Some  voices  of  no  great  distinction  as  voices  convey 
something  that  interests  and  pleases  the  listener  and 
attracts  his  attention  to  the  human  being,  rather  than  the 
voice.  Perhaps  the  hearer  writes  a  letter  to  the  performer, 
or  to  the  station  from  which  he  broadcasts,  expressing  his 
pleasure.  Many  people  do.  When  these  letters  are 
received  in  noteworthy  quantities,  the  performer's  ability 
to  command  a  radio  audience  is  demonstrated,  and  his 
value  to  the  advertiser  is  more  certain. 

23.  Star  Domination  Not  Desirable. — Using  stars  or 
"name"  artists  helps  to  build  a  sponsor's  audience  quickly, 
and  to  enlarge  that  audience  as  the  artist's  popularity 
expands.  A  drawback  that  every  advertiser  must  guard 
against,  however,  is  the  danger  that  the  program  may  be 
so  dominated  by  the  star,  in  the  listener's  mind,  that  the 
advertiser  and  his  product  or  service  are  overlooked .  When 
that  happens,  and  it  has  happened  often,  the  advertiser  is 
not  using  his  broadcasting  dollars  effectively,  and  it  is 
time  to  revise  the  program  to  raise  his  own  visibility,  or 
else  to  change  artists. 

As  in  practically  every  phase  of  advertising,  here  again 
is  a  matter  that  can  only  be  decided  by  judgment — there 
are  no  rules.  How  to  employ  the  proved  popularity  and 
audience  building  power  of  a  "name"  star,  without  losing 
the  advertising  value,  which,  after  all  is  the  sole  reason 
for  sponsoring  a  broadcast,  is  one  of  the  most  important 
problems  confronting  the  broadcaster.  Even  men  of  the 
most  extensive  experience  in  broadcasting  make  mistakes 
now  and  then,  but  their  ability  to  be  right  most  of  the 


32     RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  2 

time  is  what  gives  them  prominence  over  others.  The 
broadcast  sponsor  will  find  it  to  his  advantage  to  employ 
the  best  brains  he  can  find  to  direct  his  broadcasting. 
For  inexperienced  persons  to  decide  these  problems  cor 
rectly  would  be  only  sheerest  luck.  And  in  dealing  with 
sums  as  large  as  those  involved  in  network  broadcasting, 
there  are  too  many  elements  of  chance  already  involved 
to  justify  the  adding  of  those  that  are  dependent  on  luck. 


PROGRAM  TYPES 

24.  Audiences  and  Programs. — Every  broadcast  has 
two  audiences.  One  is  the  audience  that  the  station  or 
the  network  has  built  through  the  general  high  quality  of 
its  programs.  The  other  is  the  additional  audience 
attracted  to  a  particular  broadcast  because  of  its  inherent 
interest  to  them. 

Neither  of  these  audiences,  which  make  up  the  total 
of  listeners,  is  static.  If  the  sponsor  s  program  has  wide 
appeal,  and  a  personality  of  its  own,  the  number  of  listeners 
increases  constantly  as  word  spreads  that  the  program  is 
a  good  one  to  hear.  If  the  program  lacks  the  indefinable 
something  that  makes  it  enjoyable  and  memorable,  the 
reaction  of  the  audience  is  one  of  indifference,  and  its 
numbers  will  decline  as  other  programs  broadcast  at  the 
same  time  from  other  stations  prove  more  attractive. 
Rarely  is  a  network  program  definitely  of  no  interest  in 
these  days.  Too  many  able  people  have  contributed  to  its 
creation,  too  much  care  and  money  have  been  devoted  to 
getting  talented  artists,  for  a  program  to  be  bad.  But  in 
these  days  of  competition  for  the  ear  and  loyalty  of  the 
radio  audience,  mediocrity  is  a  danger  signal.  This  is 
not  to  imply  that  only  the  best  program  of  its  kind  can 
be  a  success.  Far  from  it,  even  if  there  could  be  found 
general  agreement  on  what  is  best.  But  there  is  some 
thing  about  radio  programs  that  defines  them  as  unerringly 


RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  2    33 

as  a  ball  player  defines  the  ability  of  a  rookie  when  he  says 
he  has  "class."  Some  programs  radiate  class.  Others 
do  not.  Those  that  have  it  prove  profitable  to  their 
sponsors,  often  in  spectacular  results. 

25.  Showmanship  Necessary. — The  employment  of 
able  talent  being  assured,  the  thing  that  gives  a  program 
class  is  showmanship.     There  is  no  way  to  define  show 
manship  acceptably.     It  includes  a  keen  sense  of  the 
dramatic;  a  precise  feeling  of  balance  and  pace;  and  an 
unerring  ability  not  only  to  do  the  right  thing  at  the  right 
time,  but  also  to  do  it  interestingly  and  entertainingly. 
Some  persons  have  a  pronounced  instinct  for  showmanship, 
and  when  this  is  amplified  by  experience,  training  and 
practice,  plus  all  that  cultivation  of  background  to  be 
derived  from  intelligent  reading  and  studying  the  great 
emotional  and  intellectual  powers  of  music,  then  those 
possessing  these  qualities  are  fitted  to  be  entrusted  with  the 
creative  end  of  radio  broadcasting,  the  creation  of  the 
program  structure,  and  the  direction  of  its  action. 

Any  type  of  program  broadcast,  even  the  most  unpre 
tentious  interlude  of  music,  can  be  made  to  sparkle  through 
real  showmanship.  The  technique,  the  labor,  the  almost 
incredible  amount  of  planning  and  rehearsing  that  go  into 
a  program  may  be  unknown  to  the  radio  audience,  but  it 
is  quick  to  appraise  the  results;  and  the  basis  of  this 
appraisal  is  the  reaction  of  the  audience  to  the  showman 
ship  invested  in  the  program. 

26.  Program  Type  Classification. — In  his  book  "A 
Decade  of  Radio  Advertising"  Dr.  Herman  S.  Hettinger 
names  nineteen  different  types  of  programs.     These  are 
(1)   Classical  music,   (2)   Semi-classical  music,   (3)   Folk 
music  and  ballads,  (4)  Variety  music,  (5)  Popular  music, 
(6)    Children's   programs,    (7)    Comedy  broadcasts,    (8) 
Dramatic  programs,  (9)  Children's  educational  programs, 
(10)     Adult  educational  programs,    (11)   News,  market 


34     RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  2 

and  weather  reports,  (12)  Religious  broadcasts,  (13) 
Sports  broadcasts,  (14)  Special  features  of  public  interest, 
(15)  Internationa]  broadcasts,  (16)  Women's  feature  pro 
grams,  (17)  Variety  programs,  (18)  Farm  programs. 

A  glance  at  this  list  reveals  that  the  types  fall  into  two 
general  classifications,  entertainment  programs  and  service 
programs.  Entertainment  programs  include  music, 
drama,  comedy,  sports,  special  features  and  variety  pro 
grams.  Service  programs  include  educational,  religious, 
news,  weather,  markets,  farm  and  women's  interests. 

The  purpose  of  the  entertainment  program  is  just  what 
its  name  suggests,  to  bring  laughter,  happiness,  enjoyment, 
release  from  cares  and  the  demands  of  our  physical  life. 
The  purpose  of  the  service  program  is  to  render  the  listener 
some  needed  service,  and  thus  contribute  directly  to  his 
mental  resources  for  the  enjoyment  of  life. 

Programs  of  both  classifications  are  popular  and  fre 
quently  a  single  advertiser  will  use  programs  of  both  classes 
or  two  different  programs  in  the  same  general  classification, 
simultaneously.  For  example,  one  manufacturer  broad 
cast  a  weekly  hour  of  symphonic  music  played  by  a  great 
symphony  orchestra;  at  the  same  time,  but  on  a  different 
day  of  the  week,  he  broadcast  a  popular  dance  orchestra 
with  a  variety  of  entertainers;  and,  concurrently,  many  of 
his  branches,  operating  as  independent  advertisers,  broad 
cast  sports  results. 

Another  example  is  that  of  a  manufacturer  of  a  break 
fast  food  who  sponsored  a  popular  dance  orchestra  with  a 
feature  singer,  which  was  straight  entertainment;  and  he 
also  sponsored  a  program  of  songs  and  stories  for  small  chil 
dren.  This  latter  program  was  unusual  in  that  its  purpose 
was  both  entertainment  and  service.  The  entertainment 
was  for  the  children ;  the  service  was  to  the  parents  who 
found  their  children  refreshed  and  relaxed  and  in  a  proper 
frame  of  mind  to  eat  their  evening  meal;  for  the  program 
was  timed  to  come  immediately  before  supper. 


RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  2    35 

Almost  any  type  of  program,  if  done  well  and  with  a 
liberal  sprinkling  of  showmanship,  will  command  a  worth 
while  audience.  But  there  are  trends  in  the  popularity  of 
program  types,  just  as  there  are  in  motion  pictures.  At 
one  time  detective  stories,  and  programs  dealing  with 
crime  detection,  win  particular  interest ;  at  another  it  is  the 
foolishness  and  drolleries  of  our  well-known  comedians 
that  captivates;  or  it  may  be  the  suave,  intricate  rythms 
and  melodies  of  our  modern  dance  orchestras.  Sym 
phonic  music,  once  considered  of  too  limited  interest  for 
the  mass  audience  a  radio  sponsor  pays  to  reach,  has 
grown  immensely  in  popularity,  thanks  not  only  to  the 
welcome  broadcasts  of  such  world  famous  groups  as  the 
Philadelphia  Orchestra,  the  New  York  Philharmonic,  the 
Detroit  Symphony;  but  also  to  the  increased  employ 
ment  of  symphonic  structure  and  orchestration  in  bands 
of  the  deliberately  popular  type. 

27.  Musical  Development  Furthered. — Radio  may 
well  be  given  much  of  the  credit  for  America's  coming  of 
age  musically.  No  longer  is  the  average  listener  respon 
sive  to  melody  alone;  no  longer  is  he  so  opinionated  in  his 
viewpoint  that  if  he  doesn't  care  for  the  tune,  "the  music 
isn't  good."  Now  he  feels  what  is  back  of  all  of  it,  even 
though  he  may  not  comprehend  it.  He  pulses  to  new 
rythms,  he  accepts  strange  harmonies,  and  he  welcomes  the 
contrast  of  dissonance.  In  short,  today  he  views  music 
with  an  open  and  avid  mind,  so  that  he  is  equally  capable 
of  appreciating  the  delicate  loveliness  of  the  Last  Rose  Of 
Summer,  and  the  brooding,  mystic,  melancholy  of  Tschai- 
kowsky's  Fifth  Symphony. 

This  raising  of  the  musical  appreciation  of  the  people 
has  opened  greater  opportunities  to  radio,  for  it  not  only 
makes  useful  whole  libraries  of  worthwhile  music  formerly 
condemned  by  the  word  "classical,"  but  it  also  furnishes 
a  real  economic  stimulus  to  the  creation  of  good  music  by 


36     RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  2 

modern  composers  of  the  so-called  "popular"  kind.  Much 
of  today's  popular  music  would  have  been  as  bewildering 
and  antagonizing  to  the  devotees  of  Alexander's  Ragtime 
Band,  as  were  Wagner's  amazing  musical  creations  to  the 
devotees  of  Bach  and  Mozart.  The  evolution  of  popular 
enjoyment  of  music,  in  the  space  of  a  few  years,  has 
brought  modern  popular  music  and  classical  music  very 
close  together. 

Singing  has  undergone  as  great  an  evolution  as  instru 
mental  music.  The  stuffed-shirt  affectations  of  a  former 
operatic  school,  and  the  trifling,  sirupy  vocal  miniatures  of 
crooning,  both  have  given  way  to  honest  voices,  singing 
with  great  skill  and  beauty,  but  first  of  all,  singing  with 
convincing  sincerity. 

Comedy  changes.  From  sorry  puns  and  " wise-crack 
ing,"  it  changes  to  gags,  and  then  to  situations.  So  active 
has  become  the  sense  of  humor  of  the  radio  audience  that 
today  the  finer  shadings  of  irony  meet  an  appreciative 
chuckle,  and  our  comedians  may  enjoy  the  same  privilege 
of  deft  and  delicate  ridicule  seized  in  an  early  generation 
by  those  masters,  Gilbert  and  Sullivan. 

Any  kind  of  program  may  win  a  large  and  enthusiastic 
following,  so  long  as  it  does  not  commit  the  two  cardinal 
sins  of  being  pompous  and  boring,  and  so  long  as  it  does 
contain  that  life-giving  element  of  showmanship. 

28.     Broadcasting  Subject  to   Constant  Change. — It 

would  be  futile  to  discuss  the  relative  popularity  of 
present-day  programs  because  types  of  programs  are  so 
subject  to  change.  There  is  but  one  certainty  in  radio  work 
— whatever  else  may  be  indefinite,  whatever  else  may  be 
abstract,  the  fact  of  constant  change  is  always  present. 
When  that  condition  ceases  to  be  true,  the  decline  of 
popularity  of  this  medium  may  be  expected.  For  when 
radio  becomes  static,  it  will  have  lost  touch  with  its  audi 
ence;  it  will  have  doffed  the  characteristic  which  it  shares 


RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  2    37 

so  conspicuously  with  the  American  people  today,  the 
spirit  of  freshness,  newness,  change. 

29.  Value  of  Radio  Cumulative. — The  network  broad 
caster  must  look  at  radio  with  the  long  view.     The  value  of 
his  broadcast  advertising  is  cumulative,  and  he  must  plan 
his  efforts  with  the  realization  that  if  these  efforts  are 
initially  successful,  and  if  the  modifications  and  evolution 
of  his  program  meet  with  public  approval,  his  success  may 
continue  for  many  years.     Many  of  the  most  popular  pro 
grams  have  been  broadcast  for  five,  seven,  even  ten  years, 
but  no  one  can  forecast  what  will  be  the  conditions  ten 
years  from  now.  If  the  original  plan  of  use  of  radio  allows 
sufficient  flexibility  in  point  of  form  and  variety;  if  it  is 
founded  on  pleasing  fundamental  human  desires  and  inter 
ests  ;  if  it  is  constructed  on  the  basis  of  meeting  the  average 
American  in  his  home  from  week  to  week  in  cordial  and 
unselfish  friendship;  and  last,  if  these  purposes  are  kept 
always  fresh,  the  program  may  go  on  and  on,  and  hold  that 
popular  goodwill  and  interest  which  alone  make  it  profit 
able. 

SCHEDULING 

30.  Continuity  of  Effort  Needed. — Radio  has  sold 
goods  in  a  spectacular  way  and  these  results  are  rightly 
credited  to  it  as  an  advertising  medium.     However,  much 
credit  for  success  is  due  to  the  methods  radio  has  practically 
forced  its  advertisers  to  employ.     Schedules  in  printed 
advertising  are   highly  flexible.     Usually  they   may  be 
cancelled  upon  short  notice — and  often  they  are .    Contracts 
for  radio  broadcasting  also  are  flexible  and  may  be  cancelled 
on  brief  notice — but  usually  they  are  not. 

The  reasons  for  this  different  point  of  view  toward  the 
printed  page  and  radio,  are  not  easy  to  find.  But  probably 
it  is  because  it  takes  time  to  develop  an  audience,  and  when 
that  audience  has  been  acquired  cancellation  seems  to  be 

536B— 12 


38    RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  2 

literally  throwing  away  a  large  investment.  At  least 
broadcast  advertisers  have  shown  remarkable  stick-to-it- 
iveness  in  their  radio  advertising. 

In  all  probability  the  sheer  continuity  of  effort  many 
broadcasters  have  shown  accounts  in  large  measure  for 
their  successful  use  of  the  medium,  though  needless  to  say, 
a  meritorious  program  helped. 

Another  factor  that  has  made  radio  resultful  is  the  fre 
quency  which  it  requires.  Again,  the  advertiser  has 
found  it  logical  to  accept  the  premise  that  you  must  not 
allow  too  great  an  interval  between  broadcasts  or  the 
audience  will  forget  you.  The  same  condition  applies  in 
printed  advertising,  but,  for  some  reason  or  other,  its 
truth  seems  more  apparent  in  radio.  Consequently, 
broadcasters  employ  a  frequency  of  contact  with  the  public 
seldom  employed  in  printed  advertising.  Usually  the 
longest  interval  allowed  to  elapse  between  programs  is  one 
week,  except  in  the  case  of  those  sponsors  who  confine  their 
broadcasting  to  the  sponsoring  of  the  accounts  of  unusual 
events,  such  as  world's  championship  prize  fights,  auto 
mobile  races  or  foot-ball  games. 

There  is  a  general  axiom  in  radio  that  the  longer  the 
program,  the  longer  the  permissible  interval  between  pro 
grams.  Thus,  the  one-hour  program  is  usually  broadcast 
with  a  frequency  of  once  a  week.  So,  also,  with  half -hour 
programs;  though  here  is  found  a  tendency  to  use  a  higher 
frequency.  Two,  three  and  four-times-a-week  schedules 
of  half-hour  programs  are  much  more  general  than  they 
were  a  few  years  ago  when  this  time  unit  represented  a 
more  impressive  occupancy  of  the  broadcasting  schedule 
than  it  does  today. 

Probably  the  minimum  safe  frequency  for  fifteen- 
minute  programs  may  be  accepted  as  twice  a  week.  But 
even  twice  is  on  the  danger  line.  Three  times  a  week  is 
much  better  as  a  minimum.  And  many  broadcasters 
employ  frequencies  of  four,  five,  six  and  even  seven  times 


RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  2    39 

a  week.  When  time  units  smaller  than  fifteen  minutes 
are  employed,  there  is  need  for  greater  frequency  to  reiter 
ate  the  message  from  day  to  day,  and  to  establish  the 
habit  of  listening.  But  so  far  as  network  broadcasting  is 
concerned,  the  minimum  time  unit  obtainable  is  fifteen 
minutes,  and  smaller  units  must  be  confined  to  spot  broad 
casting. 

31.  Determining  Desirable  Time  Unit. — In  determin 
ing  the  proper  time  unit  for  a  contemplated  broadcast,  the 
following  points  should  be  considered;  (1)  The  relation 
that  the  length  of  the  time  unit  bears  to  frequency  with 
which  it  should  be  used,  (2)  the  type  of  program,  (3)  the 
contemplated  talent,  (4)  the  budget  or  appropriation.  The 
smaller  the  time  unit,  the  greater  its  relative  cost.  For 
example,  four  fifteen-minute  periods  cost  considerably 
more  than  one  full-hour  program. 

Practice  has  indicated  that  it  is  not  desirable  to  have 
commercial  programs  that  are  mostly  or  entirely  talk,  run 
more  than  fifteen  minutes.  That  seems  to  be  about  the 
limit  of  interest  on  the  part  of  the  listener.  A  learned 
professor  of  theology  at  one  of  our  leading  universities 
once  cautioned  his  class  of  student  preachers  that  "No 
souls  are  saved  after  the  first  fifteen  minutes."  The  same 
principle  is  true  in  radio. 

Many  enjoyable  musical  programs  have  been  given  in 
fifteen-minute  periods,  but  this  length  does  restrict  the 
choice  of  music  and  the  manner  of  its  presentation.  If 
musical  expression  is  to  be  given  to  a  representative  variety 
of  moods,  more  time  is  desirable.  With  orchestra,  solo 
voices,  and  group  voices  combined,  a  half-hour  is  almost 
essential.  Probably  serious  music  for  small  instrumental 
groups,  where  variety  is  subordinate  to  the  establishing  of 
a  single  musical  atmosphere,  may  well  be  kept  in  the 
fifteen-minute  time  unit.  The  same  principle  applies 
here  as  in  the  talking  periods. 


40    RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  2 

Variety  shows,  involving  instrumental  music,  vocal 
music  by  soloists  and  groups,  comedy  and  dramatic  skits, 
require  not  less  than  half  an  hour,  and  the  tendency  in 
recent  practice  is  to  give  them  a  full  hour.  The  same 
condition  appears  to  be  true  of  programs  of  symphonic 
music,  played  by  seasoned  orchestras  of  national  reputa 
tion.  Here  the  orchestra  may  present,  through  the 
medium  of  music,  the  same  variety  of  emotional  appeal  and 
intellectual  mood  as  does  the  variety  show. 

32.  Amateur  Hours. — A  phenomenon  of  probably 
passing  popularity  has  been  the  amateur  hours.  The 
reason  this  is  given  only  a  temporary  standing  is  the  well- 
known  tendency  of  Americans  to  overdo  things  and  go  to 
silly  extremes.  Amateur  hours  have  injected  a  fresh  note 
into  broadcasting.  The  sincere  and  earnest  efforts  of 
amateurs  appealed  to  the  sportsmanship  of  the  listener 
— he  felt  like  giving  them  a  break,  even  when  their  per 
formance  was  rather  bad,  though  in  justice  it  must  be  said 
that  many  amateurs  have  done  good  work. 

These  amateur  hours  stimulated  conversation,  aroused 
curiosity  and  interest,  and  elicited  the  sympathetic  support 
of  the  audience.  Thus  they  were  successful  for  the  adver 
tiser.  So  amateur  hours  sprung  up  on  the  networks  and 
simultaneously  in  every  city  and  town.  For  a  while  it 
seemed  as  though  the  entire  radio  world  had  gone  amateur; 
and  this  overdoing  of  an  excellent  idea  must  eventually 
prove  its  undoing. 

The  appeal  of  this  form  of  entertainment  resulted  from 
existing  conditions.  The  first  broadcasting  was  highly 
informal.  It  went  on  or  stopped  in  jerky  fashion,  and 
nearly  anything  was  acceptable.  Then  the  work  of  refin 
ing  started,  and  with  it  came  greater  formality.  This 
developed  to  the  point  where  the  urge  to  precision  and 
perfection  in  the  performance  was  so  great  as  to  communi 
cate  itself  to  the  audience.  Spontaneity  was  completely 


RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  2  4.1 

lost  and  the  listener  almost  felt  that  he  had  on  his  mental 
full-dress  suit  when  he  turned  on  his  radio  set.  The  intro 
duction  of  comedians  smashed  this  formality  pretty 
thoroughly,  and  people  delighted  in  it.  And  with  the  com 
ing  of  greater  freedom  in  broadcasting,  came  the  realization 
that  the  audience  was  not  interested  so  much  in  technique 
as  it  was  in  having  human  beings  human.  Amateur  hours 
were  a  logical  outgrowth  of  this  new  set  of  circumstances. 

33.  Time  of  Day  for  Broadcasting. — In  scheduling 
broadcasting,  real  thought  must  be  given  to  a  selection  of 
the  right  time  of  day.  Ordinarily,  service  programs  should 
be  given  in  the  daytime.  Up  to  the  time  of  the  evening 
meal,  most  persons  are  mentally  and  physically  active. 
But  after  it,  they  relax  and  want  to  be  amused.  Service 
programs,  with  the  possible  exception  of  news  and  editorial 
comment,  bring  facts  and  ideas  that  call  for  mental 
activity.  But  after  our  minds  have  "knocked  off"  active 
work  for  the  day,  we  don't  feel  like  putting  them  back  in 
harness.  Cooking  schools,  household  hints,  exercises,  all 
are  subjects  for  daytime  broadcasting.  And  the  daytime 
audience  is  preponderantly  feminine. 

When  it  is  considered  that  the  woman  in  the  family 
is  the  treasurer  of  the  household,  and  is  estimated  to  be  the 
spender  of  as  much  as  ninety  cents  out  of  each  dollar  of 
family  income,  it  is  evident  that  broadcasting  to  a  feminine 
audience  can  be  an  excellent  thing  to  do.  Many  adver 
tisers  who  have  been  more  interested  in  the  figures  on  the 
sales  sheet  than  in  being  sponsors  of  a  famous  radio  pro 
gram  featuring  some  renowned  "star,"  have  found  the 
daytime  hours  extremely  profitable. 

There  seems  little  question  that  the  possibilities  of 
productive  daytime  broadcasting  have  not  been  suffi 
ciently  explored,  and  that  the  next  important  develop 
ment  in  radio  will  be  an  intensification  of  the  use  of  this 
less  expensive  time.  Already  the  value  of  the  early  morn- 


42     RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  2 

ing  hours  has  come  in  for  increasing  recognition.  And  it 
is  only  a  question  of  time  before  the  skill  and  ingenuity 
of  broadcasters  will  find  ways  to  make  daytime  service 
programs  so  interesting  and  noteworthy  that  they  will 
command  audiences  that  make  daytime  prices  a  bargain. 

Children's  programs  seem  to  be  scheduled,  by  unani 
mous  consent,  between  five  and  seven  in  the  evening. 
That  is,  of  course,  the  family  zero  hour,  when  youngsters 
have  been  called  home  from  play,  when  their  bodies  are 
tired  and  they  show  it  with  restless  querulousness,  and 
when  diversion  is  most  welcome.  That  niche  in  the 
schedule  seems  to  belong  to  children,  and  let  us  hope  that 
broadcasters  will  use  it  carefully  and  understandingly, 
realizing  that  while  parents  may  not  listen,  they  are  quick 
to  note  the  effects  on  their  children;  and  if  the  effects  are 
not  what  parents  desire,  a  chorus  of  protest  will  follow. 

Programs  sponsoring  foods  and  beverages  try  to 
quicken  the  appetite  of  the  listener.  Hence,  it  is  not  good 
practice  to  schedule  them  soon  after  the  usual  meal  times. 
If  they  are  of  major  entertainment  characteristics,  it's 
better  to  wait  until  nine  o'clock  in  the  evening  to  broad 
cast  them,  and  if  they  are  to  cover  more  than  one  time 
zone,  it  may  easily  prove  desirable  to  broadcast  still  later. 

After  ten-thirty  the  mind  of  the  listener,  tired  by  the 
exigencies  of  a  hard  day's  work,  seeks  pure  relaxation. 
Even  following  the  plot  of  a  dramatic  presentation  calls 
for  mental  effort  that  is  given  reluctantly.  Certainly 
this  is  the  time  for  music ;  and  even  the  kind  of  music  may 
well  be  considered  from  the  point  of  view  of  the  tired  mind. 
It  may  better  be  music  that  calls  for  a  little  intellectual 
understanding,  music  that  appeals  directly  to  the  more 
passive  of  our  emotions.  The  outstanding  success  of  one 
orchestra  leader  in  recent  years  has  been  attributed  to 
the  fact  that  he  selected  programs  to  appeal  to  "tired 
women."  He  asked  nothing  of  them  but  to  relax,  be 
completely  at  ease,  and  listen  comfortably. 


RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  2    43 

34.  Competing  Programs. — A  factor  to  be  considered 
in  scheduling  is  competing  programs.  Some  programs 
have  such  outstanding  merit  that  they  practically  own 
the  air.  When  you  find  one  of  these,  it's  just  as  well  to  see 
if  there  is  not  some  other  time  available  that  is  not  quite 
so  thoroughly  dominated  by  a  single  program,  or  by  two 
noteworthy  programs. 

On  the  other  hand,  some  programs  have  such  a  pro 
nounced  character  that,  even  though  you  know  they  are 
popular,  you  must  also  know  there  are  large  numbers  of 
people  who  would  prefer  to  hear  something  else.  Take 
a  mystery  story  period  for  example.  You  can  be  certain 
that,  if  it  is  well  done,  it  has  a  large  following  of  those  who 
love  to  be  thrilled  and  startled.  But  there  are  also  large 
numbers  of  persons  who  don't  want  to  be  startled.  If  your 
program  is  so  completely  different  in  theme  and  execution 
that  it  may  seem  to  stand  at  an  opposite  extreme,  it  may 
readily  obtain  that  large  unsatisfied  audience,  even  in 
direct  competition  with  a  program  of  proved  popularity. 

One  additional  factor  in  scheduling  lies  in  the  pro 
grams  that  precede  and  follow  yours.  Often  a  new  pro 
gram  gets  off  to  a  quick  start  by  immediately  following  a 
program  of  proved  popularity — merely  because  circum 
stances  enable  it  to  inherit  much  of  its  audience  from  its 
predecessor,  and  its  own  merit  holds  that  audience.  Like 
wise,  if  a  spectacular  program  is  scheduled  to  follow  yours, 
many  listeners  will  tune  in  early,  hear  your  program  and 
be  pleased  by  it,  and  form  the  habit  of  listening  to  all  of 
your  program  and  then  to  their  original  favorite  after 
wards. 

Good  scheduling  cannot  make  an  inferior  program 
successful,  but  it  can  speed  the  rise  of  popularity  of  a  good 
program,  and  put  the  advertiser's  dollars  to  useful  work 
more  quickly. 


44    RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  2 

MAIL  RESPONSE 

35.  Obtaining  Reponse  from  Listeners. — The  first 
radio  programs  brought  letters  of  appreciation  from  list 
eners  and  disclosed  that  people  could  be  sufficiently  inter 
ested  in  what  they  heard  to  write  about  it.     This  fact 
furnished  the  broadcast  advertiser  with  a  means  of  measur 
ing  the  size  of  his  listening  audience. 

For  years  there  was  great  curiosity  in  regard  to  the 
number  of  listeners,  and  at  times  rather  extravagant  means 
where  employed  to  draw  mail  from  the  radio  audience. 
After  a  period  when  people  were  invited  to  write  in  if  they 
had  heard  the  broadcast,  came  the  introduction  of  mail 
stimuli.  These  took  the  form  of  "give-away."  If  you 
wrote  in  and  asked  for  something  you  would  receive  it 
free.  That  procedure  was  a  great  success  in  stimulating 
mail,  but  the  commercial  advantage  to  the  broadcaster  was 
questionable. 

36.  Danger  in  Free  Offers. — There  is  one  great  danger 
in  free  offers ;  namely,  that  there  is  no  way  to  forecast  how 
many  requests  there  will  be,  and  therefore  there  is  no  way 
of  telling  how  much  they  will  cost.     Many  sponsors  had 
expensive  experiences  with  free  offers,  particularly  when 
competition  in  giving  things  away  sprang  up  and  the  offers 
became    increasingly    attractive.     The    proposition    was 
uneconomic  in  principle,  and  it  soon  underwent  drastic 
modification. 

Prize  contests  of  one  kind  or  another  supplanted  free 
offers  pretty  generally,  and,  as  usual,  they  were  overdone. 
For  a  time  it  seemed  as  though  every  program  had  a  prize 
contest. 

Those  who  retained  the  free  offer  policy  changed  it 
to  include  a  provision  that  meant  in  practice,  if  not  in 
theory,  that  the  letter  writer  first  purchase  the  mer 
chandise.  Box  tops,  wrappers,  bands,  cartons — anything 


RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  2  45 

that  gave  evidence  of  a  purchase — became  a  requirement 
for  the  obtaining  of  a  give-away.  This  proved  a  sales  stim 
ulus  of  merit,  and  the  practice  has  worked  out  satisfac 
torily  enough  to  warrant  the  opinion  that  it  will  be  a  per 
manent  form  of  radio  merchandising. 

37.  Sampling. — There  will  always  be    a    place    for 
straight,  unconditional  give-aways  in  the  form  of  samples. 
But  sampling  by  mail  can  be  very  costly  when  done  on  a 
large  scale,  and  some  modifications  of  this  general  idea 
are  usually  followed.     Where  a   new  product  is   being 
introduced  into  a  line,  for  example,  the  sample  may  be  a 
full-sized  package,  but  to  obtain  it  the  writer  must  send  in 
a  carbon,  box  top,  or  other  item  which  indicates  the  sale 
of  some  other  article  in  the  advertiser's  line. 

It  is  obvious  that  this  change  did  away  with  the 
original  objective  of  obtaining  mail  merely  for  the  purpose 
of  'estimating  the  size  of  the  audience.  The  purpose 
changed  to  a  specific  sales  promotional  activity,  and  that 
put  it  on  an  economic  basis  subjected  to  adequate  control. 

The  audience  mail,  particularly  where  samples  are 
used,  may  be  employed  effectively  in  drives  for  distribu 
tion.  A  bundle  of  letters  containing  the  names  and 
addresses  of  people  interested  in  a  product  to  the  point  of 
writing  for  a  sample,  people  who  live  in  the  neighborhood 
served  by  a  prospective  dealer,  is  a  powerful  inducement 
in  the  hands  of  an  intelligent  salesman. 

38.  Volume  of  Audience  Mail. — The  volume  of  audi 
ence  mail  is  itself  a  spectacular  thing.     The  pieces  of 
audience  mail  received  by  the  three  major  networks  alone, 
without  consideration  of  such  mail  sent  to  all  the  remaining 
stations  in  this  country,  from  1928  to  1934,  were  as  follows: 

1928—    815,458  1931—7,305,455 

1929—1,704,067  1932—8,327,647 

1930—3,205,646  1933—7,482,722 

1934—9,752,909 


46    RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  2 

These  figures  reveal  the  enormous  forces  with  which 
the  radio  broadcaster  is  dealing;  the  need  for  utmost  care 
in  the  selection  of  merchandise  to  be  sent  to  letter  writers ; 
and  also  the  necessity  for  seeking  either  a  means  of  con 
trolling  the  volume  or  else  of  establishing  qualifications 
which  produce  sales  of  sufficient  proportions  at  a  proper 
cost. 

Everything  from  cross-word  puzzles  to  racing  turtles 
has  been  offered  to  radio  audiences.  The  kinds  of  things, 
exclusive  of  samples,  offered  to  letter-writers  by  broad 
cast  advertisers,  go  in  cycles  of  popularity,  just  as  every 
thing  else  in  radio  does.  At  one  time  cross-word  puzzles 
were  sure-fire  mail  stimulants.  Now  nobody  considers 
them.  When  an  offer  is  being  considered,  a  careful  survey 
should  be  made  of  all  radio  offers  then  current;  possible 
offers  should  be  carefully  studied;  and  the  conditions  of 
the  gift  and  methods  of  distribution  should  be  placed  in 
the  hands  of  men  who  have  the  background  of  years  of 
experience  with  them.  The  possibilities  of  this  subject 
are  like  dynamite,  and  it  should  be  handled  with  the  utmost 
care. 

MERCHANDISING  THE  PROGRAM 

39.  Merchandising. — The  term  merchandising,  as 
applied  to  a  program,  covers  all  the  acts  or  business  prac 
tises  employed  to  bring  the  program  to  the  attention  of  the 
public  and  those  who  have  or  should  have  an  interest  in  its 
success.  Broadcast  advertising  contains  so  many  ele 
ments  of  drama  and  human  interest,  that  it  lends  itself 
ideally  to  intensive  merchandising.  The  human  imagina 
tion  is  practically  the  only  limit  that  can  be  placed  on  the 
methods  and  means  of  merchandising  a  program  to  all  those 
in  whom  the  advertiser  is  interested — wholesalers,  retail 
ers,  company  salesmen,  factory  employes,  and  consumers. 

One  of  the  principle  functions  of  advertising  is  to  focus 
interest  and  create  conversation.  In  this  respect,  radio 


RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  2    47 

advertising  has  advantages  not  enjoyed  by  the  printed 
word,  because  its  appeal  is  so  directly  to  the  emotions. 
Radio,  entering  the  home  as  an  invited  guest,  presenting 
personalities  for  whom  the  family  feels  a  personal  affection, 
providing  entertainment  and  amusement  with  a  generous 
hand,  has  an  intimacy  in  the  family  that  is  all  its  own. 
And  this  intimacy  provides  opportunities  for  merchandis 
ing  the  program  never  before  available. 

Increasing  recognition  of  the  importance  of  alert  and 
aggressive  merchandising  is  evident  on  the  part  of  all  con 
cerned  with  radio.  Offhand  it  might  seem  paradoxical 
to  advertise  your  own  advertising.  But,  whether  it  is  or 
not,  results  prove  the  value  of  so  doing.  It  helps  to  build 
audiences  more  quickly  and  to  a  very  desirable  extent  it 
directs  their  thinking.  It  provides  the  background  infor 
mation  that  people  want,  and  at  the  same  time  stimulates 
curiosity.  It  engenders  enthusiasm  throughout  the  whole 
system  of  distribution.  It  increases  the  factory  workers 
incentive  to  good  workmanship. 

Every  network  program  should  be  thoroughly  mer 
chandised  before  it  is  launched.  The  trade  should  be 
completely  informed  regarding  the  structure  of  the  pro 
gram,  the  individual  stations  in  the  network,  potential 
audience  data,  biographies  of  the  personalities  on  the  pro 
gram,  and  details  of  any  offers  being  made. 

40.  Store  Display  Useful. — Window,  counter,  and 
store  displays,  giving  program  information  and  the  days 
and  hours  of  the  broadcasts,  should  be  furnished  all  out 
lets  and  be  exhibited  prominently.  To  all  employes  of  the 
sponsor  should  be  given  a  full  description  of  the  effort,  and 
they  should  be  urged  to  invite  their  friends  to  listen. 
Newspaper  advertisements  on  the  radio-program  pages 
should  call  attention  to  the  program  and  its  features,  and 
mention  should  be  made  of  the  program  in  all  advertis 
ing  regardless  of  character. 


48    RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  2 

The  activities  outlined  above  may  be  considered  a 
bare  minimum  for  the  launching  of  the  program.  After  it 
starts,  promotion  and  publicity  should  continue  ener 
getically.  Special  inserts  in  packages,  special  "radio" 
wrappings,  new  display  cards — anything  that  invention 
and  ingenuity  can  devise  with  proper  consideration  of  costs, 
should  be  employed  to  keep  the  radio  program,  its  sponsor, 
and  the  product  advertised  before  the  public  and  all  dis 
tributors.  Unless  these  things  are  done,  the  program  will 
be  working  under  a  handicap,  and  cannot  be  so  quickly 
effective  as  good  advertising  practice  demands. 


CONCLUSION 

41.  In  writing  of  radio  broadcasting,  the  purpose  has 
been  to  give  a  general  picture  of  this  great  promotional 
medium  and  to  relate  some  of  the  experience  that  has 
attended  its  evolution  and  led  up  to  general  practices  now 
employed. 

It  is  impossible  to  lay  down  hard  and  fast  rules.  The 
methods,  the  ideas,  the  activities  of  1928  went  out  of  date 
in  1928 — and  so  will  those  of  the  present  year.  Radio, 
of  all  commercial  activities,  is  probably  closest  to  the  home 
and  the  family.  It  is  a  part  of  their  daily  lives,  bringing 
the  best  in  all  the  outside  w^orld  directly  into  their  living 
rooms. 

And  if  radio  lives  with  people,  it  must  conform  to  people 
as  they  and  their  interests  change  from  day  to  day.  People 
do  not  change  according  to  rule  or  plan.  They  go  off  in 
the  most  surprising  directions.  And  radio  must  go  with 
them.  When  it  loses  touch,  it  loses  influence. 

The  most  reliable  guide  to  the  student  of  radio  is  his 
own  observation  and  interpretation  of  what  people  are 
interested  in.  A  good  education,  good  literature,  good 


RADIO  BROADCAST  ADVERTISING,  PART  2    49 

music,  intelligent  theater  going,  thoughtful  attention  to 
programs  on  the  air — all  these  can  be  very  helpful  to  him. 
But  in  the  final  anatysis,  the  people  who  will  listen  to  his 
broadcast  are  the  ones  the  broadcaster  should  know.  His 
instruction  must  come  from  his  daily  contacts  with  other 
human  beings. 


RADIO   BROADCAST  ADVERTISING 

Serial  3360B  (PART  2)  Edition  1 

Review  Questions 

NOTE. — These  Review  Questions  are  given  merely  that  you  may  test  yourself 
On  your  general  knowledge  of  the  points  discussed  in  this  lessen.  If  there  is  any 
question  that  you  are  unable  to  answer,  this  indicates  that  you  have  missed  the 
point  involved  and  should  read  the  text  again.  You  can  readily  find  the  answers 
of  all  of  these  questions  in  the  text,  but  dc  not  send  your  answers  in  for  correction. 

(1)  Define  spot  broadcasting  and  tell  in  what  way 
it  differs  from  network  broadcasting. 

(2)  Tell  several  advantages  of  spot  broadcasting. 

(3)  What  are  electrical  transcriptions  and  why  are 
they  used? 

(4)  Tell  three  ways  by  which  spot  broadcasting  may 
be  merchandised. 

(5)  Name  the  four  steps  in  preparing  spot  broadcasts. 

(6)  Name   eleven  points   to   consider   as   guide   to 
station  selection  for  spot  broadcasts. 

(7)  How  large  a  portion  of  the  United  States  is  it 
possible  to  reach  through  chain  network  broad 
casting? 

(8)  What  are  sustaining  programs  and  why  are  they 
used  in  radio  broadcasting? 

(9)  What  danger  is  sometimes  experienced  in  using 
radio-star  talent? 

(10)  Give  the  probable  reason  that  advertisers  do  not 
cancel  radio  broadcasting  schedules  as  they  often 
do  advertising  campaigns.